PLAIN PAPER FACSIMILE
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTICE TO USERS
Please read through this manual before using the machine. After reading it, be certain to keep it so that you may refer to it whenever necessary.
U. S. A.
for repair/warranty information. If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network,
the telephone company may request you remove the equipment from the network,
until the problem is resolved.
WARNING
FCC Notice: Part 15
This terminal has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in
a commercial environment. This equipment generates, and can radiate radio fre-
quency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with this guide, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this terminal in a residen-
tial area is likely to cause harmful interferences in which case the user will be required
to correct the interference at his/her own expense.
The equipment may not used on coin service provided by the telephone network,
connection to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs. (Contact the state public
utility commission, or corporation commission for information.)
This device is equipped with a USOC RJ11C connector.
THE TELEPHONE CONSUMER PROTECTION ACT: The Telephone Consumer Pro-
tection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other
electronic device to send any message via a telephone fax machine unless such a
message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or
on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification
of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message and the
telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual.
WARNING
FCC Notice: Part 68
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules. On the rear of this equipment
is a label that contains, among other information, the FCC Registration Number and
ringer equivalence number (REN) for this equipment. If requested, this information
must be provided to the telephone company.
The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices that may be connected to the
telephone line. Excessive REN’s on the telephone line may result in the devices not
ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the
REN’s should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may
be connected to the line, as determined by the total REN’s contact the telephone
company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area.
In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the
setup procedures listed for station ID number and name on pages 42 and 43 in this
manual.
This equipment is hearing aid compatible.
If your facsimile machine causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone com-
pany will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be
required. But if advance notice is not practical, you will be notified as soon as pos-
sible, also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you
believe it is necessary.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or
procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the
telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make the neces-
sary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service.
If you experience trouble with this facsimile machine, please contact
TOSHIBA AMERICA BUSINESS SOLUTIONS, INC.
Electronic Imaging Division
2 Musick, Irvine, CA 92618-1631
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTICE TO USERS
Canada
AVIS: L’étiquette d’lndustrie Canada identifie le marériel homologué. Cette étiquette
certifie que le matériel est conforme aux normes de protection, d’exploitation et de
sécurité des réseaux de télécommunications, comme le prescrivent les documents
concernant les exigences techniques relatives au matériel terminal. Le Ministére
n’assure toutefois pas que le matériel fonctionnera à la satisfaction de l’utilisateur.
NOTICE:
The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certifi-
cation means that the equipment meets telecommunications network protective, op-
erational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equip-
ment Technical Requirements document(s). The Department does not guarantee the
equipment will operate to the user's satisfaction.
Avant d’installer ce matériel, l’utilisateur doit s’assurer qu’il est permis de le raccorder
aux installations de l’entreprise locale de télécommunication. Le matériel doit
également être installé en suivant une méthode acceptée de raccordement. L’abonné
ne doit pas oublier qu’il est possible que la conformité aux conditions énoncées ci-
dessus n’empêche pas la dégradation du service dans certaines situations.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to connect
a facsimile to the facilities of their local telecommunications company. The equipment
must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer
should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degrada-
tion of service in some situations.
Les réparations de matériel homologué doivent être coordonnées par un représentant
désigné par le fournisseur. L’entreprise de télécommunications peut demander à
l’utilisateur de débrancher un appareil à la suite de réparations ou de modifications
effectuées par l’utilisateur ou à cause de mauvais fonctionnement.
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated
by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or
equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request
the user to disconnect the equipment.
Pour sa propre protection, l’utilisateur doit s’assurer que tous les fils de mise à la terre
de la source d’énergie électrique, des lignes téléphoniques et des canalisations d’eau
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of
the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present,
are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
métalliques, s’il
y
en a, sont raccordés ensemble. Cette précaution est
particulièrement importante dans les régions rerales.
Avertissement: L’utilisateur ne doit pas tenter de faire ces raccordements luimême; il
doit avoir recours à un service d’inspection des installations électriques, ou à un
électricien, selon le cas.
CAUTION:
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but
should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropri-
ate.
L’indice d’equivalence de la sonnerie de ce matériel 0.3
The Ringer Equivalence Number of your facsimile is 0.3
AVIS: L’indice d’équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) assigné à chaque dispositif terminal
indique le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent être raccordés à une interface.
La terminaison d’une interface téléphonique peut consister en une combinaison de
quelques dispositifs, à la seule condition que la somme d’indices d’équivalence de la
sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n’excède pas 5.
NOTICE:
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal
device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be
connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of
any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer
Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5.
TOSHIBA OF CANADA LIMITED
Office Product Group
191 McNABB STREET
MARKHAM, ONTARIO L3R 8H2
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OZONE SAFETY INFORMATION
The ozone filter (used with this machine) complies with Environmental Protection
Agency regulations for ozone emissions in an office environment. This means that this
facsimile does not produce hazardous ozone emissions greater than 0.1 ppm.
Replace the ozone filter:
An ozone filter has been provided with this unit and is to be replaced at the same
interval as the drum unit. See page 32.
LASER SAFETY INFORMATION
This facsimile is certified as a Class I laser product under the U.S. Department of
Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to
the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. This means that this facsimile
does not produce hazardous laser radiation.
All laser light emitted inside the facsimile is completely confined within protective
housings when any part of the facsimile is opened. This means that the facsimile is
safe to use during normal operation and maintenance. Adjustment or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous laser exposure.
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug
Administration implemented regulations for laser products. These regulations apply to
laser products manufactured from August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for prod-
ucts marketed in the United States. The sample label shown below indicates compli-
ance with these CDRH regulations and is attached to all laser facsimiles marketed in
the United States.
001
WARNING
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other
than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radia-
tion exposure.
Only trained and qualified personnel may open covers or remove
parts that are not explicitly shown and described in the Operator’s
Manual as being accessible to the Operator.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTENTS
Character Entry .....................................................................................36
Keys Used in Character Entry ..........................................................36
Special Character Table ....................................................................36
Character Correction ........................................................................37
INITIAL SETUP ......................................................................38
Initial Setting Summary..........................................................................38
Language Selection ...............................................................................39
Date and Time Setting ...........................................................................40
Terminal ID Setting ................................................................................42
Dial Type Setting ....................................................................................44
DEVICE CONFIGURATION....................................................45
Configuration Summary.........................................................................45
Bell Ringer Volume Adjustment..............................................................47
Alarm Tone Volume Adjustment .............................................................48
Key TouchTone Volume Adjustment.......................................................49
MonitorVolume Adjustment ...................................................................50
Power Saver Operation..........................................................................51
Setting Separator Page .........................................................................53
Department Code Setting ......................................................................55
Department Code Maintenance.............................................................57
Account Codes ......................................................................................58
Print Density Setting ..............................................................................59
Document Length Setting ......................................................................60
Line Monitor...........................................................................................61
Receive Interval Setting.........................................................................62
ECM Default Setting ..............................................................................63
Default Setting for Document Mode (Resolution and Contrast)..............64
Collate Copy Setting ..............................................................................65
Letter Head Paper Setting .....................................................................66
Setting Redial (Interval and Counter).....................................................67
Auto Receive Mode ...............................................................................68
Line-2 Operation....................................................................................69
NOTICE TO USERS ................................................................1
NOTICE TO USERS ................................................................2
OZONE SAFETY INFORMATION ..........................................3
LASER SAFETY INFORMATION ...........................................3
FEATURES .............................................................................8
CARE AND MAINTENANCE..................................................9
INTRODUCTION.......................................................... 10
FACSIMILE UNIT DESCRIPTIONS ........................................10
Front View..............................................................................................10
Rear View ..............................................................................................11
When Optional Recording Paper Trays are Installed ..............................12
OPERATION PANEL.................................................... 13
SETUP ......................................................................... 16
UNPACKING ...........................................................................16
FACSIMILE MACHINE INSTALLATION .................................18
ConnectingYour TOSHIBA Facsimile.....................................................18
Recording Paper Exit Tray .....................................................................19
Document Exit Tray................................................................................19
Charger Cleaner, Mylar Scraper ............................................................19
INITIAL PRINTING SUPPLIES INSTALLATION ....................20
Recording Paper Installation ..................................................................20
Recording Paper Size Adjustment .........................................................22
Bypass Tray Installation .........................................................................23
Developer Assembly and Drum Unit Installation ....................................25
Fuser Cleaner Installation......................................................................27
PRINTING SUPPLIES REPLACEMENT ................................28
Toner Cartridge Replacement................................................................28
Drum Unit Replacement ........................................................................31
QUICK START ........................................................................34
Terminal ID ............................................................................................34
Transmitting ...........................................................................................34
Receiving ..............................................................................................34
USER INTERFACE OPERATION ...........................................35
Menu Operation.....................................................................................35
Keys Used in Menu Operation ..........................................................35
BASIC FUNCTIONS .................................................... 70
AUTOMATICTELEPHONE DIALING .....................................70
Abbreviated Dialer Registration .............................................................70
One Touch Dialer Registration ...............................................................77
Group Number Registration ...................................................................83
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reception Multicopy Setting ..................................................................116
TELEPHONE HANDSET OPERATION (Optional) ................117
On-hook Dialing.....................................................................................117
Tone Output ...........................................................................................118
Redialing ...............................................................................................118
COMMUNICATION STATUS...................................................119
Current Job Status ................................................................................119
Display & Print Transmission Report......................................................120
Communication Journal .........................................................................120
CANCELLING A COMMUNICATION JOB.............................121
Cancelling a Direct Transmission ...........................................................121
Cancelling a Job Reservation ................................................................121
TRANSMIT CONFIGURATION...............................................87
Document Specifications .......................................................................87
Document Loading ................................................................................88
Scan Resolution Setting ........................................................................89
Contrast Setting.....................................................................................90
Default Setting for Memory Transmission...............................................91
Send After Scan Default Setting ............................................................92
Default Setting for Security Transmission ...............................................93
COPYING ............................................................................... 94
Paper Size for Copying ..........................................................................94
Copying Procedure ................................................................................95
DIALING METHODS ..............................................................97
One Touch Key Dialing...........................................................................97
Abbreviated Dialing................................................................................98
Alphabet Dialing ....................................................................................99
Keypad Dialing ......................................................................................100
TRANSMITTING .....................................................................101
MemoryTransmission............................................................................101
Memory Transmission Procedure .....................................................102
DirectTransmission ...............................................................................103
Direct Transmission as Default Setting..............................................103
Temporary Direct Transmission.........................................................105
On-hook Transmission (Monitor Speaker Dialing) .............................106
Off-hook Transmission (Optional Handset Dialing) ...........................107
External Off-hook Transmission
(Transmission Using an External Telephone) ....................................109
Redialing ...............................................................................................110
Automatic Redialing..........................................................................110
Manual Redialing Direct Transmission ..............................................110
Manual Redialing Jobs in Memory....................................................111
RECEIVING ............................................................................112
Automatic Receiving Mode ....................................................................112
Manual Receiving Mode ........................................................................112
Selecting the Receiving Mode ...............................................................112
Recording Paper Size ............................................................................113
Reception Reduction Setting .................................................................113
Reception Discard Setting .....................................................................114
Reverse Order Printing Setting ..............................................................115
ADVANCED FUNCTIONS ........................................... 123
MULTI-ADDRESSTRANSMISSION (BROADCASTING) ...... 123
Group Broadcast Transmission ..............................................................123
Multi-Key Quick Broadcast Transmission ...............................................124
RELAYTRANSMISSION ........................................................ 126
Relay Transmission, Relay-Relay Transmission Overview .....................126
Setting Up a Relay Box..........................................................................127
Deleting a Relay Box .............................................................................132
Relay Transmission to a Remote Hub ....................................................134
POLLING & MAILBOX COMMUNICATIONS .........................136
Polling & Mailbox Overview....................................................................136
Polling Reservation...........................................................................136
Polling Reception..............................................................................136
Open Mailbox (ITU-T Compatible) ....................................................137
Simple & Security Polling Reservation ...................................................138
Public Mailbox Polling Reservation ........................................................140
Simple & Secure Polling ........................................................................141
Multi Address Polling .............................................................................143
Continuous Polling .................................................................................145
Turnaround Polling .................................................................................147
MAILBOX (ITU-T Compatible)............................................... 149
Setting Up a Mailbox..............................................................................149
Deleting a Mailbox .................................................................................151
Sending a Document to a Mailbox (Remote Hub) ..................................153
Reserving a Document to a Mailbox (Local Hub)...................................155
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Retrieving (Polling) a Document from a Mailbox (Remote Hub) .............157
Printing a Document from a Mailbox (Local Hub) ..................................159
Cancelling Documents in a Mailbox (Local Hub)....................................161
ADVANCEDTRANSMISSION FUNCTIONS ..........................163
Department Code Access .....................................................................163
Account Code Entry ..............................................................................164
Cover Sheet Registration.......................................................................165
Chain Dialing .........................................................................................166
TTI (Transmit Terminal ID) Print .............................................................167
Setting Recovery Transmission..............................................................168
Sending Recovery Transmission............................................................169
PIN Mask...............................................................................................171
Disabling ECM Temporarily....................................................................172
ADVANCED RECEPTION FUNCTIONS ................................173
Privileged Reception..............................................................................173
RTI (Remote Terminal ID) Print..............................................................174
Display the RTI Menu ............................................................................174
Select the RTI Print Option ....................................................................174
Memory Reception Setting ....................................................................175
Secure Reception Access Code Setting ................................................176
Secure RX Activation Period Setting......................................................177
Secure RX Manual Activation ................................................................179
Secure RX Print.....................................................................................180
TRANSMISSION OPTIONS ...................................................181
Delayed Communication (Time Designation) .........................................181
Communication Report Print .................................................................182
PriorityTransmission .............................................................................183
Low Speed Transmission .......................................................................184
Dialing with Sub-Address ......................................................................185
Attaching or Printing a Cover Sheet.......................................................187
Line Selection ........................................................................................189
Enabling or Disabling Send After Scan Temporarily ...............................190
Setting the Page Count..........................................................................192
Line Monitor...........................................................................................193
SecurityTransmission ............................................................................194
Direct Transmission Report Setting........................................................197
Memory Transmission Report Setting ....................................................198
Multi-Address Transmission Report Setting ..........................................199
Multi-Polling Report Setting ...................................................................200
Relay Originator Report Setting .............................................................201
Relay Station Transmission Report Setting ............................................202
Relay Destination Report Setting...........................................................203
Reception List Settings ..........................................................................204
LIST AND REPORT PRINT FORMAT AND
PRINTING PROCEDURE .......................................................205
Transmission/Reception Journal (Communication Journal) ...................205
Transmission Report..............................................................................207
Memory Transmission Report ................................................................208
Reservation List.....................................................................................209
Multi-Address Transmission Report .......................................................210
Multi-Polling Report ...............................................................................211
Relay Transmission Originator Report ...................................................212
Relay Transmission Relay Station Report ..............................................213
Relay Transmission End Terminal Report ..............................................214
Relay Reception List..............................................................................215
Mailbox/Relay Box (ITU-T Compatible F-code Communication) List......216
Department Control List ........................................................................217
Preset Dialing Number Lists ..................................................................218
All of Lists .........................................................................................218
Alphabetical Sort List........................................................................219
Abbreviated Dial Number List ...........................................................220
Group Number List ...........................................................................221
One Touch Number List ....................................................................222
Function List ..........................................................................................223
Menu List...............................................................................................224
Power Failure List ..................................................................................225
TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................. 226
Error Messages .....................................................................226
Paper Jam Error Codes .........................................................................228
Error Codes Printed on Reports ............................................................229
Transmission Problems..........................................................................230
Reception Problems ..............................................................................231
Clearing a Document Jam .....................................................................232
LISTS AND REPORTS ................................................ 195
LIST AND REPORT OPTIONS SETTING ..............................195
Reception Journal Settings....................................................................195
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing a Recording Paper Jam ...........................................................233
When the Recorded Image is not Clear... ..............................................235
Document Scanner Cleaning Procedure ..........................................235
Recording Unit Cleaning Procedure .................................................237
USER TEST MODE..................................................... 240
AUTOMATICTEST MODE ...................................................... 240
AUTO TEST...........................................................................................240
INDIVIDUALTEST MODE ...................................................... 241
INDIVIDUAL TEST Summary ................................................................241
ADF TEST .............................................................................................242
KEY TEST .............................................................................................244
LED TEST .............................................................................................245
LCD TEST .............................................................................................246
SPEAKER TEST ...................................................................................247
SWITCH TEST ......................................................................................248
TEST PRINT .........................................................................................251
TEST RESULT ........................................................................252
PRINTING a TEST RESULT..................................................................252
REMOTE SERVICE ..................................................... 253
RDC (Remote Diagnosis Configuration) Service ...............253
AUTOMATIC SUPPLIES ORDER........................................... 254
Automatic Supplies Order Setting ..........................................................254
SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................... 255
SUPPLIES ................................................................... 256
HARDWARE OPTIONS ............................................... 256
TOSHIBA Viewer ......................................................... 257
INDEX .......................................................................... 287
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEATURES
Super G3 High-speed Communications
Substitute Memory Reception
Provides state-of-the-art V.34 modem technology for worldwide compatibility at
speeds up to 33,600 bits per second.
When the recording paper or supplies have been depleted or in the event of a
recording paper jam, your receptions will be safely stored in memory until the
problem is corrected.
High Resolution, 256 Level Halftone
With a maximum resolution of 16 dots/mm x 15.4 lines/mm (406 DPI x 391 LPI)
and 256 level halftone, precision drawings, small-size characters, photographs,
etc. are copied, sent, and received with exceptional clarity.
Memory Release
Minimizes the potential for memory overflows when connected with a remote loca-
tion. After each page has been successfully transmitted it is released from memory
to make room for subsequent pages.
Open Network Mailbox Systems
TOSHIBA Viewer
Your new TOSHIBA provides ITU-T F-code communication for Open Mailbox op-
eration.
Installing the TOSHIBA Viewer software that comes with the machine enables
following functions (see page 255).
Hyper Scan Document Scanning
• 600 dpi plain paper laser printer
PC print jobs are printed on plain paper at a crisp 600 dpi print resolution.
Allows letter sized originals to be scanned into memory in as little as 1.2 seconds
per page.
• Setting and programming the machine from a PC
You can set up and program the machine from a PC.
73 Programmable One Touch Autodialer Keys
Allows remote locations to be quickly dialed at the touch of a key saving time and
eliminating mis-dialed phone numbers.
• PC Scanner function
The machine can be used as a Twain compatible B/W image scanner (16 dots/
mm x 15.4 dots/mm max.).
300 Abbreviated Autodial Locations
In addition to the 73 One Touch Autodialer Keys, 300 abbreviated locations can
also be programmed with other frequently called locations. These locations can
then be easily accessed using abbreviated codes ranging from 001 to 999.
User Test Mode
The user test mode can help you to find the cause of a machine problem should a
failure occur.
22 Function Keys
Twenty two frequently used functions are assigned to the keys located on the One
Touch Index Panel. These keys allow direct access to frequently used function
settings and operations.
PCL Printing (Option)
By installing the optional PCL Print Kit (GA-1020), the machine can be used as a
PCL printer. Adding the optional NIC Kit (GF-1010) enables to use the machine as
a network PCL printer.
Multi-address (Broadcast Transmission)
This feature allows the transmission of a document to multiple remote units with
one operation sequence. Locations may be selected using the autodialer or infre-
quently dialed locations that have not been preregistered.
Internet Fax Function (Option)
You can send a facsimile message via the internet by having the optional Internet
Fax Kit (GD-1040) and NIC Kit (GF-1010) installed in the machine.
Multi-Memory Access Operation
Allows up to 5 operations such as transmission or reception on either line 1 or line
2 (if so equipped), printing, scanning, and programming to be performed at the
same time.
Super Power Saver Mode
Reduces power consumption to approx. 2W by turning all unnecessary functions
off in the standby mode.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CARE AND MAINTENANCE
Do not Place the Unit in the Following Environments
About Power for the Unit
•
•
This unit requires 120 V AC, 60Hz electric power. This unit should not be used in
countries that do not conform to domestic power provisions.
Do not place this facsimile unit in the environments described below.
•
Where temperature is excessively high, such as places close to heaters, radiators,
direct sunlight, etc.
Insert the power cord plug firmly to the wall outlet, then insert the other end of the
cord into the receptacle on the machine. If it is not firmly connected, the unit will
not operate normally. When unplugging the unit, grasp by the plug and not the
cord.
•
•
•
•
•
Where the temperature can become excessively low.
Where water or any chemicals may come in contact with the unit.
Where the humidity is too high.
•
•
Do not share one outlet with too many electric appliances. This may create a fire
hazard.
Where dust, dirt, metal filings, or hazardous gases may exist.
When the possibility of lightning arises, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Also, unplug the phone cord from the facsimile unit. This prevents possible dam-
age from lightning striking power or phone lines.
Near equipment with strong magnetic fields, such as a radio’s, TV’s, audio
amplifier’s, speaker’s, or other electric appliances.
•
•
Where condensation may easily result, i.e., an environment subject to sudden
temperature changes, such as places close to an air-conditioner or heater.
•
•
Avoid sharing the electrical wall outlet with other equipment that may cause power
surges (air-conditioners, large copiers, etc.). Power surges may cause the unit to
malfunction.
Where vibrations frequently occur. (Provide a space of 4 inches or more between
the rear side of the unit and the wall.)
Do not step on the power cord, and do not place anything on it.
Other Remarks
When a Power Failure Occurs
•
•
In the event of a power failure, neither facsimile nor telephone functions of the unit
are available.
•
Do not disassemble or modify the facsimile unit. This may result in electric shock,
hazard or machine malfunction.
In the event a power failure occurs (or the power to the unit has been discon-
nected), functions and unit operation will not be possible. Any document data
stored in memory will be retained for a period of approximately 10 hours (if the
internal battery is fully charged). This period may be shortened if optional memory
has been installed. On exceeding that time limit, the following items will be erased:
•
•
Keep fire sources away from the facsimile unit. This may create a fire hazard.
Keep paper clips and staples away from the unit. If metal objects fall in the unit, it
may damage the machine.
•
•
•
•
•
Avoid opening the unit while it is scanning or printing. The operation will stop and it
may cause a malfunction and/or damage.
•
Document data stored in memory for Transmission, Substitute Memory Recep-
tions, etc.
Do not drop, hit, or apply excessive shocks to the unit, as this may result in
damage to the unit.
•
The address and designated time of each Timer Transmission, Timer Polling
Reception, etc.
When using international or discount communications services, communication
reliability may be impaired.
•
•
Programmed data such as the clock, Auto Dial Numbers and user configurations
will not be erased. This data is supported by second battery with a maximum five
year life (from time of manufacture).
Use of non authorized parts or supplies may result in damage to the unit and could
result in termination of the service or warranty agreement.
In the event that document data has been erased
If any abnormal conditions occur, such as emitting of smoke or burning odor,
immediately disconnect power to the unit and contact your authorized Toshiba
dealer for service.
MAY-17-00 WED09:43
POWER FAILURE
due to a power failure, the message “POWER
FAILURE” is displayed on the LCD as shown to
the right and a Power Failure Report is issued
once the power is restored (see page 225).
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTRODUCTION - FACSIMILE UNIT DESCRIPTIONS
Front View
Document Guides
Document Exit Tray
Adjust the guides to the edges of
Stacks the original
documents after scanning.
the document to help ensure proper
document alignment and smooth
feeding. (See page 88.)
Scanner Cover Release Button
Document Exit Tray Extension
Provides access to the document
scanner area for periodic cleaning or
clearing jammed originals.
Supports long original documents
after scanning.
(See page 232.)
(See page 19.)
Document Tray
Place documents face down on
this tray to transmit or copy.
Recording Paper
Exit Tray
Stacks recording paper
after printing.
Centronics PC Interface
(See page 19.)
This interface is used for connection to
personal computers for Scanning,
Printing and programming various
settings from a PC.
Operation Panel
Top Cover Release Lever
Used to perform programming
and operation of the facsimile
machine.
(See page 13.)
Provides access to printer section to
replace supplies or to clear paper
jams. (See page 233.)
Paper Tray
Holds up to 550 sheets of
recording paper.
(See page 22.)
Bypass Tray Cover
Remove this cover when you
install the Bypass Tray.
Right Side Cover
Provides access to the
recording paper feed path.
002
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear View
External Telephone Connector
Connection for an External
Telephone set. (See page 18.)
Line 1 Connector
Connection for the telephone
line cord from wall or PSTN
system. (See page 18.)
Handset Connector
Connection for the optional
Handset unit. (See page 18.)
Centronics PC Interface
Line 2 Connector
Connection for the 2nd telephone line
cord from wall or PSTN system.
DP125F: Standard
DP120F: Option
AC Inlet
003
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When Optional Recording Paper Trays are Installed
With two recording paper trays installed
With three recording paper trays installed
Handset
Handset
(optional)
(optional)
Upper Recording
Paper Tray
Upper Recording
Paper Tray
107
004
Middle Recording
Paper Tray
Lower Recording
Paper Tray
(optional)
(optional)
Bypass Tray
Bypass Tray
(DP125F: standard)
(DP120F: optional)
(DP125F: standard)
(DP120F: optional)
Lower Recording
Paper Tray
(optional)
NOTE:
Optimal height console stands are available for one or two paper tray configurations. These stands maximize operational access, LCD view angle and
provide rugged roller casters for easy cleaning.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
- OPERATION PANEL
1. Error Lamps
2.
3.
LINE 1 Lamp
Blinks when communicating using Line 1.
In the event an error occurs in the facsimile, the corresponding lamp will be
illuminated:
LINE 2 Lamp
Blinks when communicating using Line 2.
.... PAPER JAM Lamp:
Blinks when an original document or recording paper jam occurs (see page
233).
4.
5.
PC COMM Lamp
..... RECORDING PAPER Lamp:
Blinks when communicating between the facsimile unit and a personal computer.
Blinks when the recording paper supply has been depleted (see page 20).
SUPER POWER SAVER key and SUPER POWER SAVER Lamp
..... TONER Lamp:
Press this key to select the Super Power Saver Mode.
Illuminated when the facsimile is in the Super Power Saver Mode.
Blinks when the toner is nearly or entirely exhausted (see page 28).
..... DRUM Lamp:
6. LCD Display
Displays machine status and configuration information for operator viewing and
inter-action.
Blinks when the Process Unit is at or near its end of life (see page 31).
..... ALARM Lamp:
7. INSERT Key
Is blinks when any error other than those listed above occurs (see page
226).
This key is used to insert characters in CHARACTER ENTRY mode (see page 36).
8. DELETE Key
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This key is used to delete characters in CHARACTER ENTRY mode (see page
36).
Selects the desired resolution for transmission or copying. When Standard mode is
selected, none of the MODE lamps will be illuminated (see page 89).
9. Dial Keypad
Use these 12 keys just like a telephone keypad to dial telephone/facsimile num-
bers (see page 35).
19.Menu Keys (
,
,
,
Keys)
These keys are used to scroll and highlight desired LCD menu prompts (see page
35).
10.MULTI Key
Performs Multi-address Transmissions (Broadcast) or a Multi-polling receptions
(see page 124).
The
is also used as the [TONE] Key. The
key is helpful to access
11.SPEED DIAL Key
various services requiring touch-tone dialing when you are connected to a Rotary
line (see page 118).
Used for accessing Abbreviated, Alphabet, or Group dialing telephone directories
(see pages 98, 99 and 123).
20.ENTER Key
12.REDIAL/PAUSE Key
Press this key to enter a selected menu item or select a menu entry.
Press this key to redial a facsimile/telephone number if the number was busy on
your first try (see page 110). Or, use this key to enter a pause between telephone
digits when entering a remote facsimile number.
21.JOB CANCEL Key
Used to cancel a job reserved or being executed (see page 119).
13.MONITOR Key
22.E-MAIL ADDRESS Key
Used to enable the speaker monitor, for monitoring call progress during non
memory document feeder transmissions (see page 106).
Used to program E-mail addresses when programming One Touch Key or Abbrevi-
ated Numbers. By pressing this key prior to a transmission, an E-mail address can
be entered for an Internet FAX transmission.
14.START Key
Press this key to start facsimile communication. This key is also used to complete
programming.
23.JOB STATUS Key
Displays the communication status of reserved transmissions (see page 119).
15.STOP Key
24.One Touch Keys (1-49), One Touch Keys (50-73), Function Keys, and
Keyboard.
Used to stop an operation or cancel system programming. This key is also used to
clear an error condition.
View the One Touch Keys (1-49), One Touch Keys (50-73), Function Keys, and
Keyboard by turning the Flip Panels (see page 15).
16.COPY Key
Press this key, with a document in the Document Tray, to copy a document (see
page 95).
17. TX REPORT Key
Press this key to request or disable a Transmission Report for your current trans-
mission job.
18.MODE Key and FINE, U-FINE, HALFTONE Lamps
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function Keys
The Function Keys are located on the left of the Op-
eration Panel and enable the following frequently
used functions and settings by pressing the desired
key.
Function Keys
CHAIN DIAL COMM
PRIORITY TX
RESERVATION LIST
Prints a Job Reservation List (see page 209).
Used to dial a remote party using Chain Dialing (see
page 166).
Sends pages set in the ADF ahead of all previously
scheduled transmissions (see page 183).
SECURE RX
CHARGE CODE
RECOVERY TX
Enables or disables Secure RX (see page 179).
Allows entry of a Charge Code at the time of dialing
or during Abbreviated Dial and One Touch Dial pro-
gramming (see page 171).
Recovers from memory and sends incomplete trans-
missions (see page 169).
CHECK E-MAIL
Used to receive an E-mail immediately. (Requires
optional GD-1040 (Internet FAX Kit) and GF-1010
(NIC Kit) be installed.)
SEND AFTER SCAN
DELAYED COMM
Used to select whether the dialing starts while the
machine is scanning the documents or after the ma-
chine has scanned all documents to memory (see
page 190).
Schedules a delayed communication job to be per-
formed at a designated time (see page 181).
TEL LINE SELECT
Designates a specific telephone line for the current
transmission (see page 189).
DIRECT TX
Allows transmission direct from the document feeder POLLING
TEL LIST ENTRY
without the use of memory (see page 105).
Designate polling communication (see page 138).
Used to register Abbreviated, One Touch, Group,
and Relay Group Dialing numbers (see pages 70, 77
and 83).
LOW SPEED TX
SUB ADDRESS COMM
Used to select a lower transmission speed to trans-
mit a document when poor line conditions are ex-
pected, such as when transmitting to a foreign coun-
try that can only accept low speed data (see page
184).
Add sub-address digits to the remote facsimile num-
ber for routing or security (see page 185).
TEL LIST PRINT
PCL PRINT
Prints desired telephone/facsimile lists (see page
218).
Used to set the functions related to the PCL Board
when the optional GA-1020 (PCL Print Kit) is in-
stalled.
CONTRAST
ITU MAILBOX
Selects the desired contrast level of transmit docu-
ments (see page 90).
Used for Mailbox Communications or Relay Trans-
mission, with remote facsimiles that support the ITU-
T F-code functions (see page 149).
JOURNAL
Used to print a communication journal (see page
195).
COVER SHEET
PREV. TX RPT
Used to attach a cover sheet to a document to be
transmitted (see pages 165 and 187).
Displays or prints the result of previous transmission
jobs (see page 120).
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP - UNPACKING
1
2
Unpack the Carton
Make sure All Items are Enclosed
5
9
13
12
2
1
14
6
7
3
4
10
11
17
8
18
Packing List
This hardware has been designed to be installed by an
authorized TOSHIBA service representative.
1. Facsimile .................................................. 1
2. Phone Line Cord (Modular Cord).............. 1
3. Document Exit Tray .................................. 1
4. Recording Paper Exit Tray ....................... 1
5. Fuser Cleaner .......................................... 1
6. Developer Assembly ................................ 1
7. Drum Unit ................................................. 1
8. Operator’s Manual .................................... 1
9. Overlay..................................................... 1
10. Warranty Card .......................................... 1
11. AC Power Cord ........................................ 1
12. Charger Cleaner ....................................... 1
13. Mylar Scraper ........................................... 1
14. Cotton Swab............................................. 1
15. Unpacking Report..................................... 1
16. Quick Reference Guide ............................ 1
17. TOSHIBA Viewer CD-ROM ...................... 1
18. Bypass Tray (DP125F only) ..................... 1
Check the carton and report any damage to the delivery
service. Save the carton and packing materials for future
use.
Check the items in the carton with the following packing
list. If anything is missing, contact your dealer immedi-
ately.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Select a Desirable Location
The unit should be installed:
•
•
•
On a horizontal surface.
Away from direct sunlight, dust, extreme heat and humidity, and vibration.
Away from sources of strong electrical or magnetic fields, such as televisions or
radios.
•
Within reach of an electrical outlet. Use an outlet not shared with equipment that
generates electrical noise or consumes large amounts of electricity, such as an air
conditioner, or a copier.
•
•
Within reach of a telephone connection. Use a dedicated, single-line telephone
connection.
Allow for adequate ventilation. The rear and sides of the unit need to be clear to
allow proper air flow to the unit’s power supply.
591 mm
(23.3 inches)
100 mm
(3.9 inches)
Height: 635 mm (25 inches)
(Top Cover open)
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
- FACSIMILE MACHINE INSTALLATION
Connecting Your TOSHIBA Facsimile
Make sure that the Power Switch is turned OFF.
Plug in the power cord as in the figure below.
Connect the telephone line cord (modular cord) to the “LINE1” connector.
Connect the external telephone set (if desired) to the “PHONE” connector.
Connect the optional Handset (if equipped) to the “HANDSET” connector.
Power Switch
OFF
Power Cord
023
024
WARNING
•
•
•
•
•
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations.
Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.
Use caution when installing or modifying the telephone lines.
Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from
lightning.
•
Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Charger Cleaner, Mylar Scraper
Recording Paper Exit Tray
Document Exit Tray
Charger Cleaner and
Mylar Scraper
Installation
Recording Paper Exit
Tray Installation
Document Exit Tray
Installation
Charger Cleaner
Mylar
Scraper
025
026
028
Place the hooks of the Record- Fit the tabs of the Document Open the top cover. Store the
ing Paper Exit Tray into the slots Exit Tray into the slots on the Charger Cleaner and Mylar
on the left side of the unit.
left side of the unit.
Scraper in the location provided
in the rear inner cover of the
facsimile as shown in the figure.
•
Do not place heavy objects
on the Document Exit Tray
or apply strong force.
•
Do not place heavy objects
on the Recording Paper Exit
Tray or apply strong force.
NOTE:
•
Extend the Document Exit
Tray Extension for long doc-
uments.
The Charger Cleaner and
Mylar Scraper are used
when cleaning the Drum Unit
and Developer Assembly.
See pages 238 and 239.
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
- INITIAL PRINTING SUPPLIES INSTALLATION
Recording Paper Installation
About Recording Paper:
Pull Out the Paper
Tray
Attach the Recording
Paper Size Label
Press Down the
Paper Pressure Plate
Prepare the
Recording Paper
1
2
3
4
• Use only recommended paper
brands to optimize your fac-
simile performance. Contact
your authorized TOSHIBA
dealer for more information.
Recording Paper
Size Label
• Remove the recording paper
when storing or relocating
your facsimile.
• Avoid using damaged, folded
or misaligned recording paper.
Use of damaged paper could
cause double feeding or paper
jams.
Paper
Pressure Plate
032
031
029
030
Pull the paper tray out using the If not already at the correct pa- Press the Paper Pressure Plate Prepare new recording paper
handle located at the front of the per size, insert the Paper Size down until it clicks.
sheets by holding both ends and
flexing several times.
tray.
Label into the slot of the Paper
Tray.
• Use of damp recording paper
will cause poor printing over
all or part of the image area. If
the paper is excessively moist,
print quality may become un-
even and voiding may occur.
Replace the paper, should this
condition exist.
Pull the tray straight out toward
you as illustrated above.
This will separate the sheets
and provide optimum feeding.
See page 22 for information on
changing the recording paper
size.
Align the stack so that all four
corners are neatly aligned.
CAUTION:
•
Never place heavy objects
on an open tray, nor apply a
strong force.
Be sure to load the recording
paper in accordance with any
paper manufacturer’s printing
side instruction. Some papers
have a preferred image side.
This image side should be
placed face down in the paper
tray.
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording Paper Installation - continued
Install the
Recording Paper
Close the Paper
Tray
5
6
033
034
Place the recording paper stack Push the paper tray all the way
into the tray.
into the machine.
NOTE:
NOTES:
As the tray is closed, listen
for the sound of the paper
pressure plate moving up
into position.
•
Do not exceed the upper
stack limit line as this may
cause paper mis-feeds.
•
Make sure that the paper
is seated under the two
separation claws on the
right side of tray.
•
Be careful not to damage
the claws of the paper
tray.
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording Paper Size Adjustment
About Paper Sizes:
Pull Out the Paper
Tray
Adjust the Paper
Guide
Attach the Recording
Paper Size Label
Close the Paper
Tray
1
2
3
4
•
Your TOSHIBA facsimile has
been preset to accept letter
size recording paper.
Recording Paper
Size Label
In the event that you receive
a legal-size (8.5”x14”) recep-
tion, it will automatically be
reduced to fit onto letter-size
(8.5”x11”) paper.
•
•
If you receive only Legal-
size receptions and do not
wish them to be automati-
cally reduced: Adjust the re-
cording paper tray to load
the legal size paper.
029
036
034
030
Pull the paper tray out and re- Remove the Paper Guide.
Change the paper size label lo- Place the recording paper into
cated in the front-right corner of the tray and push the tray into
the paper tray to match the new the machine.
paper size.
move the recording paper.
Install the Paper Guide in the
correct position for the new pa-
per size.
If you receive a mixture of
Letter and Legal-size re-
ceptions, and you do not
wish your legal receptions
to be automatically re-
duced: Add an optional re-
cording paper tray to support
both the letter and legal-size
paper. With the second re-
cording paper tray, your
TOSHIBA facsimile will auto-
matically select the appropri-
ate paper size to match the
pages you receive.
•
Check to make sure that the
LCD display has returned to
the time and date standby
mode and no alarm lamps
are illuminated.
Paper size indicators have been
conveniently molded into the pa-
per tray next to the paper post.
•
•
Make a copy using the new
recording paper to confirm
proper operation.
NOTE:
Install the Paper Guide se-
curely. If you fail, a PAPER
EMPTY error will be dis-
played even when the paper
is loaded in the paper tray.
Be sure to load the recording
paper image side down.
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bypass Tray Installation
The Bypass Tray comes stan-
dard with the DP125F. (The By-
pass Tray is available as an op-
tion for the DP120F.)
Remove the Bypass
Tray Cover
Install the Bypass
Tray
Set the Paper Size
Raise the Tray Lever
1
2
3
4
You can select to print from the
Bypass Tray for copy, PC print,
and A5-size report. Letter, Le-
gal, A4, and A5 size paper can
be loaded into the Bypass Tray.
The Bypass Tray can also ac-
cept an envelope, transparency,
120
Tray Lever
Bypass
Tray
or label. (Select “
as the paper size.)
: OTHERS”
Bypass Tray Cover
119
Size Selector
121
118
Remove the two screws holding Install the Bypass Tray.
the Bypass Tray Cover.
Set the paper size using the Raise the Tray Lever.
size selector.
NOTES:
You can load up to 100
sheets of Letter, Legal, A4 or
A5 size paper (20 lbs.).
Envelope, transparency or
label stock should be loaded
one sheet at a time.
Place the paper in the center
of the Bypass Tray when the
paper size is set to
“
: OTHERS.”
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bypass Tray Installation - continued
Pull up the Paper
Support
Set the Recording
Paper
Lower the Tray
Lever
5
6
7
Paper Guide
Tray Lever
Recording
Paper
Bypass Tray
Paper Support
122
123
124
Pull up the Bypass Tray Paper Set the Recording Paper and Lower the Tray Lever.
Support.
adjust the Paper Guides to the
correct paper size.
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Developer Assembly and Drum Unit Installation
Attach the Drum Unit
to the Developer
Assembly
Install the Developer
Assembly with Drum
Unit
Open the Top Cover
Shake the Developer
Assembly
Remove the
Protective Strip
1
2
3
4
5
Top Cover
Release Lever
Developer
Assembly
Drum Unit
Developer
Assembly
Strip
Developer
Assembly
Developer
Assembly
041
042
037
040
043
Grasp the Top Cover Release
Lever to open the Top Cover.
Hold the Developer Assembly Holding the Developer Assem- Attach the Drum Unit to the De- Install the Developer Assembly
with both hands and shake the bly with one hand, grasp the veloper Assembly. Position the (with Drum Unit attached) into
cartridge back and forth several end of the protective strip under Drum Unit with the green Drum the machine.
times.
the Toner Cartridge. Pull the surface facing the Toner Roller
strip firmly to completely remove on the Developer Assembly.
Holding the Developer Assem-
bly by the green handles, align
the three shafts on the Devel-
it from the Toner Cartridge.
IMPORTANT:
•
The sealing film will contain
a small amount of toner on
its surface.
•
Never touch the photo- oper Assembly sides with the
conductive drum (the slots in the machine frame.
green surface) of the
Carefully dispose of the film
in an appropriate waste re-
ceptacle to avoid soiling
items it may come in contact
with.
Drum Unit. If the surface
is scarred or scratched, it
will cause print quality
problems.
•
Do not expose the photo-
conductive drum of the
Drum Unit to light for
more than 3 minutes. If
the Drum Unit is to be left
anywhere outside the fac-
simile, be certain to cover
it with cloth, paper, etc.
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Developer Assembly and Drum Unit Installation - continued
Press Down on the
Drum Unit
Close the Top Cover
6
7
Drum Unit
045
044
Press firmly down on the green
squares on the Drum Unit until
the Drum Unit clicks into place.
Holding the Top Cover Release
Lever, close the Top Cover,
then release the Lever.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuser Cleaner Installation
Open the Top Cover
Close the Top Cover
Install the Fuser
Cleaner
1
3
2
Top Cover
Release Lever
Fuser Cleaner
037
047
045
Holding the Top Cover Release
Lever, close the Top Cover,
then release the Lever.
Grasp the Top Cover Release Remove the new Fuser Cleaner
Lever to open the Top Cover.
from its plastic bag and install it
positioning its white pad side
down.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
- PRINTING SUPPLIES REPLACEMENT
Toner Cartridge Replacement
Replacement Toner Kits for your
Remove the
Open the Top Cover
Separate the Drum
Unit
Remove the Toner
Cartridge
TOSHIBA facsimile include a
Toner Cartridge and a Fuser
Cleaner. Be sure to replace the
Fuser Cleaner when replacing
the Toner Cartridge.
1
2
3
4
Developer Assembly
with Drum Unit
Top Cover
Release Lever
Developer
Assembly
Drum Unit
Toner Cartridge
Your TOSHIBA facsimile has
been designed to display a two
stage alert to replace Toner
once it has been depleted.
Developer
Assembly
The first stage is a “TONER
LOW” warning that alerts you
that the Toner is low and should
be replaced at your earliest con-
vince.
037
051
052
053
Grasp the Top Cover Release Remove the Developer Assem- Separate the Drum Unit from the
Press the green Button on the
left of the Developer Assembly
and slide the toner cartridge to
the left to disengage it from the
Developer Assembly.
Lever and open the Top Cover.
bly with the Drum Unit attached.
Developer Assembly.
The unit will continue to receive
and print facsimile messages
during this stage.
IMPORTANT:
NOTE:
•
Never touch the photo-
conductive drum (the
green surface) of the
Drum Unit. If the surface
is scarred or scratched, it
will cause print quality
problems.
Avoid touching the toner to
your clothing since toner can
not be removed easily.
If the toner sticks to your
clothing, immediately rinse
out the toner with cold water.
Lift the Toner Cartridge from the
Developer Assembly. Dispose
of the used toner cartridge prop-
erly.
The second stage is a “TONER
EMPTY” notice. When this mes-
sage is displayed, the machine
can no longer print documents.
Receptions will be stored in
memory until the Toner has
been replaced.
•
Do not expose the photo-
conductive drum of the
Drum Unit to light for
more than 3 minutes. If
the Drum Unit is to be left
anywhere outside the
facsimile, be certain to
cover it with cloth, paper,
etc.
It is recommended to replace
the Toner Cartridge whenever
the “TONER LOW” message is
displayed using the following
procedure.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Toner Cartridge Replacement - continued
Attach the Drum Unit
to the Developer
Assembly
Install the Developer
Assembly with Drum
Unit
Prepare a New
Toner Cartridge
Install the New
Toner Cartridge
Remove the Strip
5
6
7
8
9
Developer
Assembly
New Toner
Cartridge
Drum Unit
Developer
Assembly
Strip
New Toner
Cartridge
Developer
Assembly
Developer
Assembly
054
055
041
042
043
Remove the new Toner Car-
tridge from its plastic bag and
save the bag for the used Toner
Cartridge.
Align the four hooks on the new Holding the Developer Assem- Attach the Drum Unit to the De-
Toner Cartridge with the slots bly with one hand, grasp the veloper Assembly. Position the
on the Developer Assembly. end of the protective strip under Drum Unit with the green drum
Slide the cartridge onto the as- the toner housing. Pull the Strip surface facing the black toner
Holding the Developer Assem-
bly by the green handles, align
the three shafts on the Devel-
oper Assembly sides with the
slots in the machine frame.
sembly.
firmly to completely remove it roller on the Developer Assem-
from the cartridge. bly.
Mix the new toner by shaking
the Toner Cartridge back and
forth.
Move the cartridge to the right
until the button on the left of the
Developer Assembly clicks into NOTES:
place.
•
Do not stand or turn the
Developer Assembly up
side down to avoid toner
leaking out the cartridge
after removing the strip.
NOTE:
Only use the specified
TOSHIBA Toner Cartridge.
•
Toner might stick to the
strip. Avoid toner sticking
to your clothes, furniture,
or other items since the
toner cannot be removed
easily. Toner is not harm-
ful to the human body. If
any toner sticks to your
clothes, wash away the
toner immediately using
cold water.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Toner Cartridge Replacement - continued
Replacing the Fuser Cleaner
Press Down on the
Drum Unit
Remove the fuser
Cleaner
Install the New fuser
Cleaner
Close the Top Cover
10
11
12
13
To maintain optimum print quali-
ty, replace the Fuser Cleaner
each time you replace the Toner
Cartridge.
Drum Unit
Fuser Cleaner
CAUTION:
The fuser’s interior can be
very hot. Be careful when re-
placing the fuser cleaner.
Do not touch any surfaces
inside the printer except as
indicated.
047
045
044
061
Fuser Cleaner
Press firmly down on the green
squares on the Drum Unit until
the Drum Unit clicks into place.
Grasp the two green tabs the
used fuser cleaner from the ma-
chine.
Remove the new Fuser Cleaner Holding the Top Cover Release
from its plastic bag and install it Lever, close the Top Cover,
positioning its white pad side then release the Lever.
down.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drum Unit Replacement
Replacement Drum Kits include
an Ozone Filter and Drum unit.
Be sure to replace the Ozone
Filter when replacing the Drum
Unit.
STORAGE NOTES:
Remove the
Open the Top Cover
Separate the Drum
Unit
1
2
3
Developer Assembly
with Drum Unit
The Drum Unit is a very im-
portant part of this facsimile.
Handle it with care as shown
below.
Top Cover
Release Lever
Developer
Assembly
Drum Unit
Your TOSHIBA facsimile has
been designed to display a two-
stage alert to replace the Drum
Unit once it has been depleted.
Keep the Drum Unit within a
temperature range of 0-35°C
(32-95°F) and
range of 20-80%RH (without
condensation).
a
humidity
The first stage is a “DRUM UNIT
WARNING” that alerts you that
the Drum Unit is at or near its
end of life and should be re-
placed at your earliest convince.
The unit will continue to receive
and print facsimile messages
during this stage.
Developer
Assembly
Do not store or use the Drum
Unit in an environment
037
051
052
where
the
temperature
Grasp the Top Cover Release Remove the Developer Assem- Separate the Drum Unit from the
changes excessively.
Lever and open the Top Cover.
bly with the Drum Unit attached.
Developer Assembly.
Do not touch the light sensi-
tive drum because its sur-
face will be easily damaged.
IMPORTANT:
•
Never touch the photo-
conductive drum (the
green surface) of the
Drum Unit. If the surface
is scarred or scratched, it
will cause print quality
problems.
The second stage is “REPLACE
DRUM UNIT.” When this mes-
sage is displayed, the machine
can no longer print documents.
Receptions will be stored in
memory until the Drum Unit has
been replaced.
Do not place the light sensi-
tive drum in a location where
it is exposed to direct sun-
light or high intensity light
(more than 200 lx) such as
near a window.
•
Do not expose the photo-
conductive drum of the
Drum Unit to light for
more than 3 minutes. If
the Drum Unit is to be left
anywhere outside the fac-
simile, be certain to cover
it with cloth, paper, etc.
For the purpose of determining
Drum usage;
Each legal-size sheet of paper
counts as 1.3 letter-size sheets
of paper.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drum Unit Replacement - continued
Replacing the Ozone Filter
Attach the new Drum
Unit to the
Developer Assembly
Install the Developer
Assembly with Drum
Unit
Press Down on the
Drum Unit
Replace the Ozone
Filter
4
5
6
7
The Ozone Filter should be re-
placed every time the Drum Unit
is replaced.
Developer
Assembly
Drum Unit
Ozone Filter
Drum Unit
A new Ozone Filter has been
provided with the Drum Kit.
Make sure the Ozone Filter is
replaced.
Developer
Assembly
042
043
044
069
Attach the new Drum Unit to the
Developer Assembly. Position
the new Drum Unit with the
green drum surface facing the
black toner roller on the Devel-
oper Assembly.
Holding the Developer Assem- Press firmly down on the green
bly by the green handles, align squares on the Drum Unit until
the three shafts on the Devel- the Drum Unit clicks into place.
oper Assembly sides with the
Remove the Ozone Filter from
the inside of the machine.
Then, place the new Ozone Fil-
ter into the machine.
slots in the machine frame.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drum Unit Replacement - continued
Close the Top Cover
8
045
Holding the Top Cover Release
Lever, close the Top Cover,
then release the Lever.
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
- QUICK START
This section provides several
quick start programming steps
to prepare your new facsimile
for immediate use.
Terminal ID
Receiving
Receiving a
Transmitting
Setting the Terminal ID (Page 42)
Sending a Facsimile
1
3
2
Facsimile (Page 112)
(Page 101)
These procedures are a simple
version of the detailed proce-
dures listed in the manual. Next
to each procedure heading is a
convenient page number refer-
ence for the detailed procedure.
Should you have any difficulty
with these simple procedures,
refer to the pages listed for more
information.
Load your document face down Your TOSHIBA facsimile has
SET TERMINAL ID
Press:
,
,
into the Document Tray.
been preset from the factory to
receive facsimile messages. No
special setup is required to re-
ceive facsimile messages.
TEL NUMBER (MAX 20)
SET TERMINAL ID
MAY-17-00 WED11:49
ID NAME =(MAX 40)
Enter your facsimile’s telephone
number, press:
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
Displayed for 2 seconds
Dial the remote facsimile using
the Dial Keypad located on the
Operation Panel. Remember to
include any access numbers
It is highly recommended that
you take the time to read
through this manual to get the
most from your new TOSHIBA
facsimile.
Enter your user ID (company
name) using the Keyboard (see
page 36) and Numeric Keypad,
press:
If the Line-2 board is installed,
set the international code and
facsimile’s telephone number for
line-2.
such as 9 or press the
af-
ter the access number if you
normally have to wait for a dial
tone.
OPERATION COMPLETED
INT. CODE?
1.ADD+
2.NOT NEEDED
Displayed for 2 seconds
If you communicate internation-
ally, select:
1.LANGUAGE
2.DATE & TIME
3.TERMINAL ID
4.DIAL TYPE
Otherwise, select:
After the remote facsimile num-
ber has been entered using the
keypad, press the green START
key.
Press:
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
- USER INTERFACE OPERATION
Menu Operation
Various functions of this fac-
Keys Used in Menu Operation
simile can be used by selecting
menu items with the menu
screen displayed in the LCD
window. Performing operations
or settings by selecting menu
items selected is called “Menu
Operation.” The menus use a
multi-layered structure.
[
[
] Key
Press this key to enter the Menu Operation or to scroll up the menu selection.
] Key
Press this key to use the TONE function (see page 118) or when in the Menu Operation, press this
key to scroll down the menu selection.
Starting Menu Operation:
When the facsimile is in the
[
[
] Key
Standby Mode, press
start Menu Operation.
(In the Standby Mode, the dis-
play shows the date and time on
the first row and the residual
memory % on the third row as
shown below.
to
Press this key to display the preceding menu screen or to move the cursor to the left.
] Key
Press this key to display the sub-menu screen or to move the cursor to the right.
MAY-17-00 WED11:49
[ENTER] Key or [START] Key
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
or
When the currently highlighted item has sub-items, pressing this key operates the same as the
[
] Key.
When the currently highlighted item is the end item, press this key to complete the item selection.
Completing or Canceling
Menu Operation:
When you have reached the
end of a programming step or
wish to cancel a programming
Dial Keypad ([1] to [0] Keys)
Used to enter desired information or to select options.
procedure, press
to re-
turn to the Standby Mode.
[STOP] Key
Used to exit the Menu Operation and return to the Standby Mode.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Character Entry
When programming and regis-
tering the Autodialer numbers or
names, you will need to enter al-
phanumeric characters.
Keys Used in Character Entry
Special Character Table
The Character Table lists special characters that can be entered
when programming this facsimile.
The table lists the alpha keys in the left column and the characters
that correspond to each key in the right column.
To enter the special characters entry mode, press the [ALTER-
NATE] key on the keyboard.
[INSERT] Key
This section helps you under-
stand how to easily enter the
characters.
Inserts characters before the selected
(highlighted) character.
[DELETE] Key
Deletes the selected character.
Pressing the alpha key displays the special characters you can en-
ter.
[
[
] Key
Moves the cursor to the right. If pressed
without entering a character, it inserts a
space.
Select your desired character by using the
press
or
keys, and
.
] Key
Uppercase special characters can be selected by pressing the alpha
key while holding down the [SHIFT] key after the [ALTERNATE] key
is pressed.
Moves the cursor to the left.
Provides the user interface for entering
numeric characters.
Provides the user inferface for entering alpha and special
characters.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Character Entry - continued
Character Correction
Replacing Characters
Inserting Characters
Using
/
, position the cursor over the point
Using
/
, position the cursor over the charac-
ter to be corrected.
NEW YRK
NEW YRK
NEW YORK
NEW YOPK
of insertion and press
.
The message “[INSERT]” is displayed on the second
row.
Enter the desired character.
[INSERT]
NEW YORK
Deleting Characters
Enter the desired character(s) (“O” in this example).
The character(s) will be inserted without deleting
other characters in the line. Press
your change.
to save
Using
/
, position the cursor over the charac-
ter to be deleted.
NEWW YORK
Delete the character by pressing
to save your change.
. Press
NEW YORK
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
- INITIAL SETUP
Initial Setting Summary
This facsimile has many user
initial settings.
Enter the
Configuration Menu
Select the Desired Initial Setting (1-4)
1
2
For your convenience, a quick
reference summary of all user
initial settings are shown on the
right.
Press
or
until the desired Initial Setting is highlighted or enter the desired Initial Setting
Press
. The initial Menu
1 through 4 from the list below. The detailed initial setting procedure for each setting is shown in
parentheses after the initial setting.
Screen displays.
Each of these initial setting is
discussed in detail throughout
the remainder of this section.
1.COMM. OPTIONS
2.LISTS
3.INITIAL SETUP
4.DEFAULT SETTINGS ↓
1. LANGUAGE - (Page 39) - Selects ENGLISH*, FRENCH or SPANISH for displays and printing.
Use the following procedures to
access one or more of these ini-
tial settings.
2. DATE & TIME - (Page 40) - Sets the Month, Day, Year & Time for your machine. You may select to
use the 4-digit or 2-digit format for the year and 24-hour or the 12-hour format for the time.
3. TERMINAL ID - FCC MANDATORY - (Page 42) - Sets the Terminal ID (Company Name &
Press
to enter INITIAL
Facsimile Number) for your machine.
SETUP. The Installation sub-
menu displays.
4. DIAL TYPE - (Page 44) - Configures your machine for use with Touch Tone (MF)* or Rotary Dial
(DP) telephone service.
1.LANGUAGE
2.DATE & TIME
3.TERMINAL ID
4.DIAL TIPE
NOTE: * indicates the factory default setting.
NOTE: Only 4 selections can
be displayed at one
time.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Selection
You can select the language
used on the LCD display and all
reports printed by your facsimile.
English, French, and Spanish
are available.
Display the
LANGUAGE Menu
Select the Desired
Language
Select Another
SETUP Item, or ...
1
2
3
Highlight
1.LANGUAGE
Select the desired language.
After completing this Configura-
tion Setting, you may continue
to select other settings referring
to their associated pages for in-
structions, or press
To display the SETUP menu,
press:
+
using
or
and
(for ENGLISH)
press:
+
+
(for SPANISH)
or
to exit the Configuration Setting
mode and return to the Standby
Mode.
+
1.LANGUAGE
2.DATE & TIME
3.TERMINAL ID
4.DIAL TIPE
(for FRENCH)
LANGUAGE
OPERATION COMPLETED
01.ENGLISH
02.ESPAÑOL
03.FRANÇAIS
NOTE: Only 4 selections can
be displayed at one
time.
Displayed for 2 seconds
Returns to display the SETUP
menu screen.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Date and Time Setting
This facsimile displays the cur-
Display the DATE &
TIME Menu
Select the Time
Format
Enter the Date Data
Enter the Time Data
rent date and time when in the
Standby Mode. It also uses this
time for maintaining internal list
and reports. Follow the proce-
dure to set the time and date.
2
3
1
4
Highlight
2.DATE & TIME
Select the time format.
Move the cursor to the desired
position using the following
keys.
Move the cursor to the desired
position using the following
keys.
To display the SETUP menu,
press:
or
or
using
or
and
(for 24-hour format)
press:
Enter the date.
Enter the time.
+
(for 12-hour format) default
or
The date and time currently set
are displayed on the bottom
row.
1.LANGUAGE
SET TIME FORMAT
1.24 HOURS
2.12 HOURS
2.DATE & TIME
3.TERMINAL ID
4.DIAL TIPE
When “24-hour” is selected:
Change the day-of-week desig-
nation by pressing the following
keys.
When “12-hour” is selected,
change the AM/PM designation
by pressing the following keys,
SET DATE & TIME
NOTE: Only 4 selections can
be displayed at one
time.
MD-DD-YYYY WWW
XX-XX-XXXX XXX
or
or
When the correct date is en- When the correct time is en-
tered, press:
tered, press:
(Allows 00 to 23 as the hour
value.)
When “12-hour” is selected:
SET DATE & TIME
SET DATE & TIME
HH:MM
SET DATE MODE
2.DD-MM-YYYY
3.YYYY-MM-DD
4.MM-DD-YY
MD-DD-YYYY WWW
XX-XX-XXXX XXX
5.DD-MM-YY
6.YY-MM-DD
(Allows 01 to 12 as the hour
value and designates AM or
PM.)
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Date and Time Setting - continued
Select the Date
Format
Select the Month
Format
Select Another
SETUP Item, or ...
5
6
7
Select the date format for dis-
play and print.
Select the month format.
After completing this Configura-
tion Setting, you may continue
to select other settings referring
to their associated pages for in-
structions, or press
(for NUMERIC, such as 01, 02,
03 ...)
(for Month/Day/Year 4-digit)
(for Day/Month/Year 4-digit)
(for Year 4-digit/Month/Day)
(for Month/Day/Year 2-digit)
(for Day/Month/Year 2-digit)
(for Year 2-digit/Month/Day)
(for NAME, such as JAN, FEB,
MAR ...)
to exit the Configuration Setting
mode and return to the Standby
Mode.
OPERATION COMPLETED
Displayed for 2 seconds
Returns to display the SETUP
menu screen.
SET MONTH MODE
1.NUMERIC
2.NAME
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Terminal ID Setting
In compliance with FCC regula-
tions (see page 1), this facsimile
places your company’s name,
facsimile telephone number and
date & time on the top of all
transmitted documents. This
feature enables remote parties
to easily identify your docu-
ments and the time of transmis-
sion.
Display the
TERMINAL ID Menu
Enter the User ID
Select the
International Code
Enter Your
Telephone Number
1
2
3
4
Highlight
3.TERMINAL ID
Enter your user ID (company If you send documents over-
name) using the Keyboard and seas, adding your International
Numeric Keypad. You can use Code (country code) to your
up to 40 characters.
For more information on select- remote party to identify the
ing characters, see page 34, country from which the docu-
If you selected ADD+ in Step 3,
enter the International Code for
your country before entering
your area code and telephone
number.
stored ID name will enable the
using
or
and
Example: United States = 1
press:
Character Entry.
ment has been sent. The 1st
digit(s) following the “+” sign is
for the International Code.
Then, enter the telephone num-
ber that has been connected to
the facsimile.
To display the SETUP menu,
press:
When your ID name is displayed
correctly on the LCD display,
press:
or
If you send or receive docu-
ments to and from overseas, se-
lect ADD + by pressing:
+
Your facsimile will prompt you
for your telephone number’s in-
ternational code.
1.LANGUAGE
SET TERMINAL ID
ID NAME =(MAX40)
2.DATE & TIME
3.TERMINAL ID
4.DIAL TIPE
If all of your documents are sent
INT. CODE ?
1.ADD +
domestically,
select
NOT
NEEDED by pressing:
2.NOT NEEDED
NOTE: Only 4 selections can
be displayed at one
time.
Check the LCD display to make
sure your telephone number ap-
pears correctly, then press:
Displayed for 2 seconds
If the terminal ID is already set,
the current name is displayed on
the last row.
SET TERMINAL ID
TEL NUMBER =(MAX20)
+
If the Line-2 board is installed
repeat Steps 3 and 4 for Line 2,
then go to Step 5.
ENTER NAME
The “+” is displayed when ADD+
is selected.
ID NAME =(MAX40)
INT. CODE ? LINE-2
1.ADD +
2.NOT NEEDED
The new name will be displayed
on the last row as it is entered.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Terminal ID Setting - continued
Select Another
SETUP Item, or ...
5
Then press:
OPERATION COMPLETED
Displayed for 2 seconds
Returns to display the SETUP
menu screen.
After completing this Configura-
tion Setting, you may continue
to select other settings referring
to their associated pages for in-
structions, or press
to exit the Configuration Setting
mode and return to the Standby
Mode.
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dial Type Setting
There are two types of dialing
modes: DP [Dial Pulse (Rotary)]
and MF [Multifrequency (touch
tone)]. If your telephone emits
tones when you are dialing, this
usually indicates that you have
a MF type line and no adjust-
ment is required. Otherwise, you
will have to select the appropri-
ate setting.
Display the DIAL
TYPE Menu
Select Your Dial
Type
Enter the Access
Digits
Select Another
SETUP Item, or ...
1
2
3
4
Highlight
4.DIAL TYPE
Select your dial line type.
Access Digits are PBX digits
such as 9, pause, and 1 which
need to be omitted when using
chain dialing.
If you do not require the use of a
credit card when chain dialing,
After completing this Configura-
tion Setting, you may continue
to select other settings referring
to their associated pages for in-
structions, or press
using
or
and
(for Multi-Frequency type)
default
press:
press
to skip this step.
To display the SETUP menu,
press:
Otherwise, enter the number
(max. 10 digits) from the Dial
Keypad.
or
(for Dial Pulse type)
to exit the Configuration Setting
mode and return to the Standby
Mode.
+
If the Line-2 board has been in-
stalled, repeat Step 2 for the
2nd line.
1.LANGUAGE
DIAL TYPE
1.MF
2.DP
DIAL TYPE
1.MF
2.DP
LINE-2
2.DATE & TIME
3.TERMINAL ID
4.DIAL TYPE
NOTE: Only 4 selections can
be displayed at one
time.
When the correct Access Digit is
displayed, press:
After selecting the dial type, the
following will be displayed.
DELETE ACCESS DIGIT
ACCESS DIGIT=(MAX10)
OPERATION COMPLETED
Access digits are numbers
which are required by PBX sys-
tems to access the phone sys-
tem “outside” the PBX. A com-
mon access digit is “9.”
Displayed for 2 seconds
Returns to display the SETUP
menu screen.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
- DEVICE CONFIGURATION
Configuration Summary
This facsimile has many user
adjustable settings.
Enter the Configuration Menu
Select the Desired Configuration Setting (01-16)
1
2
Each of these configuration set-
tings is discussed in detail
throughout the remainder of this
section.
Press
or
until the desired Configuration Setting is
Press
. The initial Menu
Press
to enter MACHINE
highlighted or enter the desired Configuration Setting 01 through 16
from the list below. The detailed configuration procedure for each
setting is shown in parentheses after the configuration setting.
Screen displays.
SETTINGS. The Machine Set-
tings sub-menu will now dis-
plays.
Use the following procedures to
access one or more of these
configuration settings.
1.COMM. OPTIONS
2.LISTS
3.INITIAL SETUP
4.DEFAULT SETTINGS ↓
01. SPEAKER VOLUME - (Page 47) - Sets the Bell Ring, Alarm
Tone, Key Touch Tone and Monitor volume (0-7) (4*) for the
machine.
01.SPEAKER VOLUME
02.POWER SAVER
03.SEPARATOR PAGE
04.DEPARTMENT CODE ↓
02. POWER SAVER - (Page 51) - Configures the machine’s Super
Power Saver function for Automatic/Manual* or Off operation.
05.ACCOUNT CODE
06.PRINT DENSITY
07.DOCUMENT LENGTH
08.LINE MONITOR
09.RECEIVE INTERVAL
10.ECM
03. SEPARATOR PAGE - (Page 53) - Enables or Disables* a
FAX Separator Page, Copy Separator Page, and PC Separator
Page.
Press
to enter DEFAULT
SETTING. The Default Setting
sub-menu displays.
04. DEPARTMENT CODE - (Page 55) - Enables, Disables* and
11.DOCUMENT MODE
12.COLLATE COPY
13.LETTER HEAD PAPER
14.REDIAL MODE
15.AUTO RECEIVE MODE
16.LINE-2 MODE
Configures up to 99 Department Codes.
1.MACHINE SETTINGS
2.TX SETTINGS
3.RX SETTINGS
05. ACCOUNT CODE - (Page 58) - Enables or Disables* a 4-digit
Account Code entry.
4.REPORTS & LIST
↓
06. PRINT DENSITY - (Page 59) - Sets the Print Density (-2-+2)
(0*) for the machine.
07. DOCUMENT LENGTH - (Page 60) - Enables* or Disables the
NOTE: Only 4 selections can
be displayed at one
time.
sending of documents longer than 1 Meter (39.4").
08. LINE MONITOR - (Page 61) - Enables or Disables* the Line
Monitor function.
09. RECEIVE INTERVAL - (Page 62) - Sets the interval (0-15
min.) the machine will wait after making four consecutive
dialings.
NOTE: * indicates the factory default setting.
10. ECM - (Page 63) - Enables or Disables* the ECM function.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Summary - continued
Select the Desired Configuration Setting (01-16)
- continued
2
11. DOCUMENT MODE - (Page 64) - Selects the default setting
for the Resolution (Standard, Fine, U-Fine) and Contrast (Nor-
mal, Darker, Lighter) for document scanning.
12. COLLATE COPY - (Page 65) - Enables or Disables* the Col-
late Copy function.
13. LETTER HEAD PAPER - (Page 66) - Enables or Disables*
the Letter Head Paper function at during PC printing.
14. REDIAL MODE - (Page 67) - Sets the number of redials (01-
14) (05*) and redial interval (01min.-15min.) (03*min.).
15. AUTO RECEIVE MODE - (Page 68) - Configures Auto* and
Manual receive modes. As well as the Ring Delay (01*-15)
within auto receive mode.
16. LINE-2 MODE - (Page 69) - Configures the 2nd Facsimile Line
for TX & RX*, RX ONLY, or RX ONLY TIME PERIOD.
NOTE: * indicates the factory default setting.
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bell Ringer Volume Adjustment
The telephone bell ringer vol-
ume can be adjusted using the
following procedure.
Display the RINGER
VOLUME Menu
Enter the Desired
Volume Value
Select Another
SETUP Item, or ...
1
2
3
Press:
Enter the desired volume value
(0 to 7; 0 for minimum, 7 for
maximum).
After completing this Configura-
tion Setting, you may continue
to select other volume settings
referring to their associated
pages for instructions, or press
+
+
+
+
+
+
to exit the Configuration Setting
mode and return to the Standby
Mode.
or
Move the cursor to the desired
position, using the following
keys.
or
When the desired value is dis-
played on the LCD display,
press:
The current setting is highlight-
ed on the bottom row.
OPERATION COMPLETED
SET RINGER VOLUME
VOLUME =(0-7)
Displayed for 2 seconds
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Returns to display the SETUP
menu screen.
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alarm Tone Volume Adjustment
The alarm tone volume can be
adjusted using the following pro-
cedure.
Display the ALARM
VOLUME Menu
Enter the Desired
Volume Value
Select Another
SETUP Item, or ...
1
2
3
Press:
Enter the desired volume value
(0 to 7; 0 for minimum, 7 for
maximum).
After completing this Configura-
tion Setting, you may continue
to select other volume settings
referring to their associated
pages for instructions, or press
+
+
+
+
+
+
to exit the Configuration Setting
mode and return to the Standby
Mode.
or
Move the cursor to the desired
position, using the following
keys.
or
When the desired value is dis-
played on the LCD display,
press:
OPERATION COMPLETED
The current setting is highlight-
ed on the bottom row.
SET ALARM VOLUME
Displayed for 2 seconds
VOLUME =(0-7)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Returns to display the SETUP
menu screen.
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Key Touch Tone Volume Adjustment
The key touch tone volume can
Display the KEY
Enter the Desired
Volume Value
Select Another
SETUP Item, or ...
be adjusted using the following
1
2
3
TOUCH VOLUME
procedure.
Menu
Press:
Enter the desired volume value
(0 to 7; 0 for minimum, 7 for
maximum).
After completing this Configura-
tion Setting, you may continue
to select other volume settings
referring to their associated
pages for instructions, or press
+
+
+
+
+
+
to exit the Configuration Setting
mode and return to the Standby
Mode.
or
Move the cursor to the desired
position, using the following
keys.
or
When the desired value is dis-
played on the LCD display,
press:
The current setting is highlight-
ed on the bottom row.
OPERATION COMPLETED
SET KEY TOUCH VOLUME
VOLUME =(0-7)
Displayed for 2 seconds
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Returns to display the SETUP
menu screen.
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitor Volume Adjustment
The line monitor volume can be
adjusted using the following pro-
cedure.
Display the MONITOR
VOLUME Menu
Enter the Desired
Volume Value
Select Another
SETUP Item, or ...
1
2
3
Press:
Enter the desired volume value
(0 to 7; 0 for minimum, 7 for
maximum).
After completing this Configura-
tion Setting, you may continue
to select other volume settings
referring to their associated
pages for instructions, or press
+
+
+
+
+
+
to exit the Configuration Setting
mode and return to the Standby
Mode.
or
Move the cursor to the desired
position, using the following
keys.
or
When the desired value is dis-
played on the LCD display,
press:
OPERATION COMPLETED
The current setting is highlight-
ed on the bottom row.
SET MONITOR VOLUME
Displayed for 2 seconds
VOLUME =(0-7)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Returns to display the SETUP
menu screen.
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Saver Operation
This function allows you to mini-
Display the POWER
SAVER Menu
Select the Power
Saver Mode
Select the Super
Power Saver Option
Enter the Start Time
Period
mize power consumption by
turning power off to portions of
the machine (as selected). If
the Power Saver function is ON,
a warm up period is needed be-
fore printing occurs. This fac-
simile has two Power Saver
modes, Super Power Saver and
Printer Power Saver.
Super Power Saver turns virtual-
ly all power off to minimize pow-
er consumption. Select one of
three modes, Automatic, Manual
or OFF.
2
1
3
4
Press:
Select the desired Super Power
Saver Option.
Enter the time period (in min-
utes) for standby operation prior
to entering the Super Power
Saver mode.
Select the desired Power Saver
Mode.
+
+
+
+
+
(to select Automatic mode)
Go to Step 4.
(to select Super Power
Saver mode)
Go to Step 3.
START TIME
SUPER POWER SAVER
1.AUTOMATIC
2.MANUAL
TIME
(01-60)MIN
03
Printer Power Saver turns only
the fuser section off during the
time period selected.
3.OFF
START TIME
NOTE:
When the machine is in the
Super Power Saver mode, it
will exit from the Super
Power Saver mode when
any of the following occurs.
(to select Manual mode)
+
TIME
(01-60)MIN
03
In manual mode, you can acti-
vate Super Power Saver using a
key on the Control Panel.
(to select Printer Power
Saver mode)
When the correct time period is
displayed, press:
Go to Step 5.
-
The machine receives a
facsimile,
01.SUPER P.S.
02.PRINTER P.S.
PRINTER POWER SAVER
(to select OFF)
1.ON
2.OFF
-
Option handset or exter-
nal telephone handset is
lifted,
OPERATION COMPLETED
OPERATION COMPLETED
-
Document is loaded into
the document tray,
-
-
is pressed, or
Displayed for 2 seconds
Displayed for 2 seconds
PC has accessed the ma-
chine.
The display returns to Step 1.
Go to Step 7.
The display returns to Step 1.
Go to Step 7.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Saver Operation - continued
Select the Printer Power Saver Function
Enter the Start Time
and End Time
Select Another
SETUP Item, or ...
5
6
7
Enable or Disable the Printer
Power Saver function.
Move the cursor to the desired
position, using the following
keys.
After completing this Configura-
tion Setting, press
PRINTER POWER SAVER
TIME PERIOD =
12:00AM-12:00AM
or
(to set Printer Power Saver ON)
(Example if the 12-hour format
option is selected in DATE &
TIME setting)
Enter the time period.
to exit the Configuration Setting
mode and return to the Standby
Mode.
When “OFF” is selected, the
(to set Printer Power Saver OFF)
“OPERATION
COMPLETED”
message is displayed as shown
at the bottom in Step 6. Returns
to Step 1.
If “ON” is selected, the currently
set time period is displayed be-
low. The time on the left is the
Printer Power Saver start time
(or time that the printer unit will
power down). The time on the
right is the Printer Power Saver
end time.
Change the AM/PM designation
if selected by pressing the fol-
lowing keys.
PRINTER POWER SAVER
or
TIME PERIOD =
00:00 - 00:00
When the correct time period is
displayed, press:
(Example if the 24-hour format
option is selected in DATE &
TIME setting)
OPERATION COMPLETED
Displayed for 2 seconds
The display returns to Step 1.
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Separator Page
A Separator Page is a sheet automatically inserted between each
received fax, copy, and/or PC print. This feature makes it easier to
distinguish between individual receptions, copies and PC prints.
Select the Facsimile
Separator Page
Option
Select the Copy
Separator Page
Option
Display the
SEPARATOR PAGE
Menu
1
2
3
NOTE: If you have already selected a Paper Tray for the Letter
Press:
To turn ON Copy Separator
Page, press:
To turn ON Facsimile Separator
Page, press:
Head Paper setting, this function is not available.
+
+
+
+
To turn OFF Copy Separator
Page, press:
To turn OFF Facsimile Separa-
tor Page, press:
B
B
A
A
A
Separator Page
FAX SEPARATOR PAGE
COPY SEPARATOR PAGE
PC SEPARATOR PAGE
1.ON
1.ON
1.ON
2.OFF
2.OFF
2.OFF
Separator Page
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Separator Page - continued
Select Another
SETUP Item, or ...
Select the PC Print Separator Page Option
Select the Tray
Option
6
4
5
To turn ON PC Print Separator
Page, press:
To print the Separator Page
from the Lower Recording Paper
Tray, press:
After completing this Configura-
tion Setting, you may continue
to select other settings referring
to their associated pages for in-
structions, or press
If any of FAX Separator Page,
Copy Separator Page, or PC
Separator Page is set to ON
and an Optional Recording Pa-
per Tray is installed, following
screen is displayed.
To turn OFF PC Print Separator
Page, press:
To print the Separator Page
from a Paper Tray selected au-
tomatically, press:
TRAY SELECTION
1.LOWER TRAY
2.AUTO SELECT
to exit the Configuration Setting
mode and return to the Standby
Mode.
If no Optional Recording Paper
Tray is installed, following
screen is displayed.
NOTE:
NOTE:
When the two Optional Re-
cording Paper Trays are in-
stalled, the same screen is
displayed.
In case “AUTO” is selected,
separator page is printed on
Letter size paper. If Letter
size is empty, Legal size pa-
per is selected.
OPERATION COMPLETED
Go to Step 5.
Displayed for 2 seconds
OPERATION COMPLETED
Returns to display the SETUP
menu screen.
Displayed for 2 seconds
Go to Step 6.
Returns to display the SETUP
menu screen.
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Department Code Setting
Department Code operation is
Display the
DEPARTMENT CODE
Menu
Enable/Disable the Department Code Function
Enter the Master
Department Name
used to monitor the facsimile’s
activity when shared between
multiple users or workgroups.
1
2
3
Press:
Enable or Disable the Depart- If the Department Code function
Department Code NBR. 01 is
fixed as the Master Department
Code. Enter the Master Depart-
ment Name. See page 36 if you
need help selecting characters.
This feature is especially useful
when billing departments based
on machine usage.
ment Code function.
has ever been set before, the
following screen is displayed.
To recover the Department
+
+
+
+
When Department Code opera-
tion is enabled, access to the
facsimile is restricted to 99 valid
department code passwords.
DEPT CODE ENTRY
1.RECOVER OLD DATA
2.NEW
(for YES-Enable)
When the name is correctly dis-
played on the LCD display,
press:
Each department code will be
assigned a 5-digit department
code password. These pass-
words must be entered each
time a user wishes to send a
facsimile, make copy, print a de-
partment journal, etc.
(for NO-Disable)
Code data previously set, press:
The entered name is displayed
on the bottom row.
If “YES” is selected, the follow-
ing Master Code Entry screen is
displayed.
To set new Department codes,
press:
There are two types of Depart-
ment Codes, Master and Indi-
vidual. The Master Code is used
as a supervisor level code to
add, delete and modify Indi-
vidual Codes.
MASTER CODE ENTRY
DEPT NBR=
DEPT NAME=(MAX20)
MASTER CODE ENTRY
DEPT NBR=
01
01
ABC Master
nDept.
After 2 seconds:
After 2 seconds:
The Master Code is also used to
print the Department Code List
and Master Journals that con-
tain all machine activity.
ENTER NAME
MASTER CODE ENTRY
DEPT NBR=
MASTER CODE=
DEPT CODE ENTRY
1.YES
2.NO
01
DEPT NAME=(MAX20)
The Individual Codes are used
to gain an access to basic ma-
chine functions and operations.
The Department Code can be
used to print Journals which
only show the activity under that
code.
The screen to enter the Master
Department Name is displayed.
The data on the top row indi-
cates that it is in the Character
Entry mode. Continue to the fi-
nal step.
If “NO” is selected, “OPERA-
TION COMPLETED” will be dis-
played.
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Department Code Setting - continued
Enter the Master
Department Code
Password
Enter the Individual
Department Code
Address
Enter the Individual
Department Code
Name
Enter the Department
Code Password
Select Another
SETUP Item, or ...
4
5
6
7
8
Department Codes NBR. 02
through 99 are used as Indi-
vidual Department Codes. Enter
the Individual Department Code
name using the Keyboard. See
page 36 if you need help select-
ing characters.
When the name is correctly
displayed on the LCD display,
press:
Enter a 5-digit Master Depart-
ment Code Password using the
Dial Keypad. This password will
be required to gain supervisor
access to the machine.
After entering the Master De-
partment Code password, the
facsimile will prompt for an Indi-
vidual Department Code ad-
dress.
Enter
a
5-digit Department
If you want to continue entering
the Department Codes, repeat
Steps 5 through 7.
Code Password using the Dial
Keypad. This password will be
required to gain user/depart-
ment access to the machine.
After completing this Configura-
tion Setting, you may continue
to select other settings referring
to their associated pages for in-
structions, or press
Select an Individual Department
Code address from 02 to 99.
Important: Record this pass-
word in a safe location so that it
can be retrieved if it is lost or
forgotten.
Important: Record this pass-
word in a safe location so that it
can be retrieved if it is lost or
forgotten.
The entered name is displayed
on the bottom row.
to exit the Configuration Setting
mode and return to the Standby
Mode.
After selecting the Individual De-
partment Code address, press:
When the password is correctly
entered, press:
When the password is correctly
entered, press:
MASTER CODE ENTRY
DEPT CODE ENTRY
DEPT CODE ENTRY
DEPT CODE ENTRY
DEPT NBR=
01
DEPT NBR=
02
DEPT NBR=
02
DEPT NBR=
02
DEPT NAME=(MAX20)
REGISTERED
Sales Dept.
REGISTERED
After 2 seconds:
After 2 seconds:
After 2 seconds:
After 2 seconds:
DEPT CODE ENTRY
ENTER NAME
DEPT CODE ENTRY
DEPT NBR=
DEPT CODE ENTRY
02
DEPT NUMBER=(1-99)
DEPT NAME=(MAX20)
DEPT CODE=
DEPT NUMBER=(1-99)
The Department Code Name
entry menu is displayed.
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Department Code Maintenance
The Department Code Mainte-
nance is used to cancel or
change the Master or Individual
Department Code.
Display the
Enable/Disable the
Department Code
Select the Desired
Option
Select Another
SETUP Item, or ...
1
2
3
4
DEPARTMENT
CODE Menu
Press:
Enable or Disable the Depart-
ment Code function.
Select the desired option.
Press:
If you wish to continue, repeat
Steps 2 and 3.
This procedure can only be per-
formed by a supervisor who
possesses the Master Depart-
ment Code Password. Enter this
password before proceeding.
After completing this Configura-
tion Setting, you may continue
to select other settings referring
to their associated pages for in-
structions, or press
+
+
+
+
(for YES-Enable)
To cancel or delete the previ-
ously displayed Department
Code and return to the Depart-
ment Code Address Entry menu
in Step 5 of Department Code
Setting. (See page 56.)
(for NO-Disable)
If “YES” is selected, the follow-
ing Department Code Menu is
displayed.
to exit the Configuration Setting
mode and return to the Standby
Mode.
DEPT CODE ENTRY
To change the previously dis-
played Department Code and
return to Step 6 of Department
Code Setting. (See page 56.)
DEPT NUMBER=(1-99)
DEPT CODE ENTRY
1.YES
2.NO
Enter the code number of the
desired department and press:
To retain the previously dis-
played Department Code with-
out modification and return to
the Department Code Address
Entry menu in Step 5 of Depart-
ment Code Setting. (See page
56.)
DEPT CODE ENTRY
ALREADY ASSIGNED
DEPT NBR=
01
Supervisor
After 2 seconds:
DEPT CODE ENTRY
1.CANCEL
2.MODIFY
3.RETAIN
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Account Codes
This feature provides valuable
Account Code tracking informa-
tion for each facsimile transmis-
sion sent from the unit.
Display the
ACCOUNT CODE
Menu
Select the Function
Select Another
SETUP Item, or ...
1
2
3
Press:
Enable or Disable Account
Codes.
After completing this Configura-
tion Setting, you may continue
to select other settings referring
to their associated pages for in-
structions, or press
When a facsimile is transmitted,
the account code number will
be recorded on the Transmis-
sion Journal.
+
+
+
+
Select ON to enable Account
Code prompting and printing on
the Transmission Journal.
to exit the Configuration Setting
mode and return to the Standby
Mode.
Or, select OFF to disable Ac-
count Codes from being prompt-
ed and printed on the Transmis-
sion Journal.
ACCOUNT CODE
1.ON
OPERATION COMPLETED
2.OFF
Displayed for 2 seconds
Returns to display the SETUP
menu screen.
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Print Density Setting
The print density for reception,
copy, PC printing, and report
printing can be set. Five density
levels are available from -2
(lighter print) to +2 (darker print).
Display the
Enter the Desired
Print Density Value
Select Another
SETUP Item, or ...
1
2
3
SET PRINT DENSITY
Menu
Move the cursor to the desired
position, using the following
keys (-2 to +2; -2 for lighter
print, +2 for darker print).
Press:
After completing this Configura-
tion Setting, you may continue
to select other settings referring
to their associated pages for in-
structions, or press
+
+
+
+
or
When the desired value is dis-
played on the LCD display,
press:
to exit the Configuration Setting
mode and return to the Standby
Mode.
SET PRINT DENSITY
DENSITY(-2 TO +2)=
OPERATION COMPLETED
LIGHTER
DARKER
-2 -1 0 +1 +2
Displayed for 2 seconds
Returns to display the SETUP
menu screen.
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Document Length Setting
This setting enables or disables
Display the
Select the Document
Length Option
Select Another
SETUP Item, or ...
the DP120F/DP125F sending
documents longer than 1 Meter
(39.4”). The default setting en-
ables a 1 Meter (39.4”) limit.
1
2
3
DOCUMENT LENGTH
Menu
Press:
Select the Document Length op-
tion.
After completing this Configura-
tion Setting, you may continue
to select other settings referring
to their associated pages for in-
structions, or press
To select 1m, press:
+
+
To select UNLIMITED, press:
to exit the Configuration Setting
mode and return to the Standby
Mode.
+
+
OPERATION COMPLETED
Displayed for 2 seconds
DOCUMENT LENGTH
1.1m
2.UNLIMITED
Returns to display the SETUP
menu screen.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Line Monitor
This function is used to set the
speaker ON in order to monitor
the dialing and connection por-
tion of every transmission.
This function is mainly used to
confirm dialing and phone line
status.
Display the LINE
MONITOR Menu
Select the Line
Monitor Option
Select Another
SETUP Item, or ...
1
2
3
Press:
To turn ON the monitor speaker, After completing this Configura-
press:
tion Setting, you may continue
to select other settings referring
to their associated pages for in-
structions, or press
+
+
+
+
When two phone lines are si-
multaneously used for sending,
the job initiated last will be
monitored.
To turn OFF the monitor
speaker, press:
to exit the Configuration Setting
mode and return to the Standby
Mode.
OPERATION COMPLETED
Displayed for 2 seconds
LINE MONITOR
1.ALWAYS
2.OFF
Returns to display the SETUP
menu screen.
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Receive Interval Setting
This function insures there will
be a period of time set aside to
Display the RECEIVE
INTERVAL Menu
Select Another
SETUP Item, or ...
Enter the Receive
Interval
1
3
2
receive incoming facsimiles dur-
ing periods of heavy outgoing
transmission activity. After ev-
ery fourth consecutive transmis-
sion, this machine will wait 0 to
15 minutes to allow incoming
facsimiles to be received (de-
fault is 3 minutes).
Press:
Enter the interval value (0 to 15)
in minutes.
After completing this Configura-
tion Setting, you may continue
to select other settings referring
to their associated pages for in-
structions, or press
+
+
+
+
to exit the Configuration Setting
mode and return to the Standby
Mode.
Then press:
RECEIVE INTERVAL
OPERATION COMPLETED
INTERVAL=(0-15MIN)
3
Displayed for 2 seconds
Returns to display the SETUP
menu screen.
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ECM Default Setting
ECM (Error Correction Mode) is
an internationally-recognized er-
ror correction system. It enables
error free communications by
automatically re-sending any
portion of the document affected
by phone line noise or distor-
tion.
Display the SET
ECM Menu
Select the ECM
Option
Select Another
SETUP Item, or ...
1
2
3
Press:
Select the desired ECM option.
The LCD screen shown below is
displayed for 2 seconds.
After completing this Configura-
tion Setting, you may continue
to select other settings referring
to their associated pages for in-
structions, or press
+
+
To turn ECM to ON, press:
To turn ECM to OFF, press:
NOTES:
•
Default ECM setting is
ON.
•
Both the sender and the
receiver must have the
ECM feature to perform
ECM communications.
to exit the Configuration Setting
mode and return to the Standby
Mode.
+
+
•
•
This setting cannot be
changed if a document is
stored in memory. Re-
sidual memory must be
100%.
OPERATION COMPLETED
ECM is required for Su-
per G3 (33,600 bps) op-
erations. If ECM is dis-
abled, Super G3 opera-
tions are, also, disabled.
SET ECM
1.ON
2.OFF
Displayed for 2 seconds
Returns to display the SETUP
menu screen.
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Default Setting for Document Mode (Resolution and Contrast)
This setting will select the de-
Display the
Select the
Resolution
Select Another
SETUP Item, or ...
Select the Contrast
fault setting whenever a docu-
ment is set in the facsimile for
transmission. Manual settings (if
selected for a particular docu-
ment) will take precedence over
default settings.
1
2
4
3
DOCUMENT MODE
Menu
Select the desired resolution
setting by pressing one of the
following keys.
After completing this Configura-
tion Setting, you may continue
to select other settings referring
to their associated pages for in-
structions, or press
Press:
Select the default contrast level
by pressing one of the following
keys.
Select STANDARD mode for
sending normal text and graph-
ics by pressing:
Select NORMAL for normal
documents by pressing:
+
+
+
+
Select DARKER to darken light
originals (i.e., for documents
with light or faint print) by press-
ing:
Select FINE mode for sending
normal text and graphics with
extra clarity by pressing:
to exit the Configuration Setting
mode and return to the Standby
Mode.
Select U-FINE (Ultra-Fine) for
sending fine text and graphics
with extra clarity by pressing:
Select LIGHTER to lighten dark
originals (i.e., for documents
with dark print) by pressing:
SET CONTRAST
1.NORMAL
2.DARKER
SET RESOLUTION
1.STANDARD
2.FINE
OPERATION COMPLETED
3.LIGHTER
3.U-FINE
Displayed for 2 seconds
Returns to display the SETUP
menu screen.
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Collate Copy Setting
When copying documents, the COLLATE function may be selected.
This function will sort multiple page copies into sets of correct-order
pages.
Display the
COLLATE COPY
Menu
Select Another
SETUP Item, or ...
Select the Desired
Option
3
1
2
This setting establishes the default for the Collate Copy function.
Collate Copy may, also, be set manually at the time the copy opera-
tion is performed.
Select the desired option.
Press:
After completing this Configura-
tion Setting, you may continue
to select other settings referring
to their associated pages for in-
structions, or press
To set COLLATE COPY to ON,
press:
Output Examples of Printed Copies
+
+
With COLLATE Function ON
With COLLATE Function
OFF
To set COLLATE COPY to OFF,
press:
to exit the Configuration Setting
mode and return to the Standby
Mode.
Page 1
Page 1
Page 3
Page 2
+
+
Page 1
Page 1
Page 3
Page 2
Page 1
Page 2
Page 2
Page 2
Page 3
Page 3
Page 3
Page 3
Page 2
Page 1
OPERATION COMPLETED
NOTES:
NOTES:
Displayed for 2 seconds
•
The pages are automati-
cally collated.
•
Collating is the responsi-
COLLATE COPY DEFAULT
1.ON
2.OFF
bility of the operator.
•
Requires enough memo-
ry for the entire multi-
page document. If there
is not enough memory
(memory overflow), the
copying procedure will be
canceled.
•
Memory requirements are
limited to one page at a
time.
Returns to display the SETUP
menu screen.
•
Collation is slower than
non-collation
because
the entire document must
be scanned into memory
first, then printing can oc-
cur.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Letter Head Paper Reservation Setting
This function allows you to re-
serve a particular Paper Tray for
Display the LETTER
HEAD PAPER Menu
Select the Tray Option
Select Another
SETUP Item, or ...
1
2
3
use with PC printing or copying
functions. Once selected, the
paper in this tray cannot be
used for facsimile receptions
(even if the other paper tray(s)
becomes empty).
Press:
When one Optional Recording
Paper Tray is installed:
After completing this Configura-
tion Setting, you may continue
to select other settings referring
to their associated pages for in-
structions, or press
When two Optional Recording
Paper Trays are installed:
To select the Bypass Tray,
press:
To select the Bypass Tray,
press:
+
+
+
+
NOTE:
This function is only avail-
able when the Optional Re-
cording Paper Tray(s) is at-
tached to the machine.
If you have already selected
a Paper Tray for the Separa-
tor Page function, this set-
ting is not available.
When the specified Paper
Tray becomes empty, the
paper will be supplied from
another Paper Tray.
To select the Upper Recording
Paper Tray, press:
To select the Upper Recording
Paper Tray, press:
to exit the Configuration Setting
mode and return to the Standby
Mode.
To select the Lower Recording To select the Middle Recording
Paper Tray, press:
Paper Tray, press:
LETTER HEAD PAPER
1.OFF
2.BYPASS
3.UPPER TRAY
To select the Lower Recording
Paper Tray, press:
OPERATION COMPLETED
4.MIDDLE TRAY
5.LOWER TRAY
Displayed for 2 seconds
If no Option Recording Paper
Tray is installed, the following
screen is displayed.
OPERATION COMPLETED
Returns to display the SETUP
menu screen.
Displayed for 2 seconds
SORRY NOT POSSIBLE
Returns to display the SETUP
menu screen.
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Redial (Interval and Counter)
If the destination facsimile you
Display the REDIAL
MODE Menu
Select the REDIAL
Option
Enter the Redial
Interval
Enter the Redial
Counter
called is busy, your facsimile will
automatically redial the number
up to the number of attempts set
by this procedure. In addition,
your DP120F/DP125F will try to
redial every 1 minute by default.
If desired, you may change
these redial settings.
1
2
3
4
Press:
Select the desired REDIAL op- Enter the interval value (01 to
Enter the redial counter value
(00 to 14).
tion.
15) in minutes.
To select the Redial Interval,
press:
+
+
+
Redial Counter
The Redial Counter sets the
number of redial attempts. The
default setting is 5. You may
change the number of redials
from 0 to 14 attempts.
REDIAL MODE
INTERVAL= (01-15MIN)
01
+
+
Then press:
Then press:
Redial Interval
Go to Step 3.
The Redial Interval sets the
length of time between redial at-
tempts. The default redial inter-
To select REDIAL COUNTER,
press:
The following screen is dis-
played.
The following screen is dis-
played.
val is
1
minute. You may
change the interval from 1 to 15
minutes.
+
OPERATION COMPLETED
OPERATION COMPLETED
REDIAL MODE
01.INTERVAL
02.COUNTER
REDIAL MODE
After 2 seconds, the display re-
turns to Step 1. To complete the
After 2 seconds, the display re-
turns to Step 1. To complete the
COUNTER
=(00-14)
05
Go to Step 4.
procedure, press
.
procedure, press
.
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto Receive Mode
This setting allows you select
Auto or Manual reception.
When Auto is selected, your
facsimile will automatically re-
ceive the documents after a pre-
set ring delay. When Manual is
selected, you need to answer
the call to receive the docu-
ments.
Display the AUTO
RECEIVE Menu
Select the Desired
Receive Mode
Enter the Ring Delay
Select Another
SETUP Item, or ...
1
2
3
4
Press:
Enter the desired number of
rings (01 to 10) before the fac-
simile will answer the incoming
call.
After completing this Configura-
tion Setting, you may continue
to select other settings referring
to their associated pages for in-
structions, or press
Select the desired Receive
Mode.
+
+
+
+
(for AUTO RECEIVE)
(for MANUAL RECEIVE)
to exit the Configuration Setting
mode and return to the Standby
Mode.
If AUTO RECEIVE is selected,
the following will be displayed.
When the desired ring count is
displayed on the LCD, press:
AUTO RECEIVE
RING DELAY =(01-10)
01
OPERATION COMPLETED
If MANUAL RECEIVE is se-
lected, the following will be dis-
played for 2 seconds (continue
to Step 4).
AUTO RECEIVE MODE
1.AUTO RECEIVE
2.MANUAL RECEIVE
Displayed for 2 seconds
OPERATION COMPLETED
Returns to display the SETUP
menu screen.
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Line-2 Operation
If your facsimile is equipped
with the Line-2 Board, you can
configure its operation as fol-
lows.
Display the LINE-2
MODE Menu
Configure Line-2
Operation
Enter the Start Time
and End Time
Select Another
SETUP Item, or ...
1
2
3
4
Press:
Select “1.TX/RX” if the second
line is used for both transmis-
sion and reception by pressing:
Enter the start time and end After completing this Configura-
time of the time period in which tion Setting, you may continue
the Line-2 will be used for re- to select other settings referring
ception only.
to their associated pages for in-
structions, or press
+
+
+
+
(Default)
Select “2.RECEPTION ONLY” if
the second line option is used
for reception only by pressing:
to exit the Configuration Setting
mode and return to the Standby
Mode.
Select “3.TIMER” if the second
line option is used for reception
only during a specific time range
set in Step 3.
NOTES:
For 24-hour format:
00:00 to 23:59
For 12-hour format:
12:00 to 11:59, and the
AM or PM designation
LINE-2 MODE
1.TX & RX
2.RECEPTION ONLY
3.TIMER
When the correct time period is
entered, press:
When either 1 or 2 is selected,
the “OPERATION COMPLET-
ED” message is displayed. Con-
tinue to the final step.
When 3 is selected, the follow-
ing screen is displayed to set
the time period for reception. If
any data is already set, it is dis-
played on the bottom row.
OPERATION COMPLETED
Displayed for 2 seconds
RECEPTION ONLY
Returns to display the SETUP
menu screen.
TIME PERIOD =
00:00 -00:00
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BASIC FUNCTIONS - AUTOMATIC TELEPHONE DIALING
Abbreviated Dialer Registration
Once registered, 73 One Touch
Display the TEL
LIST ENTRY Menu
Display the ABB.
NUMBERS Menu
Enter an ABB. Dial Number
and 300 Abbreviated Dial Num-
bers will allow you to send docu-
ments or make telephone calls
to 373 frequently called numbers
without manually dialing the en-
tire number.
1
2
3
Turn the Flip Panel to the “50-
73” view to select the desired
Function Key.
To select “ABB. NUMBERS,”
press:
Enter an Abbreviated Dial Num- If the ABB. Dial Number you en-
ber from 1 to 999.
tered has been previously regis-
tered, continue to the next step.
•
Abbreviated Dial Numbers
This machine can store up to
300 16-digit facsimile num-
bers and associated 20-char-
acter location ID names. This
information is stored into Ab-
breviated Dial Numbers la-
beled from 001 to 999.
Press:
ABB. NBR=
001
ID NAME =(MAX20)
ENTER ABB. NUMBER
OR PRESS
After 2 seconds:
[BACK]:TO PREVIOUS
[STOP]:TO COMPLETE
TEL LIST ENTRY
1.ABB. NUMBERS
2.GROUP NUMBERS
3.ONE TOUCH KEYS
•
•
One Touch Numbers
See page 77.
ENTER NAME
ID NAME =(MAX20)
Upon entering
the first number:
Make sure the 3-digit number
(001 to 999) appears correctly,
then press:
Alternate Numbers
If one of the primary facsimile
numbers is busy, and a 2nd
facsimile is located at that
same remote location, the
2nd facsimile’s telephone
number can be programmed
as an Alternate Number.
ABB. NUMBER ENTRY
ABB. NUMBER =(1-999)
X
NOTE:
Any leading zero (0) can be
omitted from the Abbreviated
Dial Number.
Important Note:
If the ABB. Dial Number you en-
tered has not been previously
registered, the screen below will
be displayed. Skip to Step 6.
The total number of available
locations will vary depending
upon the amount of informa-
tion stored in each location.
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Abbreviated Dialer Registration - continued
When a Preset ABB.
Dial Number is Active
Change the ABB. Information
4
5
If the selected Abbreviated Dial You can cancel, modify, or re-
Number has been previously tain Abbreviated Dial Numbers
registered, the following infor- registered in this facsimile.
mation will be displayed on the
5a
5b
5c
Retain the Current
Cancel the ABB. Dial
Information
Modify the ABB. Dial
Information
ABB. Dial Information
•
CANCEL
LCD display.
To cancel (or delete) the con-
tents stored in the Abbreviated
Dial Number, press:
To change the number or Loca-
tion ID (remote facsimile name)
currently assigned to an exist-
ing Abbreviated Dial Number,
press:
If you do not wish to change the
Abbreviated Dial Number infor-
mation, press:
Deletes
the
information
stored in the selected Abbre-
viated Dial Number. It will
also remove the number
from all associated Group Di-
aling Directories.
ABB. NUMBER ENTRY
ALREADY ASSIGNED
ABB. NUMBER =
001
NEW YORK OFFICE
(to RETAIN)
After 2 seconds:
(to CANCEL)
•
MODIFY
Allows you to change the re-
mote facsimile number and/
or associated Location ID
name. This selection is rec-
ommended if the location is
used in Group Dialing Direc-
tories.
(to MODIFY)
ENTER ABB. NUMBER
OR PRESS
[BACK]:TO PREVIOUS
[STOP]:TO COMPLETE
ABB. NUMBER ENTRY
ABB. NUMBER ENTRY
The facsimile number currently
assigned is displayed on the
bottom row.
1.CANCEL
2.MODIFY
3.RETAIN
ABB. NUMBER =
CANCELLED
001
After 2 seconds:
ABB. NBR=
001
Return to Step 3 to select a dif-
ferent Abbreviated Dial Number
•
RETAIN
Retains the selected Abbre-
viated Dial Number informa-
tion without modification.
ENTER ABB. NUMBER
OR PRESS
[BACK]:TO PREVIOUS
[STOP]:TO COMPLETE
ID NAME =(MAX20)
After 2 seconds:
or press
to return to the
ENTER NAME
Return to Step 3.
Standby Mode.
ID NAME =(MAX20)
XXXXXX
Skip to Step 6.
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Abbreviated Dialer Registration - continued
Enter the Location
ID Name
Enter the Telephone Number
Enter an Alternate
Number (Optional)
6
7
8
Enter the telephone number you
want to store (up to 128 digits).
Enter the Location ID name of
the remote party to be assigned
to the current Abbreviated Dial
Number.
played on the bottom row of the
LCD display as you enter it.
Confirm that the number is cor-
rect.
Alternate Numbers are optional.
If the remote location does not
have two or more facsimile units
in the same area, you can leave
this entry blank. (See page 70
for more information.)
See page 36 for more informa-
tion on Character Entry.
ABB. NBR = 001
Enter the Alternate Facsimile
Number.
When the name is displayed
correctly on the LCD display,
press:
TEL NUMBER=(MAX128)
9583359
Then press:
NOTE:
If your facsimile is connected
to a PBX system, you may
need to enter an access digit
(9) and a pause so the sys-
tem will connect you to an
outside line. In such cases,
ABB. NBR=
001
ABB. NBR=001
2nd TEL NBR=(MAX128)
TEL NUMBER=(MAX.128)
Then press:
press
to enter a 3-sec-
ond pause. This pause may
be repeated if necessary and
may be entered anywhere
between digits. A pause en-
try is indicated as a hyphen
“–” on the LCD display.
COMM. OPTION?
1.YES
2.NO
The telephone number is dis-
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Abbreviated Dialer Registration - continued
Select Communication Options (Advanced Setup)
9
This setting will allow you to
specify one or more of the fol-
lowing Communication Options
for the Abbreviated Dial Number
you are registering.
9c
Delayed Communications
9a
9b
Select the
Communication
Option
Complete the Option
Setup
To select default settings, press:
If you have completed the de-
sired Communication Options
setting for this Abbreviated Dial
Number, select COMPLETE by
pressing:
To designate a specific time at
which operations using this Ab-
breviated Dial Number will be
dialed, press:
DELAYED COMM.
TIME =23:30
Delayed Communication
Default=off
Select to program a trans-
mission start time.
To skip the Communication Op-
tions, press:
Displayed for 2 seconds
Transmission Report
Default=off
The display returns to the first
screen in Step 9. Select the
next Option.
Enables or disables the
printing of a TX Report.
DELAYED COMM.
ABB. NBR=
PRESS ONE TOUCH KEY
TO ENTER OR
001
When “1.YES” is selected, the
COMM. OPTIONS screen ap-
pears. Complete the following
steps for each item selected.
Line Monitor
TIME =HH:MM
:
Default=off
Enables or disables the line
monitor speaker during dial-
ing.
[ENTER]:TO SKIP
Enter the desired transmission
start time in either the 12-hour
or 24-hour format depending on
the machine setup. (example:
23:30 in the 24-hour format).
Skip to Step 10.
Quality TX
Default=off
COMM. OPTIONS
1.COMPLETE
2.DELAYED COMM.
3.TX REPORT
Selects
a
lower modem
speed for poor communica-
tion links.
DELAYED COMM.
4.LINE MONITOR
5.QUALITY TX
6.SUB ADDRESS
7.TEL LINE SELECT
Sub Address
TIME =HH:MM
23:30
Default=none
Specifies a Sub Address for
the Abbreviated Dial Number
being registered. The remote
unit must support Sub-Ad-
dress capabilities.
These items are outside the
LCD frame. To view them,
use the [ ] scroll key.
Then press:
Tel Line Select
Default=first available
Specifies which tel line is se-
lected when the 2nd Line is
installed.
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Abbreviated Dialer Registration - continued
Select Communication Options - continued
9
9d
9e
9f
9g
Sub-Address
Transmission Report
Line Monitor Speaker
Quality TX
Communication
To request a Transmission Re- To enable/disable the facsimi- To transmit documents to this
port automatically after sending le’s Line Monitor Speaker when Abbreviated Dial Number at a
documents using this Abbrevi- dialing this Abbreviated Dial lower speed for poor line condi-
Sub-Address Communications
allow a variety of specialized
facsimile communications.
QUALITY TX
1.OFF
2.14400BPS
3. 9600BPS
ated Dial Number, select:
Number, press:
tions, press:
SUB
4. 4800BPS
Sub-Address Transmission
Allows documents to be routed
through remote LAN-Facsimile
devices to specific users’ work-
stations.
These items are outside the
LCD frame. To view them,
use the [ ] scroll key.
To cancel the QUALITY TX op-
tion, press:
SET TX REPORT
1.ON
LINE MONITOR
1.ON
2.OFF
2.OFF
Allows documents to be trans-
mitted to specific Mailboxes in
remote facsimile.
The display returns to the first
screen in Step 9. Select the next
Option.
To select 14400BPS, press:
To select 9600BPS, press:
To select 4800BPS, press:
To enable a TX Report, press:
To disable a TX Report, press:
To enable the monitor speaker,
press:
SEP
Selective Polling
Allows documents to be re-
trieved from specific Mailboxes
in remote facsimiles.
To disable the monitor speaker,
press:
PWD
Password
Allows secure communications
to SUB and from SEP compat-
ible devices.
The display returns to the first
screen in Step 9. Select the next
Option.
The display returns to the first
screen in Step 9. Select the next
Option.
IMPORTANT:
If you designate an incorrect
sub-address, the communica-
tion will result in an error. If you
designate an unnecessary sub-
address, the communication will
result in error.
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Abbreviated Dialer Registration - continued
Select Communication Options - continued
9
9g
Sub-Address Communication - continued
9g-1
9g-2
9g-3
9g-4
9g-5
Select the Sub
Address Comm.
Options
Complete the
Sub-Address Comm.
Options Setup
Select a SUB
Sub-Address
Communication
Select a SEP
Sub-Address
Communication
Select a PWD
Sub-Address
Communication
If the remote party assigned to
the Abbreviated Dial Number re-
quires or provides a Sub Ad-
dress to route or retrieve mes-
sages, press:
To complete Sub Address entry To enter a SUB type Sub Ad- To enter a SEP type Sub Ad- To enter a PWD type Sub Ad-
or skip this option, press:
dress, press:
dress, press:
dress, press:
The display returns to the first
screen in Step 9.
SUB ADDRESS COMM.
SUB =(MAX20)
SUB ADDRESS COMM.
SEP =(MAX20)
SUB ADDRESS COMM.
PWD =(MAX20)
Returns to Step 8g-1.
COMM. OPTIONS
1.COMPLETE
2.DELAYED COMM.
3.TX REPORT
SUB ADDRESS COMM.
1.COMPLETE
2.SUB
Enter the required number (max. Enter the required number (max. Enter the required number (max.
20 digits), then press:
20 digits), then press:
20 digits), then press:
3.SEP
4.PWD
This item is outside the LCD
frame. To view it, use the
Returns to Step 9g-1.
Returns to Step 9g-1.
Returns to Step 9g-1.
[
] scroll key.
SUB ADDRESS COMM.
1.COMPLETE
2.SUB
SUB ADDRESS COMM.
1.COMPLETE
2.SUB
SUB ADDRESS COMM.
1.COMPLETE
2.SUB
3.SEP
3.SEP
3.SEP
4.PWD
4.PWD
4.PWD
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Abbreviated Dialer Registration - continued
Select Communication Options - continued
Assign the Abbreviated Dial Number to a One Touch Key
9
10
9h
10a
10b
Use a Preassigned One Touch Key
Select the Telephone Line
Assign the
One Touch Key
If the desired One Touch Key
has been previously linked to
another Abbreviated Dial Num-
ber or preset with a separate
One Touch number, one of the
following screens will be dis-
played.
If your facsimile is equipped with
the Line 2 Board, you will be
able to designate which phone
line to use (Line 1 or Line 2) for
this Abbreviated Dial Number by
pressing:
To assign this Abbreviated Dial
Number to a One Touch Key,
press the desired One Touch
Key (Example: One Touch Key
01).
To CANCEL the existing link or
One Touch assignment and re-
turn to Step 10a, press:
To allow the Line to be selected
automatically, press:
To designate Line 1, press:
To desingnate Line 2, press:
To RETAIN the existing link or
One Touch assignment and re-
turn to Step 10a, press:
One Touch key has been as-
signed to an Abbreviated Num-
ber:
ABB. NBR=
001
01
ONE TOUCH=
L.A. OFFICE
REGISTERED
TEL LINE SELECT
1.FIRST AVAILABLE
2.LINE #1
ONE TOUCH=
01
ALREADY ASSIGNED
ABB. NBR=
After 2 seconds:
003
3.LINE #2
SMITH’S OFFICE
Returns to Step 10a.
ENTER ABB. NUMBER
OR PRESS
[BACK]:TO PREVIOUS
[STOP]:TO COMPLETE
ABB. NBR=
PRESS ONE TOUCH KEY
TO ENTER OR
001
One Touch key has been as-
signed with an Individual Phone
Number:
Returns to Step 9.
[ENTER]:TO SKIP
COMM. OPTIONS
1.COMPLETE
2.DELAYED COMM.
3.TX REOIRT
ONE TOUCH=
ALREADY ASSIGNED
ONE TOUCH=
01
01
Returns to Step 2.
WEST REGION CENTER
After 2 seconds:
Press
to exit the Menu
ONE TOUCH=
CANCEL ?
1.CANCEL
2.RETAIN
01
Operation mode and return to
the Standby Mode.
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
One Touch Dialer Registration
This facsimile provides a total of
Display the TEL
LIST ENTRY Menu
Display the ONE
TOUCH KEYS Menu
Select a One Touch
Location
When a Preset One
Touch is Active
73 One Touch Dial keys. Keys 1
to 49 are accessible with the
Flip Panel in the “01-49” view.
Keys 50 to 73 are accessible
with the Flip Panel in the “50-73”
view.
1
2
3
4
Turn the Flip Panel to the “50- To select “ONE TOUCH KEYS”,
73” view to select the desired press:
Function Key.
Press the desired One Touch If the pressed One Touch key
key.
has already been registered
with a telephone number, the
following information appears on
the LCD display.
Example: One Touch key 03
Press:
•
Alternate Numbers
If one of the primary fac-
simile numbers is busy, and
a 2nd facsimile is located at
that same remote location,
the 2nd facsimile’s telephone
number can be programmed
as an Alternate Number.
If the One Touch key has not
been previously used and the
following menu is displayed,
skip to Step 6.
ONE TOUCH=
03
ALREADY ASSIGNED
ABB. NUMBER =
FRISCO OFFICE
DIAL ENTRY
PRESS ONE TOUCH KEY
OR PRESS
[BACK]:TO PREVIOUS
[STOP]:TO COMPLETE
012
1.ABB. NUMBERS
2.GROUP NUMBERS
3.ONE TOUCH KEYS
After 2 seconds:
ONE TOUCH=
03
ONE TOUCH KEY ENTRY
1.CANCEL
2.MODIFY
3.RETAIN
ID NAME =(MAX20)
After 2 seconds:
ENTER NAME
ID NAME =(MAX20)
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
One Touch Dialer Registration - continued
Change One Touch Information
Enter the Location
ID Name
5
6
You can cancel or retain the
One Touch key once registered
into the facsimile.
Enter the Location ID name of
the remote party to be assigned
to the current One Touch key.
5a
5b
5c
Cancel the One Touch
Assignment
Modify the One Touch
Assignment
Retain the One Touch
Assignment
•
CANCEL
Deletes
See page 36 for more informa-
tion on Character Entry.
To cancel (or delete) the One To change the number or Loca-
To retain the previous One
Touch key assignment, press:
the
information
Touch key assignment, press:
tion ID (remote facsimile name)
currently assigned to an existing
One Touch key press:
stored in the selected One
Touch key. It will also re-
move the number from all
associated Group Dialing Di-
rectories.
When the name is displayed
correctly on the LCD display,
press:
(to CANCEL)
(to RETAIN)
•
MODIFY
(to MODIFY)
Allows you to change the re-
mote facsimile number and/
or associated Location ID
name. This selection is rec-
ommended if the location is
used in Group Dialing Direc-
tories.
ONE TOUCH KEY ENTRY
ENTER ONE TOUCH KEY
OR PRESS
The facsimile number currently
assigned is displayed on the
bottom row.
ONE TOUCH=
CANCELLED
03
[BACK]:TO PREVIOUS
[STOP]:TO COMPLETE
ONE TOUCH=
03
TEL NUMBER=(MAX 128)
After 2 seconds:
Return to Step 3 to select a dif-
ferent One Touch key or press
ENTER ONE TOUCH KEY
OR PRESS
[BACK]:TO PREVIOUS
[STOP]:TO COMPLETE
ONE TOUCH=
03
•
RETAIN
Retains the selected One
Touch key information with-
out modification.
ID NAME =(MAX20)
to return to the Standby
Mode.
After 2 seconds:
Return to Step 3.
ENTER NAME
ID NAME =(MAX20)
XXXXXX
Return to Step 3.
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
One Touch Dialer Registration - continued
Enter the Telephone Number
Select Communication Options (Advanced Setup)
Enter the Alternate
Number (Optional)
7
9
8
Enter the telephone number you number on the bottom row of Alternate Numbers are optional.
This setting will allow you to
specify one or more of the fol-
lowing Communication Options
for the One Touch key you are
registering.
9a
Select the
Communication Option
want to store (up to 128 digits).
the LCD display. If it is correct, If the remote location does not
press:
have two or more facsimiles in
the same area, you can leave
this entry blank. (See page 77
for more information.)
To select the most popular set-
tings, skip this step (recom-
mended) and return to Step 3 by
pressing:
Delayed Communication
Default=off
Enter the Alternate Facsimile
Number:
ONE TOUCH=
03
Select to program a trans-
mission start time.
2nd TEL NBR=(MAX128)
Transmission Report
Default=off
To specify the Communication
Options, press:
NOTE:
Enables or disables the
printing of a TX Report.
If your facsimile is connected
to a PBX system, you may
need to enter an access digit
(9) and pause so the system
will connect you to an out-
side line. In such cases,
Line Monitor
Default=off
Enables or disables the line
monitor speaker during dial-
ing.
When “1.YES” is selected, the
COMM. OPTIONS screen ap-
pears. Follow the next steps for
each item selection.
Then press:
press
to enter a 3-sec-
Quality TX
Default=off
ond pause. This pause may
be repeated if necessary and
may be entered anywhere
between digits. A pause en-
try is indicated as a hyphen
“–” on the LCD display.
Selects
a
lower modem
COMM. OPTION?
1.YES
2.NO
COMM. OPTIONS
1.COMPLETE
2.DELAYED COMM.
3.TX REPORT
speed for poor communica-
tion links.
Sub Address
Default=none
4.LINE MONITOR
5.QUALITY TX
6.SUB ADDRESS
7.TEL LINE SELECT
Check the entered telephone
Specifies a Sub Address for
the One Touch key being
registered. The remote unit
must support Sub-Address
capabilities.
These items are outside the
LCD frame. To view them,
use the [ ] scroll key.
Tel Line Select
Default=first available
Specifies which tel line is se-
lected when the 2nd Line is
installed.
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
One Touch Dialer Registration - continued
Select Communication Options - continued
9
9b
9c
9d
9e
9f
Quality TX
Complete the Option
Setup
Delayed
Communications
Transmission Report
Line Monitor Speaker
To transmit documents to this
One Touch Dial Number at a
lower speed for poor line condi-
tions, press:
To designate a specific time at
which operations using this One
Touch key will be dialed, press:
If you have completed the de-
sired Communication Options
setting for this One Touch key,
select COMPLETE by pressing:
To request a Transmission Re- To enable/disable the facsimi-
port automatically after sending le’s Line Monitor Speaker when
document using this One Touch dialing with this One Touch key,
key, select:
press:
To cancel the QUALITY TX op-
tion, press:
DELAYED COMM.
Return to Step 3.
SET TX REPORT
1.ON
2.OFF
LINE MONITOR
1.ON
2.OFF
TIME =HH:MM
:
PRESS ONE TOUCH KEY
OR PRESS
[BACK]:TO PREVIOUS
[STOP]:TO COMPLETE
To select 14400BPS, press:
To select 9600BPS, press:
To select 4800BPS, press:
Enter the transmission start time
in either the 12-hour or 24-hour
format depending on the ma-
chine set up (example: 23:30 in
the 24-hour format).
To enable a TX Report, press:
To disable a TX Report, press:
To enable the monitor speaker,
press:
DELAYED COMM.
TIME =HH:MM
23:30
To disable the monitor speaker,
press:
Press:
QUALITY TX
1.OFF
2.14400BPS
3. 9600BPS
The display returns to the first The display returns to the first
screen in Step 9. Select the next screen in Step 9. Select the next
DELAYED COMM.
TIME =23:30
Option.
Option.
4. 4800BPS
This item is outside the
LCD frame. To view it, use
the [ ] scroll key.
Displayed for 2 seconds
The display returns to the first
screen in Step 9. Select the
next Option.
The display returns to the first
screen in Step 9. Select the next
Option.
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
One Touch Dialer Registration - continued
Select Communication Options - continued
9
9g
Sub-Address Communication - continued
Sub-Address Communications
allow a variety of specialized
facsimile communications.
9g-1
9g-2
9g-3
9g-4
Select the Sub
Address Comm.
Options
Complete the
Sub-Address Comm.
Options Setup
Select a SUB
Sub-Address
Communication
Select a SEP
Sub-Address
Communication
SUB
Sub-Address Transmission
Allows documents to be routed
through remote LAN-Fax de-
vices to specific users’ worksta-
tions.
If the remote party assigned to
this One Touch key requires or
provides a Sub Address to
route or retrieve messages,
press:
To complete Sub Address entry To enter a SUB type Sub Ad-
To enter a SEP type Sub Ad-
dress, press:
or skip this option, press:
dress, press:
Allows documents to be trans-
mitted to specific Mailboxes in
remote facsimiles.
The display returns to the first
screen in Step 9.
SUB ADDRESS COMM.
SUB ADDRESS COMM.
SEP =(MAX20)
SUB =(MAX20)
Returns to Step 8g-1.
SEP
Selective Polling
SUB ADDRESS COMM.
1.COMPLETE
2.SUB
COM OPTIONS
1.COMPLETE
2.DELAYED COMM.
3.TX REPORT
Enter the required number (max.
20 digits), then press:
Enter the required number (max.
20 digits), then press:
Allows documents to be re-
trieved from specific Mailboxes
residing in remote facsimiles.
3.SEP
PWD
Password
4.PWD
Returns to Step 9g-1.
Returns to Step 9g-1.
Allows secure communications
to SUB and from SEP compat-
ible devices.
This item is outside the LCD
frame. To view it, use the
SUB ADDRESS COMM.
1.COMPLETE
2.SUB
SUB ADDRESS COMM.
1.COMPLETE
2.SUB
[
] scroll key.
IMPORTANT:
If you designate an incorrect
sub-address, the communica-
tion will result in an error. If you
designate an unnecessary sub-
address, the communication will
result in an error.
3.SEP
3.SEP
4.PWD
4.PWD
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
One Touch Dialer Registration - continued
Select Communication Options - continued
9
Sub-Address
Communication
- continued
9g
9h
Select the Telephone
Line
If your facsimile is equipped with
the 2nd Line Board, you will be
able to designate which phone
line to use (Line 1 or Line 2) for
this One Touch key by pressing:
9g-5
Select a PWD
Sub-Address
Communication
To enter a PWD type Sub Ad-
dress, press:
To allow the Line to be selected
TEL LINE SELECT
1.FIRST AVAILABLE
2.LINE #1
SUB ADDRESS COMM.
PWD =(MAX20)
3.LINE #2
automatically, press:
Enter the required number (max.
20 digits), then press:
To designate Line 1, press:
Returns to Step 9g-1.
To designate Line 2, press:
Returns to Step 9.
SUB ADDRESS COMM.
1.COMPLETE
2.SUB
3.SEP
4.PWD
COMM. OPTIONS
1.COMPLETE
2.DELAYED COMM.
3.TX REPORT
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Group Number Registration
You can send a document to
Display the TEL
LIST ENTRY Menu
Display the GROUP
NUMBERS Menu
Enter a Group Number
multiple remote parties in a sin-
gle operation. This is referred to
as Group Dialing or Multi-ad-
dress Transmission.
1
2
3
Turn the Flip Panel to the “50- To select “GROUP NUMBERS,” Enter a Group Number (1 to If the number entered is already
73” view to select the desired press:
Function Key.
1999).
registered as a Group Number,
you will receive an LCD prompt
like the one below.
It is useful to preset addresses,
to which Multi-address Transmis-
sions are often performed, in a
group. To make a Multi-address
Transmission easier, you can as-
sign such a group to a One
Touch key.
Press:
GROUP NBR ENTRY
ALREADY ASSIGNED
GROUP NBR=
OREGON GRP
0001
The preset groups can also be
used as groups for Multi-polling
Receptions.
TEL LIST ENTRY
1.ABB. NUMBERS
2.GROUP NUMBERS
3.ONE TOUCH KEYS
ENTER GROUP NUMBER
OR PRESS
[BACK]:TO PREVIOUS
[STOP]:TO COMPLETE
After 2 seconds:
GROUP NBR ENTRY
1.CANCEL
Example: 1
You can register up to 50 Broad-
cast Groups using any combina-
tion of Group Numbers from 1 to
1999 (no duplications allowed).
You may also assign each group
an optional name of up to 20
characters.
Each group can contain any
combination of the 300 Abbrevi-
ated and/or 73 One Touch dial
locations and can be assigned to
a One Touch key.
2.MODIFY
3.RETAIN
GROUP NBR ENTRY
GROUP NBR =(1-1999)
1
To select “1.CANCEL,” go to
Step 4a.
Then press:
To select “2.MODIFY,” go to
Step 4b.
To select “3.RETAIN,” go to
Step 4c.
GROUP NBR=
0001
GROUP NAME =(MAX20)
Displayed for 2 seconds
The display changes to the fol-
lowing for character entry (go to
Step 5).
ENTER NAME
GROUP NAME =(MAX20)
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Group Number Registration - continued
4a Cancel the Existing 4b Modify the Existing 4c Retain the Existing
5
6
Enter the Group
Name
Enter a Remote
Station
Group
Group
Group
Enter the addresses of the re-
mote stations to be preset in
the group.
To cancel the existing Group,
press:
To change the existing Group,
press:
To retain the existing Group,
press:
Enter the Group Name (with up
to 20 characters) associated
with the Group Number.
If a remote station is assigned
to a One Touch key, press the
One Touch key.
See page 36 for more informa-
tion on Character Entry.
(to CANCEL)
(to MODIFY)
(to RETAIN)
If a remote station is assigned
to an Abbreviated Dial Number,
enter the number then press
.
(When no name is entered in
this step, no name will be given
to the Group Number.)
Go to Step 5 for the Group
Name entry.
GROUP NBR ENTRY
GROUP NBR=
0001
ENTER GROUP NUMBER
OR PRESS
[BACK]:TO PREVIOUS
[STOP]:TO COMPLETE
When the name is displayed
correctly on the LCD display,
press:
GROUP NBR=
CANCELLED
0001
GROUP NAME =(MAX20)
Example:
Abbreviated Dial Number
118 (preset as DENVER
OFFICE):
After 2 seconds:
After 2 seconds:
Return to Step 3.
ENTER NAME
ENTER GROUP NUMBER
OR PRESS
GROUP NBR=
0001
+
+
+
GROUP NAME =(MAX20)
COLORADO GRP
[BACK]:TO PREVIOUS
[STOP]:TO COMPLETE
ENTER ABB. NBR OR OT
[ENTER]:TO COMPLETE
The current Group Name is dis-
played.
Return to Step 3.
Skip to Step 5.
GROUP NBR= 0001
ABB. NBR=
118
DENVER OFFICE
After 2 seconds:
GROUP NBR=
ABB. NBR=
0001
118
ENTER ABB. NBR OR OT
[ENTER] TO COMPLETE
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Group Number Registration - continued
7a Cancel the Group 7b Retain the Group
8
9
Enter a Remote
Station - continued
Complete Group
Station Entries
Assign a One Touch
Key
6
Number Setting
Number Setting
Repeat this step until all of the
required remote station ad-
dresses are entered. Then go to
Step 8.
To delete the existing remote To retain this remote station in
When all the stations necessary To assign this group to a One
for this group are entered in Touch key, press the desired
station from this group, press:
this group, press:
Step 6, press:
One Touch key.
Example: One Touch key 35.
(to CANCEL)
(to RETAIN)
GROUP NBR=
NOTE:
•
When the entered Abbrevi-
ated Dial Number or One
Touch key has not been pre-
registered with a facsimile
number, the display shows
the message “NUMBER
NOT LISTED.” Then returns
to Step 5.
GROUP NBR=
0001
118
0001
GROUP NBR=
PRESS ONE TOUCH KEY
TO ENTER OR
0001
GROUP NBR=
0001
35
ONE TOUCH KEY=
COLORADO GRP
REGISTERED
ABB. NBR=
CANCELLED
ENTER ABB. NBR OR OT
[ENTER]:TO COMPLETE
[ENTER]:TO SKIP
After 2 seconds:
After 2 seconds:
Return to Step 6.
GROUP NBR=
0001
ENTER GROUP NUMBER
•
When the entered Abbrevi-
ated Dial Number or One
Touch key is already as-
signed in this group, the dis-
play shows the screens be-
low.
OR PRESS
[BACK]:TO PREVIOUS
[STOP]:TO COMPLETE
ENTER ABB. NBR OR OT
[ENTER]:TO COMPLETE
Returns to Step 3.
Return to Step 6.
Press
to display the pre-
GROUP NBR=
ALREADY ASSIGNED
ABB. NBR=
0001
118
ceding-level screen in Menu
Screen mode.
DENVER OFFICE
Or,
After 2 seconds:
ABB. NBR=
CANCEL ?
1.CANCEL
2.RETAIN
118
press
to complete the
Group Setting operation and re-
turn to the Standby Mode.
Go to Step 7a or Step 7b.
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Group Number Registration - continued
Assign a One Touch Key - continued
9
To skip assigning this group to a
One Touch key, press:
If the selected One Touch key To RETAIN, press:
is already linked to or registered
with any data, the following is
displayed.
ONE TOUCH=
ALREADY ASSIGNED
ABB. NBR=
01
GROUP NBR=
PRESS ONE TOUCH KEY
TO ENTER OR
0001
ENTER GROUP NUMBER
OR PRESS
[BACK]:TO PREVIOUS
[STOP]:TO COMPLETE
003
SMITH’S OFFICE
[ENTER]:TO SKIP
After 2 seconds:
Returns to Step 9.
Return to Step 3.
ONE TOUCH=
CANCEL ?
1.CANCEL
2.RETAIN
01
Press
to display the pre-
ceding-level screen in Menu
Screen mode.
To select “1.CANCEL” (to can-
cel the existing link or preset
data of this One Touch key),
press:
Press
to complete the
Group Setting operation and re-
turn to the Standby Mode.
GROUP NBR=
0001
PRESS ONE TOUCH KEY
TO ENTER OR
[ENTER]:TO SKIP
Returns to Step 9.
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
- TRANSMIT CONFIGURATION
Document Specifications
Caution:
If the documents are any of the following, they should be copied to plain paper
before transmitting.
The following table shows the specifications for original documents that can be used
with the facsimile.
Single Sheet
Multiple Sheets
•
•
•
•
Torn, wrinkled, or damp pages
Folded pages or pages with holes
Transparent pages or pages with a smooth, shiny finish
Cloth or metal sheets
216mm(W) x 1000mm(L)
[8.5 in.(W) x 39.37 in.(L)]
Max.
Min.
Document
Size
When using originals with the following specifications, use a carrier sheet to avoid
document jams or misfeeds. When using carrier sheets, only one sheet can be
sent at a time.
148mm(W) x 100mm(L)
[5.83 in.(W) x 3.94 in.(L)]
Effective Scanning
Width
214mm
[8.4 in.]
•
•
Smaller than minimum size.
With thickness less than 0.05 mm.
To use a carrier sheet, lift the clear cover, place a single document sheet face-up
on the paper sheet. Purchase carrier sheets from your TOSHIBA facsimile dealer
or use a transparency with a paper backing attached at the lead edge.
Max. Capacity of
Document Tray
Up to 20 sheets (Legal Size)
Up to 50 sheets (Letter Size)
Thickness of
Document
0.05 to 0.15 mm
[0.002 to 0.0059 in.]
0.06 to 0.12 mm
[0.0025 to 0.0047 in.]
Type of Paper
Uncoated on both sides
NOTES:
•
Operator assistance may be required for pages longer than 420mm (16.5
inches).
•
•
For multiple sheets, the documents must be the same size and paper type.
A small border region of each document is not imaged when each document is
scanned. The effective scanning area is as shown in the figure below.
216 mm (8.5 inches)
Max. 4 mm (0.16 inches)
Effective
Scanning
Area
Letter/Legal Size
Max. 2.5 mm (0.1 inches)
214 mm (8.4 inches)
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Document Loading
Remove Attached
Items
Place Document Pages on the Document Tray
Adjust the Settings
1
2
3
After the facsimile pulls the
document into the scan position
slightly and stops, you may
change the resolution and con-
trast settings. (It may also be
changed before or during the
document loading.)
About 45°
Document Face Side
073
074
110
To cancel a document already
set and pulled in, press:
Remove any staples, paper
clips, or other items from your
document before feeding it into
the facsimile.
Up to 50 sheets (Letter-size) Adjust the Document Guides to
can be loaded and sent at a fit the width of the document.
time.
Load the document face down
Stagger the leading edges of on the document tray. The first
the sheets slightly and insert page of your document should
When scanning Legal-size doc-
uments, extend the Exit Docu-
ment Tray Extension.
them into the document feeder.
be at the bottom of the Docu-
ment Tray.
If your document is extremely
dark or light, or if it contains
photographs, you may wish to
adjust the contrast and resolu-
tion settings. See the following
pages.
Gently insert the leading edge of
the paper into the facsimile as
shown. The facsimile waits 2
seconds, then pulls the docu-
ment into the scanning area and
stops.
When a Carrier Sheet is used,
documents must be sent one
page at a time (manually fed).
When the document sheet is
longer the Document Tray, as-
sist it with your hand to insure
proper feeding.
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scan Resolution Setting
The scan resolution can be set
to one of the following five
modes based on the type of im-
age you are scanning.
Press
until the required resolution mode is
indicated by the appropriate LED.
The scan resolution is normally
set to the default setting. When
you change the resolution, the
facsimile will return to the de-
fault setting after each transac-
tion. To change the default reso-
lution setting, see page 64.
: illuminated
: extinguished
The mode changes as follows:
(
)
FINE
U-FINE
HALFTONE
Standard Mode (when all the lamps are extinguished)
FINE
STANDARD
U-FINE
HALFTONE
Fine Mode
For sending normal text and
graphics.
FINE
FINE
U-FINE
HALFTONE
Ultra-Fine Mode
For sending normal text and
graphics with extra clarity.
Each corresponding
lamp is illuminated.
U-FINE (Ultra-Fine)
FINE
For sending fine text and
graphics with extra clarity.
U-FINE
HALFTONE
Fine Halftone Mode
FINE HALFTONE
FINE
For detailed photos or docu-
ments with colors or shading.
U-FINE
HALFTONE
Ultra-Fine Halftone Mode
U-FINE HALFTONE
(Ultra-Fine Halftone)
For very detailed photos or
documents with colors or
shading.
*
When Ultra-Fine is selected, the DF120F/DP125F will scan all
documents at 406 dots/inch horizontal x 391 lines/inch vertical.
Depending on the capabilities of the remote facsimile receiving
this document, the document may be transmitted by the DF120F/
DP125F at Ultra-Fine resolution (406 dots/inch horizontal x 391
lines/inche vertical) or it may be transmitted at Super Fine (203
dots/inch horizontal x 391 lines/inch vertical).
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contrast Setting
The Contrast Setting adjusts the
print darkness of the document
to be read.
Display the SET
CONTRAST Menu
Select the Contrast
1
2
The contrast can be set to one
of the following settings. The
facsimile will return to the de-
fault setting after each transac-
tion.
Turn the Flip Panel to the “50- Select the desired Contrast
73” view to select the desired level.
Function Key.
To select NORMAL, press:
Press:
To change the default contrast
setting, see page 64.
NORMAL
To select DARKER, press:
For standard originals.
SET CONTRAST
1.NORMAL
2.DARKER
DARKER
To darken light originals (i.e.,
for documents with light or
faint print).
3.LIGHTER
To select LIGHTER, press:
LIGHTER
To lighten the dark originals
(i.e., for documents with dark
print or shaded areas).
Your contrast setting is now set.
You may continue with your di-
aling sequence to send the
document.
COMM. RESERVATION
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Default Setting for Memory Transmission
Memory Transmission allows
your facsimile to quickly scan
documents to memory and re-
Display the Default
Setting Menu
Display the
MEMORY TX Menu
Select the Transmis-
sion Mode
1
2
3
turn them to you. You do not
have to wait for the transmission
Press:
Press:
Select the desired transmission
mode.
to be completed. This increases
productivity as others do not
have to wait in line to send a
facsimile. Each time you send a
facsimile with memory transmis-
sion, the amount of residual
memory will be reduced.
To set Memory Transmission to
ON, press:
+
+
+
To set Memory Transmission to
OFF, press:
Additionally, each time you send
a memory transmission, a com-
munication reservation or File
Number is assigned.
When Memory Transmission is
not selected, the Direct Docu-
ment Transmission (tray) mode
is active by default setting. This
allows your facsimile to function
without the use of document
memory.
01.MEMORY TX
SET MEMORY TX
1.ON
2.OFF
OPERATION COMPLETED
02.SECURITY TX
03.COVER SHEET
04.RECOVERY TX
↓
05.TTI
06.SEND AFTER SCAN
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Send After Scan Default Setting
This feature enables you to de-
Display the SEND
AFTER SCAN Menu
Select the Send
After Scan Option
Select the Memory
Full Option
Select Another
SETUP Item, or ...
termine whether dialing starts
while the machine is scanning
the documents or after the ma-
chine has scanned all docu-
ments in the Memory Send
mode.
If dialing after scanning is se-
lected, you can select to delete
or send the scanned pages
should the memory become full
during scanning.
1
2
3
4
Press:
Select the desired Send After Select the desired Memory Full After completing this Setting,
Scan Option.
Option.
you may continue to select other
settings referring to their associ-
To disable Send After Scan, To delete the pages being ated pages for instructions, or
press:
+
+
+
+
scanned, press:
press
The following is displayed for 2 To send the pages scanned to
seconds.
memory, press:
to exit the Setting mode and re-
turn to the Standby Mode.
OPERATION COMPLETED
OPERATION COMPLETED
Go to Step 4.
To enable Send After Scan,
press:
SEND AFTER SCAN
1.DIAL DURING SCAN
2.DIAL AFTER SCAN
Go to Step 3.
WHEN MEMORY FULL
1.DELETE SCAN PAGES
2.SEND SCAN PAGES
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Default Setting for Security Transmission
This function allows transmis-
sions only when the number you
Display the Default
Setting Menu
Display the
SECURITY TX Menu
Select the Desired
Option
1
2
3
dial matches the number pro-
grammed in the remote facsimi-
le. If the numbers do not match,
Security Transmission prevents
your facsimile from sending by
indicating a transmission error.
Press:
Press:
Select the desired option.
To set Security Transmission to
ON, press:
+
+
+
To set Security Transmission to
OFF, press:
01.MEMORY TX
SET SECURITY TX
1.ON
2.OFF
OPERATION COMPLETED
02.SECURITY TX
03.COVER SHEET
04.RECOVERY TX
↓
05.TTI
06.SEND AFTER SCAN
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
- COPYING
Paper Size for Copying
You can utilize the DP120F/DP125F as a convenient copier to make collated copies of
original documents. The following are key points when making copies.
At the time of copying, the COLLATE function may be selected. This function will sort
multiple page copies into sets of correct-order pages.
Recording Paper Size
Output Examples of Printed Copies
The paper sizes usable with your fax unit are limited to Letter or Legal size. The
received document is recorded (printed) within the Effective Recording Area of the
paper.
With COLLATE Function ON
With COLLATE Function OFF
Paper Size
Letter: mm
A
B
C
D
Effective
Recording
Area
216 209 273 279
Page 1
Page 1
Page 1
Page 2
Page 2
Page 2
Page 3
Page 3
Page 3
Page 3
Page 2
Page 1
Page 3
Page 2
Page 1
Page 3
Page 2
Page 1
C D
inches 8.5 8.2 10.7 11.0
Legal: mm 216 209 350 356
inches
8.2 13.8 14.0
B
A
8.5
NOTES:
•
When AUTO is selected as the Paper Tray setting, you cannot select AUTO for
Reduction setting.
•
When AUTO is selected as the Paper Tray setting, the paper is not supplied
from the tray specified for Letter Head Paper or Separator Page. However, you
can select a tray manually by selecting the Paper Tray.
NOTES:
NOTES:
•
The pages are automatically col-
lated.
•
Collating is the responsibility of
the operator.
•
The following copy resolutions are available:
FINE
U-FINE
FINE+HALFTONE
U-FINE+HALFTONE
•
Requires enough memory for the
entire multi-page document. If
there is not enough memory
(memory overflow), the copying
procedure will be canceled.
•
Memory requirements are limited
to one page at a time.
•
Collation is slower than non-colla-
tion because the entire document
must be scanned into memory
first, then printing can occur.
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying Procedure
Load the Document
Press the COPY Key
Enter the Number of
Copies
Select the Paper Tray and Paper Size
1
2
3
4
Load the document face down
in the Document Tray (see page
88).
Display the COPY menu by Select the number of copies
Use the Following keys to move If you select the Bypass Tray,
to the second row to select the following is displayed.
paper tray.
pressing:
(max. 99).
THICK PAPER
ON
OFF
Adjust the resolution and con-
trast if desired (see page 89).
or
AUTO
MAY-17-00 WED11:49
1st Row:
TRAY 1 :LT
TRAY 2 :LT
TRAY 3 :LG
Enter the number of copies
If the thick paper is loaded in the
Bypass Tray, select ON by
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
required. If no entry is made,
the number of copies will au-
tomatically be set to “1.”
or
, and then
Bypass :A4
2nd Row
To not select the Copy Options,
go to Step 7.
Selectable Paper Trays and
their paper size are displayed.
You may select the paper tray
and paper size of your copies
using the following keys.
press
.
NOTES:
Displays the Recording Pa-
per Tray to supply the paper
for the copy function.
•
When AUTO is selected
as the Paper Tray setting,
you cannot select AUTO
for Reduction setting.
Example:
To select the Copy Options, go
to Step 4.
Tray 1:LT is selected.
3rd Row
Displays the reduction ratio
for copying.
COPIES=(1-99)
1
•
When AUTO is selected
as the Paper Tray setting,
the paper is not supplied
from the tray specified for
Letter Head Paper or
Separator Page. How-
ever, you can select a
tray manually by select-
ing the Paper Tray.
or
PAPER
REDUCT 100%
COLLATE ON OFF
TRAY 1 :LT
4th
NOTE:
Collate function (see page
94).
The Bypass Tray is dis-
played only when it is set for
LT, LG, or A4 size.
Then press:
COPIES=(1-99)
PAPER AUTO
1
REDUCT 100%
COLLATE ON
OFF
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying Procedure - continued
Select the Reduction
Option
Select the Collating
Option
Press the START
Key
5
6
7
Use the following keys to move
to the third row to select the Re-
duction option.
Use the following keys to select When all settings are complete,
the Collate option ON or OFF.
press:
or
or
Example:
100%
AUTO
86 %
75 %
COLLATE ON is selected.
NOTE:
If the Collate option is se-
lected, the document will be
scanned into memory first.
COPIES=(1-99)
1
PAPER
TRAY 1 :LT
50 %
REDUCT 86 %
COLLATE ON
Use the following keys to select
the desired Reduction option,
100%, AUTO, 86%, 75% or
50%.
OFF
COPYING
PAPER
REDUCT 86 %
COPIES PAGES 01
TRAY 1 :LT
or
NOTE:
If AUTO is selected for Pa-
per Tray in Step 2, you can-
not select AUTO for Reduc-
tion.
Then press:
Example:
86% reduction is selected.
COPIES=(1-99)
1
PAPER
TRAY 1 :LT
REDUCT 86 %
COLLATE ON
OFF
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
- DIALING METHODS
Your TOSHIBA facsimile pro-
vides various dialing methods.
One Touch Key Dialing
If you have programmed a re-
mote party’s facsimile number
to a One Touch key, you can
dial that number by pressing the
corresponding One Touch key.
One Touch Dialing
One Touch Key Dialing
1
Dials remote locations with
the touch of a single key.
See page 77 for program-
ming.
Select the desired One Touch
key from 01 to 73 (see page 77
for programming).
MAY-17-00 WED11:49
RESIDUAL MEMORY 99%
The document must be loaded
and the resolution and contrast
settings set before a transmis-
sion using One Touch Key dial-
ing.
Abbreviated Dialing
Dials remote locations using
an abbreviated dial number
from 001 to 999. See page
70 for programming.
Example: One Touch key 01
During transmission
NOTES:
Alphabet Dialing
•
If a One Touch key is not
programmed, the mes-
sage “NUMBER NOT
LISTED” is displayed for
The One Touch key number and
the name of the party appear on
the LCD display for about 2 sec-
onds.
Allows location selection us-
ing an alphabetic index
search of the Location IDs
programmed into One Touch
and Abbreviated Dialing Di-
rectories.
2
seconds, an alarm
buzzer sounds and the
display returns to the pre-
vious status screen.
Your facsimile will automatically
start scanning the document
into memory (if enabled). While
scanning, the facsimile dials,
connects, and starts transmis-
sion.
Keypad Dialing
Accepts unregistered tele-
phone number entry directly
from the operation panel.
COMM. RESERVATION
ONE TOUCH=
NUMBER NOT LISTED
01
COMM. RESERVATION
See other dialing related func-
tions on the following pages:
ONE TOUCH=
L.A. OFFICE
01
•
When an incorrect One
Touch key has been se-
Multi-Key Dialing page 124
Displayed for 2 seconds
Chain Dialing
Redialing
page 166
page 110
lected, press
im-
SCANNING TO MEMORY
Monitor &
Handset Dialing
pages 106
and 107
FILE NBR =
089
RESIDUAL MEMORY 99%
mediately to cancel the
transmission.
Setting Redial
Interval & Counter
page 67
During scan to memory
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Abbreviated Dialing
Once an Abbreviated Dial Num-
ber is programmed with a valid
remote facsimile location, that
location can be accessed by re-
calling the corresponding Abbre-
viated Dial Number.
Press the SPEED
DIAL Key
Enter the
Abbreviated Number
Press the START Key Tray
1
2
3
Press:
When the correct number is dis-
played, press:
Enter the Abbreviated Dial
Number (1 to 999) assigned to
the desired party.
MAY-17-00 WED11:49
RESIDUAL MEMORY 99%
The document must be loaded
and the resolution and contrast
set before a transmission using
Abbreviated Dialing (see page
89).
+
During transmission
The One Touch key or Abbrevi-
ated Dial Number and the name
of the party will appear on the
LCD display for about 2 sec-
onds.
NOTE:
When the number entered
(within the range of 1 through
999) is not preprogrammed
with a specific party’s fac-
simile or telephone number,
the message “NUMBER NOT
LISTED” is displayed for 2
seconds and then the fac-
simile returns to the screen in
Step 1.
NOTE:
Your facsimile will automatically
start scanning the document into
memory (if enabled). While
scanning, the facsimile dials,
connects, and starts the trans-
mission.
ABB. NUMBER =(1-999)
When an incorrect number is
entered, use
to delete
preceding digits, or press
once to start over
ABB. NBR=
LONDON OFFICE
10
ABB. NBR=
NUMBER NOT LISTED
10
from the beginning.
Displayed for 2 seconds
Displayed for 2 second
Example of Abbreviated Dial
Number, 10:
COMM. RESERVATION
SCANNING TO MEMORY
FILE NBR =
091
ABB. NUMBER =(1-999)
10
RESIDUAL MEMORY 99%
During scan to memory
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alphabet Dialing
“Alphabet Dialing” is used to dial
the desired party by searching
for the name of the registered
Location ID name in the Abbre-
viated Dial, One Touch Dial and
Group Dial List.
Press the START
Key
Press the SPEED
DIAL Key
3
1
2 Display the Name of the Desired Remote
Party
Once the desired name is dis-
played, press:
Select the “keyboard” view on
the Flip Panel.
Press:
Use the following keys to select
the “LONDON OFFICE.”
The document must be loaded
and the resolution and contrast
set before a transmission using
Alphabet Dialing (see page 89).
Press the key on the keyboard
which corresponds to the first
letter of the name.
or
+
ENTER SEARCH NAME:
LONDON OFFICE
The One Touch key or Abbrevi-
ated Dial Number and the name
of the party appear on the LCD
display for about 2 seconds.
Example:To find the location
named
“LONDON
ENTER SEARCH NAME:
NAME=(MAX20)
[↑↓]
00003/00003
OFFICE”:
Press
Your facsimile will automatically
start scanning the document
into memory (if enabled). While
scanning, the facsimile dials,
connects, and starts transmis-
sion.
or
+
Then, press
to display
ABB. NBR=
LONDON OFFICE
002
the screen for names beginning
with “L.”
Displayed for 2 seconds
ENTER SEARCH NAME:
L.A. OFFICE
SCANNING TO MEMORY
FILE NBR = 091
RESIDUAL MEMORY 99%
SCANNING PAGE : XXX
[↑↓]
00001/00003
NOTE:
During scan to memory
More than one character can
be entered for search.
MAY-17-00 WED11:49
RESIDUAL MEMORY 99%
During transmission
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keypad Dialing
If you have not preset the tele-
phone number of the destination
facsimile to an Abbreviated Dial
Number or One Touch key, you
can dial your destination by en-
tering the number from the Dial
Keypad.
Enter the Facsimile
Number
Press the START
Key
1
2
Enter the facsimile number of
the desired party.
When the correct number is dis-
played, press:
The document must be loaded
and the resolution and contrast
set before a transmission using
Keypad Dialing. (See page 89.)
Your facsimile will automatically
start scanning the document
into memory (if enabled). While
scanning, the facsimile will dials,
connects, and starts transmis-
sion.
NOTE:
When an incorrect number is
SCANNING TO MEMORY
FILE NBR =
RESIDUAL MEMORY 99%
093
entered, use
to delete
preceding digits, or press
During scan to memory
once to start over
from the beginning.
MAY-17-00 WED11:49
RESIDUAL MEMORY 99%
Example with 012345678 en-
tered:
During transmission
COMM. RESERVATION
TEL NUMBER =(MAX128)
012345678
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
- TRANSMITTING
Memory Transmission
A Memory Transmission first scans and stores the document into memory prior to a
transmission to a remote facsimile(s).
File Number and Residual Memory
•
FILE NUMBERS
The facsimile assigns a File Number to each transmission or polling-reception
job for internal control of reserved communications.
Memory Transmission is automatically initiated with any of the following dialing meth-
ods.
This File Number is very useful should it become necessary to cancel
a
• One Touch Dialing
• Abbreviated Dialing
• Alphabet Dialing
• Keypad Dialing
(See page 97)
(See page 98)
(See page 99)
(See page 100)
memory operation. It is also useful when tracking communication activities
using the transmission and reception journals (see page 205).
•
RESIDUAL MEMORY
The amount of memory remaining for memory transmission usage is called
Residual Memory and is displayed as a percentage value.
You may reserve a transmission even when other Memory Communications are
under way.
In effort to minimize Memory Full conditions, this facsimile is equipped with
TOSHIBA’s Memory Release. Once scanning a document is started, the facsimile will
dial, connect and start transmission to the remote location. In the event the Memory
becomes full, Memory Release will hold originals in the ADF until the pages already
stored into memory are successfully transmitted. As each page is successfully trans-
mitted, the Memory for subsequent pages will be released and the next page is
scanned.
File Number and Residual Memory Display Example:
SCANNING INTO MEMORY
File No.
FILE NBR =
123
RESIDUAL MEMORY 70%
Residual Memory
If a connection is not established during the scanning procedure, Memory Release will
be disabled (see NOTES).
NOTES:
To bypass Memory Transmission, see page 103 on Direct Document Transmission.
1. If there is not enough Residual Memory or the MAY-17-00 WED11:49
Job queue it at full capacity, a Memory Full
MEMORY OVERFLOW
status may occur. If this occurs during scanning
a document for transmission, the facsimile dis-
plays MEMORY OVERFLOW.
2. If this message is displayed, press
to cancel the Memory Transmission.
The Memory Overflow message will be reset and the document will be ejected.
3. Wait until memory becomes available (i.e., after some reserved jobs are com-
pleted), and retry the job later or use a Direct Document Transmission (see
page 103).
4. A maximum of 100 transmissions can be reserved for Memory Transmissions
(including Polling Reception reservations and mailboxes). Any transmission at-
tempted thereafter will result in a direct transmission from the ADF.
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Transmission - continued
Memory Transmission Procedure
Load the Document
Dial the Facsimile
Number
Start Scanning
Return to the
Standby Mode
1
2
3
4
Load the document face down
in the Document Tray (see page
88).
The facsimile starts scanning
and storing the document into
memory.
Dial the facsimile number of the
remote party using any of the
four dialing methods.
When the document scanning is
complete, the facsimile returns
to the Standby Mode.
Adjust the resolution and con-
trast if desired (see page 89).
A File Number is assigned.
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing
... See page 97
MAY-17-00 WED11:49
RESIDUAL MEMORY 97%
Residual Memory will decrease
as the document is scanned.
Abbreviated Dialing
... See page 98
MAY-17-00 WED11:49
Alphabet Dialing
... See page 99
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
Keypad Dialing
... See page 100
•
Press
to cancel the
transmission operation.
SCANNING INTO MEMORY
•
Press
if a dialing er-
FILE NBR =
108
RESIDUAL MEMORY 97%
ror occurs.
Example of screen displayed
while a number is entered by
Keypad Dialing:
COMM. RESERVATION
TEL NUMBER =(MAX128)
0559761234
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Direct Transmission
Direct Transmission is used if
there is not enough residual
memory or when a large num-
ber of document pages are to
be sent, etc.
Direct Transmission as Default Setting
Load the Document
Dial the Facsimile
Number
Start Dialing
Connect the Line to
the Remote Party
1
2
3
4
This mode is also useful if the
operator wishes to visually con-
firm the actual transmission of
the document to the remote par-
ty.
This procedure will discuss Di-
rect Transmission when se-
lected as the default setting or
when Residual Memory has
been depleted.
Once the facsimile number is
entered, the dialing starts.
Once connected to the destina-
tion facsimile, the screen below
is displayed.
Dial the facsimile number of the
remote party using any of the
four dialing methods.
The documents will remain in
the ADF and be transmitted one
by one.
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing
... See page 97
DIALING
FILE NBR =
COMMUNICATING
025
FILE NBR =
025
Load the document face down
in the Document Tray (see
page 88).
Abbreviated Dialing
... See page 98
0559761234
0559761234
Alphabet Dialing
... See page 99
The remote party Terminal ID
will be displayed as shown be-
low.
If the destination facsimile is
busy, the screen below is dis-
played.
Adjust the resolution and con-
trast if desired (see page 89).
Keypad Dialing
... See page 100
MAY-17-00 WED11:49
WAITING TO REDIAL
COMMUNICATING
FILE NBR =
025
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
•
Press
if a dialing er-
+81 559 761234
ror occurs.
Example of screen displayed
when Residual Memory has
been depleted:
If the redial procedure is com-
pleted without success, the
screen below is displayed and
this transmission job is can-
celled.
Example of screen displayed
while a number is entered using
Keypad Dialing:
MAY-17-00 WED11:49
COMM. RESERVATION
MAY-17-00 WED11:59
LINE BUSY
RESIDUAL MEMORY 0%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
TEL NUMBER =(MAX128)
0559761234
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Direct Transmission - continued
Direct Transmission as Default Setting - continued
Send the Document
Complete the
Transmission
5
6
The transmission starts as the
document is scanned.
When the communication is
complete, LINE lamp turns off
and the facsimile returns to the
Standby Mode.
The page number being sent is
displayed on the 1st row.
The type of communication and
transmission speed is displayed
on the 3rd row.
MAY-17-00 WED11:54
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
TRANSMIT P001
FILE NBR =
025
EX 14400BPS
+81 559 761234
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Direct Transmission - continued
Temporary Direct Transmission
Even if the Memory Transmis-
sion Mode is selected as the de-
fault, you may desire to transmit
Load the Document
Change the
Transmission Mode
Select YES
Dial the Facsimile
Number
1
2
3
4
a
specific document directly
from the Automatic Document
Feeder.
Load the document face down
in the Document Tray (see page
88).
Turn the Flip Panel to the “50-
73” view to select the desired
Function Key.
Select “1. YES” by pressing:
Dial the facsimile number of the
remote party using any of the
four dialing methods.
This is useful when the docu-
ment consists of many pages or
when the residual memory is too
small to store the document
data.
Adjust the resolution and con-
trast if desired (see page 89).
Press:
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing
... See page 97
Abbreviated Dialing
... See page 98
MAY-17-00 WED11:49
DIRECT TRANSMIT
1.YES
2.NO
COMM. RESERVATION
Alphabet Dialing
... See page 99
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
Keypad Dialing
... See page 100
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Direct Transmission - continued
On-hook Transmission (Monitor Speaker Dialing)
You can send your documents
Load the Document
Press the MONITOR
Key
Dial the Facsimile
Number
Press the START
Key
with On-hook Dialing using the
monitor speaker to confirm the
answering tone from the remote
party’s facsimile.
1
2
3
4
Load the document face down
in the Document Tray (see page
88).
Press:
Dial the facsimile number of the
remote party using any of the
four dialing methods.
When you hear the answering
tone, press
. If
Adjust the resolution and con-
trast if desired (see page 89).
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing
... See page 97
The facsimile is connected to
the telephone line and the dial
tone is heard through the speak-
er.
an operator answers the phone,
pick up the handset (if
equipped) and inform the re-
mote party that you wish to send
a document.
Abbreviated Dialing
... See page 98
Alphabet Dialing
... See page 99
ON HOOK
MAY-17-00 WED11:49
Upon hearing the facsimile tone,
press:
TEL NUMBER=
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
Keypad Dialing
... See page 100
NOTE:
If an incorrect number is di-
When the transmission is com-
pleted, the facsimile returns to
the Standby Mode.
aled, press
and fol-
low the instruction displayed
on the LCD display to start
the operation over.
MAY-17-00 WED11:54
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
Example of screen displayed
while a number is entered using
Keypad Dialing:
ON HOOK
TEL NUMBER=
0559761234
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Direct Transmission - continued
Off-hook Transmission (Optional Handset Dialing)
This procedure may be useful
when you want to talk with a
remote party using the optional
handset of the facsimile before
Load the Document
Pick Up the Handset
(Optional)
Dial the Facsimile Number
1
2
3
sending a document.
Load the document face down
in the Document Tray (see
page 88).
Pick up the handset of the fac-
simile.
Dial the facsimile number of the Example of screen displayed
remote party using any of the while a number is entered using
four dialing methods.
Keypad Dialing:
The unit is connected to the
telephone line and you hear the
dial tone through the speaker of
the handset.
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing
... See page 97
Adjust the resolution and con-
trast if desired (see page 89).
OFF HOOK
Abbreviated Dialing
... See page 98
TEL NUMBER=
0559761234
Alphabet Dialing
... See page 99
MAY-17-00 WED11:49
OFF HOOK
Keypad Dialing
... See page 100
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
TEL NUMBER=
NOTES:
•
To use the Keypad Dial-
ing procedure on page
84, do not press the final
in this step.
•
If an incorrect number is
dialed, press
and
follow the instruction dis-
played on the LCD dis-
play to start the operation
over.
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Direct Transmission - continued
Off-hook Transmission (Optional Handset Dialing) - continued
Press the START
Key
4
When you hear the answering
tone, press
. If
the remote party answers the
phone, you can inform the re-
mote party that you wish to send
a document.
Upon hearing the facsimile tone,
press:
Then replace the handset.
When the transmission is com-
pleted, the facsimile returns to
the Standby Mode.
MAY-17-00 WED11:54
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Direct Transmission - continued
External Off-hook Transmission (Transmission Using an External Telephone)
This procedure may be useful
Load the Document
Pick Up the Handset of
the External Telephone
Dial on the External
Telephone
Press The START
Key
when you want to talk with a re-
mote party before sending a
document. A telephone set must
be connected to the “TEL” con-
nector. (This telephone set is
called the “External Telephone”
in this manual.)
1
2
3
4
Load the document face down
in the Document Tray (see
page 88).
Dial the facsimile number of the
remote party using the keypad
of the External Telephone.
When you hear the answering
Pick up the handset of the Ex-
ternal Telephone connected to
the “TEL” connector of the fac-
simile.
tone, press
on
Adjust the resolution and con-
trast if desired (see page 89).
The entered number is immedi-
ately dialed. The number is not
displayed on the facsimile’s
LCD display.
The External Telephone is con-
nected to the telephone line via
the facsimile, and the dial tone
is heard through the speaker of
the External Telephone.
the facsimile. If the remote
party answers the phone, you
can inform the remote party that
you wish to send a document.
NOTE:
MAY-17-00 WED11:49
When the External Tele-
phone is in the off-hook sta-
tus (i.e. while “EXTERNAL
OFF HOOK” is displayed),
the Dial Keypad on the fac-
simile does not accept any
key entry.
Upon hearing the facsimile
tone, press:
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
The display on the facsimile
shows
“EXTERNAL
OFF
HOOK” on the top row of the
LCD display.
EXTERNAL OFF HOOK
Then replace the handset of the
External Telephone.
When the transmission is com-
pleted, the facsimile returns to
the Standby Mode.
MAY-17-00 WED11:54
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Redialing
Automatic Redialing
Manual Redialing Direct Transmission
When the line of the remote
party is busy, the facsimile will
automatically redial the remote
party up to the set number of
times with intervals of the set
length (see page 67).
This function enables you to re-
Press the MONITOR
Key
Press the REDIAL
Key
Redial the Remote
Party
dial the number last dialed us-
ing this facsimile to transmit a
document.
1
2
3
Press:
To enter the On-hook Dialing
(Monitor Speaker Dialing) mode,
press:
When you hear the answering
WARNING:
If the line is not connected after
the set number of redialing at-
tempts, the facsimile will record
a LINE BUSY error.
tone, press
. If
If you press
, the fac-
The last number dialed is dis-
played. The display varies de-
pending on the dialing method
used.
the remote party answers the
phone, pick up the handset (op-
tional). Inform the remote party
that you wish to send a docu-
ment.
simile will clear the facsimile
number registered and lose
the manual redial capability.
Confirm the facsimile number of
the remote party and repeat the
transmission procedure.
ON HOOK
TEL NUMBER=
The displayed number is imme-
diately redialed.
NOTE:
Upon hearing the facsimile
tone, press:
This feature will not function
with numbers dialed using
an external telephone.
ON HOOK
TEL NUMBER=
0559761234
When the transmission is com-
pleted, the facsimile returns to
the Standby Mode.
If no number is registered as a
redial number, the screen below
is displayed for 2 seconds, then
returns to Step 1.
ON HOOK
MAY-17-00 WED11:49
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
NUMBER NOT LISTED
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Redialing - continued
Manual Redialing Jobs in Memory
This function enables you to
Press the REDIAL
Key
Select the Job to be Redialed
Start Redialing
transmit a document after select-
ing it from the jobs reserved in
memory waiting to be redialed.
1
2
3
Press:
Wait 5 seconds or press any
key on the Operation Panel ex-
When the desired job is dis-
played, press:
NOTE:
If you are using Department
Codes, the initiating Depart-
ment Code must match for
this operation to work.
SINGLE TRANSMIT
L.A. OFFICE
MAY-17-00 13:53
FILE NBR =121
cept
to display the
REDIAL
[ENTER]:START
screen on the right.
Screen Index:
[ ]:PREVIOUS SCREEN
The facsimile starts to dial the
number for a transmission.
↑
[ ]:NEXT SCREEN
↓
MAY-17-00 WED14:05
RESIDUAL MEMORY 75%
SINGLE TRANSMIT
SEATTLE FACTORY
MAY-17-00 13:56
FILE NBR =123
1st line ... Type of job
•
If there are no jobs to be
redialed, the screen below is
2nd line ... Destination of
redialing
displayed for
2
seconds,
3rd line ... Date & Time of
job accepted
then the facsimile returns to
the Standby Mode.
4th line ... File Number
REDIAL
SINGLE TRANSMIT
L.A. OFFICE
MAY-17-00 14:03
FILE NBR =124
Locate the screen of the desired
job using the following scroll
keys.
NUMBER NOT LISTED
(for the previous screen)
(for the next screen)
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
- RECEIVING
Automatic
Manual
Selecting the
Receiving Mode
Receiving Mode
Receiving Mode
“Auto Reception” is the ability of “Manual Reception” allows you The Automatic Receiving Mode
the facsimile to receive docu- to use the facsimile as a tele- (AUTO RECEIVE) is normally
ments sent to your facsimile au- phone (talking function) first and selected. You can change the
tomatically.
then start a document reception receiving mode from Automatic
by pressing:
to Manual, or vice versa.
The facsimile starts to receive a
document after a pre-selected
number of rings. You can
change the ringer count (see
page 68).
Refer to Receive Mode Selec-
tion on page 68.
1. When the facsimile rings,
pick up the optional handset
and talk with the remote
party.
NOTE:
A ring delay can be selected
should you wish to speak to
the calling party before re-
ceiving a facsimile.
If you do not pick up the
handset within the selected
delay period, the facsimile
will automatically answer the
call and attempt to receive a
document.
2. If you hear the facsimile tone
through the handset instead
of operator’s voice, you may
manually initiate a facsimile
reception by pressing:
3. Replace the handset to the
cradle. The facsimile will
start receiving the document.
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording Paper Size
Reception Reduction Setting
This facsimile can use Letter and Legal size paper. The received
document is recorded (printed) within the Effective Recording Area
of the paper.
This function allows the reduc-
Display the SET RX
REDUCTION Menu
Select the Desired
Option
1
2
tion of the received image, if
the received document is
larger than the recording pa-
per.
Paper Size
Letter: mm 216 210 271 279
11.0
A
B
C
D
Press:
Select the desired option.
Effective
Recording
Area
To set RX Reduction to ON,
press:
D
C
inches 8.5 8.3 10.6
Legal: mm 216 210 348 356
inches 8.5
14.0
+
+
+
+
8.3 13.7
B
A
To set RX Reduction to OFF,
press:
NOTES:
•
If the received document is equal to or shorter than the re-
cording area of the paper, the received document is printed at
its actual size.
•
If the received document is larger than the recording area of
the paper, it will be vertically reduced to fit on the recording
paper installed. The reception will be divided onto two sheets
if the document needs to be reduced to smaller than 73% of
its original size.
OPERATION COMPLETED
Document
Recording Paper
RX REDUCTION
1.ON
2.OFF
•
•
If you desire to receive large originals without reduction or
excessive paper usage, set the ”DISCARD” function to “ON.”
If the lower part of the original exceeds the recording paper
by 13 mm or less, the image will be automatically discarded.
This predetermined dimension is a service function setting.
Contact your Toshiba dealer for the setup.
If the “RX REDUCTION” function is “OFF”, the larger original
will be recorded on two or more sheets. The top of the sec-
ond page will repeat about 5mm of the lower part of the first
page.
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reception Discard Setting
This function allows up to 13
Display the
DISCARD Menu
Select the Desired
Option
mm* of the lower portion of the
document to be discarded, if the
document is larger than the re-
cording paper.
1
2
Press:
Select the desired option.
*
To change this dimension,
contact your service repre-
sentative.
To set the DISCARD function to
ON, press:
+
+
+
+
To set the DISCARD function to
OFF, press:
DISCARD
OPERATION COMPLETED
1.ON
2.OFF
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reverse Order Printing Setting
This function receives the entire
Display the
Select the Desired
Option
facsimile document into memory
and then prints the document in
reverse order. In this way, the
pages of the document will be in
correct order.
1
2
REVERSE ORDER
PRINT Menu
Press:
Select the desired option.
To set REVERSE ORDER
PRINT to ON, Press:
+
+
+
+
To set REVERSE ORDER
PRINT to OFF, press:
REVERSE ORDER PRINT
OPERATION COMPLETED
1.ON
2.OFF
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reception Multicopy Setting
The DP120F/DP125F can print
multiple copies of the same re-
ceived document automatically.
Display the RX
MULTI COPY Menu
Select the Desired
Number of Copies
1
2
You may select REVERSE OR-
DER PRINT to collate the re-
ceived document.
Press:
Enter the desired number of
copies to be printed (01 to 99).
+
+
+
+
Press:
RX MULTI COPY
OPERATION COMPLETED
COPY NUMBER=(01-99)
01
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
- TELEPHONE HANDSET OPERATION (Optional)
If the optional handset is in-
stalled, you can make a tele-
On-hook Dialing
phone call using your DP120F/
Press the MONITOR
Key
Dial the Remote
Party
Pick Up the Handset
Replace the Handset
DP125F just like an ordinary
telephone.
1
2
3
4
Without loading any document
on the Document Tray, press:
Enter the telephone number of Pick up the handset to talk.
the remote party using any of
When you finish talking, return
the handset to the handset
cradle.
NOTE:
the following dialing methods.
If you do not pick up the
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing
... See page 97
handset within 1 minute after
dialing, the line will be auto-
matically disconnected.
The display returns to the
Standby Mode.
The message “ON HOOK” is
displayed, and you hear the dial
tone through the speaker.
Abbreviated Dialing
... See page 98
Alphabet Dialing
... See page 99
Keypad Dialing
... See page 100
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tone Output
Redialing
This function is for utilizing vari- When the number you dialed is
ous information services via the busy, or you want to redial the
Press the MONITOR
or Pick Up the
Handset
Press The REDIAL
Key
1
2
telephone.
last number you dialed, you can
recall the last number dialed us-
Even when the dial type of your
facsimile is set to DP (Dial
Pulse) type, the facsimile can
generate a TONE signal to ac-
cess information services such
as facsimile on-demand sys-
tems, voice menus, etc.
Pick up the optional telephone Press:
handset or press:
ing
.
To use redialing with voice call-
ing, you must press or
The last-dialed number or ID
name is displayed and redialing
starts immediately.
You hear the dial tone through
the speaker or the handset.
pick up the optional handset of
the facsimile first.
Once on line, generating the
TONE signal can be accom-
plished by pressing:
ON HOOK
ON HOOK
NOTE:
To prevent others from
redialing your call, press
TEL NUMBER=
TEL NUMBER=
0559761234
NOTE:
while in the on-hook
From the moment
is
or off-hook status. This will
clear the phone number reg-
ister.
pressed until the end of that
transaction or until you press
again, the touch-
tone (MF) signals will be
transmitted when you press
any key on the Dial Keypad.
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
- COMMUNICATION STATUS
Current Job Status
The job being processed can be
monitored via the LCD. You can
cancel the job if necessary.
Continue or Cancel
the Job
Press the JOB STATUS Key
Select YES or NO
2
1
3
NOTES:
In the Standby Mode, press:
Remote Station ID
Station ID returned from the re- in Step 1 displayed, you can ei-
ceiving station (if provided)
With the Line 1 or Line 2 status Press one of the following keys.
•
When no communication
job is being processed,
only the number of re-
served jobs is displayed
as below.
To cancel the job, press:
ther continue or cancel the job.
To continue, wait for the fac-
simile to return to the Standby
The following screen shows an
example of the Pending Jobs
display status when the phone
line is in use:
The status of the line in use is
displayed. (If Line 2 is in use in-
stead of Line 1, the Line 2 sta-
tus is displayed in the same for-
mat).
To continue without cancelling
the job, press:
PENDING JOBS=
x
Mode or press
.
NOTE:
While the screen above is
Whenever
is pressed,
To cancel and erase the dis-
played job, press:
CANCEL JOB TO CANCEL
LINE 1 TRANSMIT P005
FILE NBR =999
G3 14400BPS
the status of the phone line and
Pending Jobs will be displayed.
•
When no jobs are re-
served or being pro-
cessed, the screen below
is displayed for 2 sec-
onds.
TRANSMIT
A fax transmission is under way.
+81 425 85 3002
RECEIVE
A fax reception is under way.
CANCEL ?
FILE NBR =999
1.YES
displayed, pressing
again will display the Pending
Jobs screen.
Pxxx
2.NO
Page Number of the file being
processed
NO ENTRY
Pressing
PENDING JOBS=
can cancel
FILE NBR
File Number assigned to this job
x
JOB STATUS TO VIEW
JOB CANCEL TO CANCEL
G3
Communication Mode that is be-
ing used:
G3 = Standard Group 3
EC = Error Correction Mode
EX = ECM with shortened
protocol
the Pending Job.
See page 121.
xxxxxBPS
Communication speed
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display & Print Transmission Report
Communication
Journal
You can display the last 150
A Communication Journal (or
Transmission Journal and Re-
ception Journal separately) can
be issued to confirm 150 trans-
missions and 150 receptions.
Display the PREVIEW
Select the Job
Printing a Job
Status
transmissions on the LCD.
You can also print out the report
of the displayed job.
1
2
3
TX REPORT Menu
With the Standby Mode screen The last transmission job is dis- If you want to print a report of
displayed, select the direct func- played as in the screen below. the displayed job, press:
tion access view on the opera- Use your
With the Standby Mode screen
displayed, select the “50-73”
view on the Flip Panels.
tion panel.
or
Press:
Press:
keys to scroll to the desired job.
The facsimile prints a TRANS-
MISSION REPORT.
A communication journal is is-
sued. (See page 195.)
PREVIEW TX REPORT
MAY-17-00 WED12:43
[COPY]:PRINT REPORT
Previous Job Report
Screen
[ ]:PREVIOUS SCREEN
RESIDUAL MEMORY 80%
PRINTING LIST
↑
[ ]:NEXT SCREEN
↓
FILE NBR =123
REDFIELD EX
MAY-29 23:25
OK xx
Next Job Report
Screen
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
- CANCELLING A COMMUNICATION JOB
Cancelling a Direct Transmission
Cancelling a Job Reservation
Reserved jobs can be cancelled
A Document is
Being Transmitted
Press the STOP Key
Select the Desired
Option
Display the JOB
CANCEL Menu
while they remain in memory.
The following 5 types of jobs
can be cancelled using this pro-
cedure.
1
2
3
1
A screen such as the one below
is displayed while a document
is being transmitted in the Di-
rect Transmission Mode.
Press:
Select the desired option.
In the Standby Mode, press:
To cancel the transmission,
press:
1. TRANSMIT
2. RECEIVE
3. POLLING
4. POLLING RESERVE
5. JOB NUMBER
The following screen is dis-
played with the first three items
(1 to 3) indicated.
TRANSMIT P001
FILE NBR =001
EX 14400BPS
+81425867449
CANCEL ?
1.+81123456789
2.NO
To continue the transmission,
press:
JOB CANCEL
1.TRANSMIT
2.RECEIVE
3.POLLING
4.POLLING RESERVE
5.JOB NUMBER
NOTE:
The types of jobs displayed
within the Job Cancel screen
will vary depending upon the
actual job types currently in
use.
If a job type is not currently
active, it will not appear on
the LCD screen.
Items 4 to 5 are outside the LCD
frame. Use the
to display and highlight
the desired item.
or
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cancelling a Job Reservation - continued
Select the Job Type
Cancel a Reception
Enter JOB NUMBER
Cancel Other Jobs
Press the ENTER to
Cancel the Job
2
3
4
5
6
Select the desired job type.
To cancel a reception, use the Enter the job number you want
following keys to select the tele- to cancel.
phone line to stop the reception.
When the desired job screen is
displayed, press:
JOB CANCEL
[ENTER]:CANCEL
[ ]:PREVIOUS SCREEN
↑
[ ]:NEXT SCREEN
↓
or
A screen like the one below is
displayed.
Display the status of the desired
Go to Step 6.
job by using
.
and/or
CANCEL ?
NOTE:
FILE NBR =
1.YES
xxx
If Line 2 is also in use for
receiving, the Line 2 status
is also displayed by pressing
Go to Step 6.
The operation and screen to fol-
low varies for each item number
selected.
2.NO
To confirm deletion, press:
.
JOB NUMBER=
The two screens are alter-
If you selected 2.RECEIVE, go
Previous Job in the List
to Step 3.
nated by pressing
.
or
XXX
If you selected 5.JOB NUM-
BER, go to Step 4.
To not cancel the selection,
press:
Go to Step 6.
If you selected:
SINGLE TRANSMIT
REDFIELD EX
MAY-29 23:25
FILE NBR =
LINE-1 RECEIVE
+81 425 86 7449
1. TRANSMIT
3. POLLING
4. POLLING RESERVE
123
JOB CANCELLED
FILE NBR =
xxx
Go to Step 5.
LINE-2 RECEIVE
Next Job in the List
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADVANCED FUNCTIONS - MULTI-ADDRESS TRANSMISSION (BROADCASTING)
Group Broadcast Transmission
The Group Broadcast Transmis-
Load the Document
Select the Group
Location
Enter the Group
Number
Press the START
Key
sion feature allows you to send
a document to multiple remote
parties in a single operation.
1
2
3
4
Load the document face down
in the Document Tray (see page
88).
Press the One Touch Key pro- Enter the Multi-address Trans-
When the correct Group Num-
ber is displayed, press:
Note that a Group Broadcast
Transmission requires all pages
to be scanned to memory prior
to dialing, and thus adequate re-
sidual memory is required.
grammed for the desired group.
mission Group Number (1 to
1999).
Adjust the resolution and con-
trast if desired (see page 89).
EXAMPLE:
To enter the Group Number
0001, press:
COMM. RESERVATION
NOTE:
ONE TOUCH =
COLORADO GRP
35
MAY-17-00 WED11:49
If the optional handset is in-
stalled, the handset dialing is
not available.
COMM. RESERVATION
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
After 2 seconds:
GROUP NBR =
COLORADO GRP
0001
(Leading zeros, if any, may
be omitted.)
SCANNING INTO MEMORY
FILE NBR = xxx
After 2 seconds:
RESIDUAL MEMORY 70%
NOTE:
SCANNING INTO MEMORY
FILE NBR = xxx
RESIDUAL MEMORY 70%
When an incorrect number
When document scan-
ning is completed:
is entered, use
to de-
When document scan-
ning is completed:
Standby Mode screen
lete the preceding digits, or
Or, display the Group Dial Di-
rectory by pressing:
Standby Mode screen
press
once to start
ABB
DIRECTORY
GROUP
over from the beginning.
+
COMM. RESERVATION
GROUP NBR =(1-1999)
1
COMM. RESERVATION
GROUP NBR =(1-1999)
Go to Step 3.
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multi-Key Quick Broadcast Transmission
The Multi-Key Quick Broadcast
Transmission allows documents
to be sent to a combination of
the following numbers without
pre-programming a group.
Load the Document
Press the MULTI
Key
Enter the Facsimile Number
1
2
3
Enter the facsimile number of
the remote party using any of
the four dialing methods.
Load the document face down Press:
in the Document Tray (see page
88).
Repeat this step until the fac-
simile numbers of all the desired
remote parties are entered.
•
•
•
•
Abbreviated Dial Numbers
One Touch Dial Keys
Alphabet Dialed Numbers
Keypad Dialed Numbers
When the facsimile numbers of
all the desired remote parties
are entered, go to Step 5.
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing
... See page 97
Adjust the resolution and con-
trast if desired (see page 89).
Abbreviated Dialing
... See page 98
To cancel or modify the fac-
simile number already being
programmed to a Manual Group
Dial, go to Step 4.
MULTI GROUP
000
MAY-17-00 WED11:49
Alphabet Dialing
... See page 99
ENTER TEL NUMBER,
SPEED DIAL KEY OR
ONE TOUCH KEY
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
Keypad Dialing
... See page 100
A screen like the one below is
displayed.
MULTI GROUP
ABB NBR=
000
154
INFORMATION BUREAU
After 2 seconds:
MULTI GROUP
001
[↑] TO PREVIOUS
ENTER MORE OR
PRESS [START]
NOTE:
If you select the same entry
twice, you are prompted to
delete or retain that second
entry.
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multi-Key Quick Broadcast Transmission - continued
Press the START
Key
Select the CANCEL or MODIFY Facsimile Number
5
4
You can cancel or modify the
Manual Group Dial Number reg-
istered in this facsimile.
Press:
4c
4a
4b
Retain the Existing
Number
Cancel the Existing
Number
Modify the Existing
Number
Select the number you want to
To cancel the existing number, To modify the existing number, To retain the existing number,
press: press: press:
delete or modify using
or
, and press:
READING INTO MEMORY
FILE NBR = xxx
RESIDUAL MEMORY 70%
(to CANCEL)
(to MODIFY)
(to RETAIN)
When document scan-
ning is completed:
MULTI GROUP
MULTI GROUP
001
MULTI GROUP
001
MULTI GROUP
1.CANCEL
2.MODIFY
3.RETAIN
[↑] TO PREVIOUS
ENTER MORE
OR PRESS START
[↑] TO PREVIOUS
ENTER MORE
OR PRESS START
Standby Mode screen
ABB NBR=
DELETED
154
To select “1.CANCEL,” go to
Step 4a.
Return to Step 3.
Go to Step 3 for the Facsimile Return to Step 3.
Number entry.
To select “2.MODIFY,” go to
Step 4b.
To select “3.RETAIN,” go to
Step 4c.
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
- RELAY TRANSMISSION
Relay Transmission, Relay-Relay Transmission Overview
To perform Relay Transmissions or Relay-Relay Transmissions, you must build a
network beforehand.
What is a “Relay Transmission”?
A relay transmission is used to send documents from your facsimile (originator)
to a Hub Station, which then sends them to additional end stations. If you have
several stations in one or more regional areas (e.g. Los Angeles Metro, New
York City, Dallas-Ft. Worth, Seattle-Tacoma, etc.); you can save time and phone
charges by setting up a relay system. By sending your document to a Hub
Station, you can then instruct the Hub Station to retransmit the document to the
end stations in their local geographical area.
Consult your authorized TOSHIBA dealer for assistance in using this function.
Conditions for a Relay/Relay-Relay Transmission Network
1. The sending station must be a TOSHIBA DP120F/DP125F/DP80F/DP85F fac-
simile or another ITU-T relay communication compatible facsimile unit.
2. The Hub Station must be a TOSHIBA DP120F/DP125F facsimile or another
ITU-T relay communication compatible facsimile unit with the Hub Station func-
tions.
End Station Group
(stations to finally re-
ceive the document)
Hub
Station
Originator
Station
3. The relay station must program the end station telephone numbers to Abbrevi-
ated Dial numbers or One Touch keys or Group numbers. Up to 50 abbreviated
dial numbers or one touch keys or groups can be programmed. For information
on setting Relay Box, see page 127.
End Station
4. Due to advanced planning and setup requirements for the Relay-Relay trans-
missions involving two or more Hub Stations transfers, contact your authorized
TOSHIBA dealer for detailed instructions.
What is a “Relay-Relay Transmission”?
A Relay Transmission where two levels of Hub Stations are involved is called a
Relay-Relay Transmission. In a Relay-Relay Transmission, the first Hub Station
sends the document to another Hub Station(s) which then transmits them to
additional end stations.
How to Setup a Relay Transmission:
• Hub Station
Create a Relay Box within a hub unit (like the DP120F/DP125F) by following the
procedures beginning on page 127.
End Station Group
(stations to finally re-
ceive the document)
NOTE: A Relay Box must be established for every possible unit if you wish to
obtain a result report after the relay is completed.
Second
Hub Station
End Station
• Originator
Hub
Station
Originator
Station
Transmit a document to the hub unit from an ITU-T relay compatible remote
facsimile (like the DP120F/DP125F) with the procedures beginning on page 134.
End Station
End Station
Second
Hub Station
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relay Transmission, Relay-Relay Transmission Overview
-
Setting Up a Relay Box
continued
This section describes the pro-
How to Setup a Relay-Relay Transmission:
Display the MAILBOX
Menu
Select SETUP &
DELETE
cedures to setup a Relay Box in
1
2
• Hub Station
the DP120F/DP125F hub unit.
Using this function, all ITU-T F-
code compliant facsimiles can
1. Register the facsimile telephone number of the Second
Hub Station to a One Touch key or Abbreviated Number,
see pages 70 and 77 At this time, the Relay Box Number
located in the Second Hub Station should be registered as
the SUB Address of the One Touch key or Abbreviated
Number.
Turn the Flip Panel to the “50-
73” view to select the desired
Function Key.
Select “4.BOX SETUP” by
pressing:
receive or transmit documents
to and from the DP120F/
DP125F. Relay Boxes must be
setup prior to utilizing the
DP120F/DP125F as a Relay
Box Hub. For more information,
see page 126.
Press:
2. Create a Relay Box in the Hub Station, see “Setting Up a
Relay Box.” Register the One Touch key or Abbreviated
Number programmed in Step 1 to the Relay Box as the
Second Hub Station.
You can assign a maximum of
50 End Stations using Addrevi-
ated Dial Numbers, One Touch
Keys, or Group Numbers.
MAILBOX
SETUP MAILBOX
1.COMPLETE
2.BOX SETUP
3.BOX DELETE
• Second Hub Station
1.CONFIDENTIAL
2.BULLETIN BOARD
3.RELAY
1. Register the facsimile telephone number of the End Sta-
tion to a One Touch key or Abbreviated Number, see
pages 76 and 77.
4.BOX SETUP
2. Create a Relay Box in the Second Hub Station, see “Set-
ting Up a Relay Box.” Register the One Touch key or
Abbreviated Number programmed in Step 1 to the Relay
Box as the End Station.
• Originator
Transmit a document to the hub unit from an ITU-T relay
compatible remote facsimile (like the DP120F/DP125F) with
the procedures beginning on page 134.
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up a Relay Box - continued
Select BOX SETUP
Select the RELAY
Enter the Box
Number
Select the Password
Option
Enter the Password
3
4
5
6
7
Select “3.RELAY” by pressing:
Enter the Relay Box number
(max. 20 digits).
Select whether or not to use the Enter the password (max. 20
password option for this relay digits).
box.
Select “2.BOX SETUP” by
pressing:
To set the password option for
this relay box, press:
TYPE OF BOX
ENTER NEW BOX NBR
1.CONFIDENTIAL TYPE
2.BULLETIN BRD TYPE
3.RELAY
BOX NUMBER =(MAX20)
Go to Step 7.
If you do not wish to set the
password option with this relay
box, press:
Then press:
ENTER PASSWORD
PASSWORD =(MAX20)
XXXXX
Then press:
Go to Step 8.
PROGRAM PASSWORD?
RELAY END NUMBER
1.YES
2.NO
PRESS SPEED DIAL KEY
OR ONE TOUCH KEY
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up a Relay Box - continued
Enter the End Station
8
Repeat this step until all of the
required end station are en-
tered. Then go to Step 9.
8a
8b
Enter the Abbreviated Dial Number of End Station
Enter the One Touch
Key of End Station
8c
Enter the Group
Number of End Station
If an end station is assigned to a If an end station is assigned to
Then press:
If an end station is assigned to
a Group Number, press:
One Touch Key, press:
an Abbreviated Dial Number,
press:
Example: One Touch Key 35.
RELAY END NUMBER
+
+
ABB. NUMBER=
XXXXXXXX
XXX
RELAY END NUMBER
After 2 seconds:
Enter the Group Number.
Enter the Abbreviated Dial
Number.
ONE TOUCH =
XXXXXX
35
RELAY END NUMBER
After 2 seconds:
ABB. NUMBER=
ENTER MORE OR
PRESS [START]
XXX
RELAY END NUMBER
ONE TOUCH =
ENTER MORE OR
PRESS [START]
35
Go to Step 8.
Go to Step 8.
RELAY END NUMBER
RELAY END NUMBER
ABB. NUMBER =(1-999)
XX
GROUP NBR =(1-1999)
XXX
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up a Relay Box - continued
Enter the End Station - continued
Complete the End
Station Entry
Enter the Number to send the Transmission
10
Result
8
9
When all the desired End Sta-
tion Entries (One Touch Keys,
Abbreviated Dial Numbers or
Group Numbers) are completed
under the same Relay Box,
press:
Enter the facsimile number you
want the relay transmission re-
port (relay transmission End
Stations results) sent to.
Enter the Group
Number of End Station
- continued
8c
8d
10a
Enter the Number
Cancel or Retain the
Existing Station
Using the Dial Keypad
Then press:
If the End Station (One Touch
Key, Abbreviated Dial Number
or Groups Number) designated
in Step 8a, 8b or 8c have al-
ready been entered under the
same Relay Box, the following
LCD prompt is displayed.
Enter the facsimile number us-
ing the Dial Keypad.
If you do not desire a relay
transmission
report,
press
.
RELAY END NUMBER
TRANSMISSION REPORT
ENTER TEL NUMBER,
SPEED DIAL KEY OR OT
ENTER TO COMPLETE
The following screen is dis-
played for about 2 seconds to
indicate that the Mailbox is reg-
istered.
GROUP NUMBER= XXXX
XXXXXXXX
RELAY END NUMBER
ALREADY ASSIGNED
1.CANCEL
After 2 seconds:
2.RETAIN
RELAY END NUMBER
GROUP NUMBER= XXXX
ENTER MORE OR
TRANSMISSION REPORT
REGISTERED
To cancel the existing End Sta-
tion (One Touch Key, Abbrevi-
ated Dial Number or Group
Number), press:
TEL NUMBER =(MAX128)
XXXX
PRESS [START]
Go to Step 8.
Then press:
To retain the existing End Sta-
tion (One Touch Key, Abbrevi-
ated Dial Number or Group
Number), press:
The following screen is dis-
played for about 2 seconds to
indicate that the Mailbox is reg-
istered.
Go to Step 8.
REGISTERED
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up a Relay Box - continued
Enter the Number to send the Transmission Result - continued
10
Enter the Number using the Abbreviated Dial
Number
10b
10c
Enter the Number
using the One Touch
Key
Then press:
Press the desired One Touch Press the desired Abbreviated
Key.
Dial Number.
Example: One Touch Key 01.
The following screen is dis-
played for about 2 seconds to
indicate that the Mailbox is reg-
istered.
+
TRANSMISSION REPORT
ONE TOUCH
01
Enter the Abbreviated Dial Num-
ber.
The following screen is dis-
played for about 2 seconds to
indicate that the Mailbox is reg-
istered.
REGISTERED
REGISTERED
TRANSMISSION REPORT
ABB. NBR=
001
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting a Relay Box
This section describes the proce-
dures to delete an existing Relay
Box in a DP120F/DP125F hub
unit.
Display the MAILBOX
Menu
Select SETUP &
DELETE
Select BOX
DELETE
Enter the Box
Number
1
2
3
4
Turn the Flip Panel to the “50-
73” view to select the desired
Function Key.
Enter the Box number (max. 20
digits) of the Relay Box you
want to delete.
Select “4.BOX SETUP” by
pressing:
Select “3.BOX DELETE” by
pressing:
Press:
MAILBOX
SETUP MAILBOX
1.COMPLETE
2.BOX SETUP
3.BOX DELETE
ENTER DELETE BOX NBR
BOX NUMBER =(MAX20)
1.CONFIDENTIAL
2.BULLETIN BOARD
3.RELAY
Then press:
4.BOX SETUP
If the entered Box number does
not have
a
password pro-
grammed, go to Step 6.
If the entered Box number has
a password programmed, the
screen below is displayed.
Go to Step 5.
ENTER PASSWORD
PASSWORD =(MAX20)
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting a Relay Box - continued
Enter the Password
Complete the
Procedure
5
6
Enter the Password (max. 20).
The following screen is dis-
played to indicate that the can-
cellation is accepted.
CANCELLED
ENTER PASSWORD
PASSWORD =(MAX20)
******
Then press:
NOTE:
Make sure that the correct
password is entered. Other-
wise, the machine will inform
you that the password is in-
correct.
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relay Transmission to a Remote Hub
This section describes the pro-
Load the Document
Display the MAILBOX
Menu
Select the RELAY
Enter the Box
Number
cedures to send a document to
Relay Box in a remote hub unit.
The remote hub unit must be
compliant with ITU-T F-code
communications. For more infor-
mation, see page 126.
1
2
3
4
Turn the Flip Panel to the “50- Select the “3.RELAY” by press-
73” view to select the desired ing:
Function Key.
Enter the Box Number (max. 20
digits).
Load the document face down
in the Document Tray (see page
88).
Adjust the resolution and con-
trast if desired (see page 89).
Press:
NOTE:
The destination relay box
must be setup in the remote
hub unit prior to sending
document.
MAILBOX
MAY-17-00 WED10:22
SEND(RELAY)
1.CONFIDENTIAL
2.BULLETIN BOARD
3.RELAY
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
BOX NUMBER =(MAX20)
Then press:
4.BOX SETUP
PROGRAM PASSWORD?
1.YES
2.NO
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relay Transmission to a Remote Hub - continued
Enter the Box
Number
Enter the Password
for Reservation
Dial the Remote Hub
Unit
Complete the
Procedure
5
6
7
8
Enter the password to access
the Relay Box.
If the remote hub unit has a
password programmed, press:
Enter the facsimile number of
the remote hub unit using any
of the following dialing meth-
ods.
The facsimile starts scanning
the document into memory.
The following screen is dis-
played for about 2 seconds be-
fore returning to the Standby
Mode.
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing
... See page 97
Go to Step 6.
Abbreviated Dialing
... See page 98
SCANNING INTO MEMORY
FILE NBR=
231
If the remote hub unit does not
have a password programmed,
press:
RESIDUAL MEMORY 90%
Alphabet Dialing
... See page 99
Keypad Dialing
... See page 100
Then press:
Go to Step 7.
SEND(RELAY)
ENTER TEL NUMBER.
SPEED DIL KEY OR
ONE TOUCH KEY
TEL NUMBER=(MAX128)
123
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
- POLLING & MAILBOX COMMUNICATIONS
The DP120F/DP125F features
advanced Polling and Mailbox
Polling & Mailbox Overview
functions designed to provide
remote document retrieval capa-
bilities. In addition, the DP120F/
DP125F is a “Hub” type unit
where documents can be stored
and polled by other facsimiles
(with polling capabilities to re-
trieve documents from the
DP120F/DP125F).
Polling Reservation
Polling Reception
Polling Reservation allows documents to be stored in the DP120F/ Polling Reception is the ability to call up another facsimile and re-
DP125F so that other facsimile machines can remotely retrieve motely retrieve a document stored within the remote facsimile. The
(Poll) those documents. Following types of polling reservations are following types of polling receptions are available.
available.
Simple Polling
Simple
The DP120F/DP125F can call any other facsimile with polling
reservation capabilities to remotely retrieve a document. See
page 141.
Documents can be reserved for a one time polling operation
using the facsimile’s memory so that any facsimile with polling
reception capabilities can remotely retrieve the document. See
page 138.
Secure Polling
The DP120F/DP125F can call another TOSHIBA facsimile with
security polling reservation capabilities to remotely retrieve a
document using a 4-digit security code. See page 141.
Security
Documents can be reserved for a one time polling operation that
requires a 4-digit security code to be entered prior to sending the
document. Security reservation is only available when communi-
cating with other TOSHIBA facsimiles. See page 138.
Multi Address Polling
Multi Address Polling allows the DP120F/DP125F to sequentially
poll multiple remote facsimiles using a group of facsimile num-
bers stored as a group directory or as a MULTI key operation.
See page 143.
Public Mailbox
Documents can be reserved for multiple polling operations using
the facsimile’s memory so that any facsimile with polling capabili-
ties can remotely retrieve the document. See page 140.
Continuous Polling
Continuous Polling permits the DP120F/DP125F to sequentially
dial and retrieve documents from a group of facsimile numbers
on a continuous basis. See page 145.
Turnaround Polling
Turnaround Polling allows the DP120F/DP125F to transmit docu-
ments to a remote facsimile and then poll documents from the
remote facsimile on the same phone call. See page 147.
Delayed Polling
Delayed Polling permits the DP120F/DP125F to poll
a
document(s) from a remote location(s) at a later time. See page
181.
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Polling & Mailbox Overview - Continued
Open Mailbox (ITU-T Compatible)
The Open Mailbox is a new international standard for mailbox communications. Open Mailbox (ITU-T F-
code communications) allows storage and retrieval of documents via mailboxes that comply with this
standard. The DP120F/DP125F is a hub unit that has document storage capabilities so that ITU-T F-
Code compliant remote units can retrieve documents from the DP120F/DP125F. Prior to utilizing Open
Mailbox, mailboxes must be created in the DP120F/DP125F. Following two types of Mailboxes are
available.
Confidential Box
Confidential box allows a one time document retrieval from the mailbox. Once a document is
retrieved, it is cleared. If a new document is stored using the same box number where another
document is already present, it is added to the existing one. It is possible to setup a password
requirement for accessing the Confidential Box for document retrieval to prevent unauthorized re-
trieval of documents. This password is used only when retrieving documents and not used during
document reservation.
Bulletin Board Box
Bulletin Board box allows multiple document retrievals from the mailbox. If a new document is stored
using the same Box number where another document is already present, it replaces the existing one.
It is possible to setup a password requirement for accessing the Bulletin Board Box for document
reservation during setup. This password is used only when reserving documents from a remote
facsimile or the local hub and not used during document retrieval.
1. To setup an Open Mailbox, see page 149.
2. To delete an Open Mailbox, see page 151.
3. To reserve a document to a remote hub, see page 153.
4. To reserve a document to a local DP120F/DP125F, see page 155.
5. To retrieve (Poll) a document from a remote hub, see page 157.
6. To retrieve (Print) a document from a local DP120F/DP125F, see page 159.
7. To delete a document from an Open Mailbox, see page 161.
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Simple & Security Polling Reservation
This procedure allows the
DP120F/DP125F to send a doc-
Load the Document
Display the
POLLING Menu
Select POLLING
RESERVE
Select POLLING
1
2
3
4
ument to another remote fac-
simile when requested. In addi-
tion, documents can be protect-
ed from unauthorized remote
facsimiles by using security
codes. Two types of security
codes are offered.
Load the document face down Turn the Flip Panel to the “50- Select “2.POLLING RESERVE”
in the Document Tray (see page 73” view to select the desired by pressing:
Select “1.POLLING” by press-
ing:
88).
Function Key.
Adjust the resolution and con- Press:
trast if desired (see page 89).
4-Digit Security Code
When the 4-digit security code
is selected as the check code,
the document can only be re-
ceived by TOSHIBA facsimiles
with the matching security code.
MAY-17-00 WED11:49
POLLING
1.POLLING
2.POLLING RESERVE
3.PROG. CONT. POLL.
POLLING RESERVE
1.POLLING
2.PUBLIC FAX MAILBOX
SECURITY CODE/TEL?
1.NO
2.SECURITY CODE
3.TEL NO.
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
Facsimile Number
4.CODE & TEL NO.
If a facsimile number is selected
as the check code, the remote
facsimile’s Transmit Terminal
Identification (TTI) is checked
prior to document transmission.
This type of security code can
be used with facsimiles made
by other manufacturers.
This TTI must be properly pro-
grammed into the remote fac-
simile for this procedure to func-
tion.
NOTES:
•
Only one Simple Polling
reservation can be set at
one time.
•
Simple Polling reserva-
tion is not available if a
document is reserved in
the Public Mailbox.
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Simple & Security Polling Reservation - continued
6a Select
6b Select TEL NO.
6c Select CODE & TEL
7
Select the Security
Option
Complete the
Procedure
5
SECURITY CODE
NO.
Select “4.CODE & TEL NO.” by
pressing:
Use the Dial Keypad to select Select “2.SECURITY CODE” by
one of the following options or pressing:
Select “3.TEL NO.” by pressing:
The facsimile starts scanning
the document.
use
/
to scroll
SCANNING INTO MEMORY
up/down the menu and press
.
Enter the number of the polling
FILE NBR =
RESIDUAL MEMORY 70%
140
POLLING RESERVE
SECURITY CODE =
POLLING RESERVE
SECURITY CODE =
POLLING RESERVE
SECURITY TEL=(MAX20)
When the document scanning is
complete, the display returns to
the Standby Mode.
1. NO
Select this option if you do
not want to use security. Go
to Step 7.
Enter a 4-digit Security Code
(0000 to 9999) using the Dial
Keypad.
Enter a 4-digit Security Code
(0000 to 9999) using the Dial
Keypad. Each digit of the en-
tered code is displayed as an
asterisk.
(remote) facsimile using the Dial
Keypad (max. 20 digits).
NOTE:
If a Simple Polling operation
is already reserved, the fol-
lowing screen is displayed.
2. SECURITY CODE
POLLING RESERVE
Select this option to use a 4-
digit Security Code with
TOSHIBA facsimiles only.
Go to Step 6a.
SECURITY CODE =
****
ALREADY ASSIGNED
1.CANCEL
POLLING RESERVE
POLLING RESERVE
3. TEL NO.
2.ADD
3.RETAIN
SECURITY TEL=(MAX20)
123456789
SECURITY CODE =
****
Then press:
Select this option to use the
telephone number of the
polling (remote) facsimile’s
as the security code. Go to
Step 6b.
POLLING RESERVE
You may select one of the fol-
lowing three options.
Then press:
Then press:
SECURITY TEL=(MAX20)
1. CANCEL
4. CODE & TEL NO.
Select this option to use both
a 4-digit security code and a
telephone number. Go to
Step 6c.
Select this option to replace
the previous reservation.
Go to Step 7.
Go to Step 7.
Enter the number of the polling-
receiver’s facsimile (max. 20
digits).
NOTE:
NOTE:
2. ADD
You must provide this 4-digit
number to the remote party
in advance or they will not be
able to retrieve this docu-
ment. If no code or an incor-
rect code is used, a polling
error will occur.
This number must be pro-
grammed in the terminal ID
of the remote facsimile. If no
number or an unmatched
number is in the terminal ID,
a polling error will occur.
Select this option to add this
document to the existing res-
ervation.
POLLING RESERVE
SECURITY TEL=(MAX20)
123456789
3. RETAIN
Select this option to retain
the existing reservation.
When the number is displayed
correctly, press:
Go to Step 7.
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Public Mailbox Polling Reservation
Public Mailbox is a feature used
Load the Document
Display the POLLING
RESERVE Menu
Select PUBLIC
FAX M-BOX
Complete the
Procedure
to store a document in memory
so that multiple remote parties
may poll to receive it at any
time. No Security Codes are
used with this feature. The
document is retained in memory
regardless of how many times it
is polled.
1
2
3
4
Turn the Flip Panel to the “50-
73” view to select the desired
Function Key.
Select “2.PUBLIC FAX MAIL- The facsimile starts scanning
BOX” by pressing:
Load the document face down
in the Document Tray (see
page 88).
the document.
SCANNING INTO MEMORY
FILE NBR = 140
RESIDUAL MEMORY 70%
Adjust the resolution and con-
trast if desired (see page 89).
Press:
NOTES:
•
Only one Public Mailbox
polling reservation can be
set at one time.
+
When the document scanning is
complete, the display returns to
the Standby Mode.
•
When a Simple Polling
reservation is reserved,
Public Mailbox reserva-
tion is not available.
NOTE:
If a Public Mailbox operation
is already reserved, the fol-
lowing screen is displayed.
POLLING RESERVE
1.POLLING
2.PUBLIC FAX MAILBOX
MAY-17-00 WED11:49
POLLING
1.POLLING
2.POLLING RESERVE
3.PROG. CONT. POLL.
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
ALREADY ASSIGNED
1.CANCEL
2.ADD
3.RETAIN
You may select one of the fol-
lowing three options.
1. CANCEL
Select this option to replace
the previous reservation.
2. ADD
Select this option to add this
document to the existing res-
ervation.
3. RETAIN
Select this option to retain
the existing reservation.
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Simple & Secure Polling
Use this procedure to retrieve a
document from a remote fac-
simile.
Display the
POLLING Menu
Select POLLING
Dial the Remote
Facsimile
Select the Security
Code Option
1
2
3
4
If the remote facsimile is a
Turn the Flip Panel to the “50-
73” view to select the desired
Function Key.
Select “1.POLLING” by press- Dial the number of the remote Select the security code option.
TOSHIBA facsimile and a 4-digit
security code is programmed to
the document to be polled, you
must enter the correct 4-digit se-
curity code in order to retrieve
the document.
ing:
facsimile (in which the document
you want to retrieve is located)
using any of the following dialing
methods.
If the remote facsimile is a
TOSHIBA facsimile and a 4-
digit security code is pro-
grammed to the document to be
polled, select “1. YES” by
pressing:
Press:
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing
... See page 97
Abbreviated Dialing
... See page 98
POLLING
1.POLLING
2.POLLING RESERVE
3.PROG. CONT. POLL.
POLLING
Alphabet Dialing
... See page 99
ENTER TEL NUMBER
Go to Step 5.
Keypad Dialing
... See page 100
If the remote facsimile is not a
TOSHIBA facsimile or a Secu-
rity Code is not in use, select
“2. NO” by pressing:
Press:
POLLING
SECURITY CODE ?
1.YES
Go to Step 6.
2.NO
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Simple & Secure Polling - continued
Enter the Security
Code
Complete the
Procedure
5
6
Enter the 4-digit security code The facsimile will dial the re-
for the document to be re- mote facsimile to retrieve the
trieved.
document. When the operation
is complete, the following
screen is displayed for about 2
seconds and your documents
will be printed.
OPERATION COMPLETED
FILE NBR =
167
POLLING
SECURITY CODE =
****
When the 4-digit security code
is entered, press:
Go to Step 6.
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multi Address Polling
In a Multi Polling operation, the
documents are retrieved from
multiple remote facsimiles using
pre-programmed groups, One
Touch Keys, Abbreviated Dial
Numbers, Alphabet Dial, or from
the Dial Keypad.
Display the
POLLING Menu
Select POLLING
Press the MULTI
Key
Enter the Number of
Remote Facsimiles
1
2
3
4
Select “1.POLLING” by press-
ing:
Press:
Enter the number of the remote
facsimiles using any combina-
tion of the following dialing
methods.
Turn the Flip Panel to the “50-
73” view to select the desired
Function Key.
Press:
•
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing
... See page 97
Abbreviated Dialing
... See page 98
POLLING
1.POLLING
2.POLLING RESERVE
3.PROG. CONT. POLL.
POLLING
MULTI POLLING
ENTER TEL NUMBER.
SPEED DIAL KEY OR
ONE TOUCH KEY
Alphabet Dialing
... See page 99
ENTER TEL NUMBER
Keypad Dialing
... See page 100
Group Dialing
... See page 123
After each entry, the selected
facsimile is displayed for 2 sec-
onds.
MULTI POLLING
ABB. NUMBER=
009
GREENSVILLE PLANT
Repeat this procedure until all
remote facsimiles are entered.
MULTI POLLING
ENTER MORE OR
PRESS [START]
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multi Address Polling - continued
Select the Security
Code Option
Enter the Security
Code
Complete the
Procedure
5
6
7
When all the remote facsimile
locations have been entered in
Step 4, press:
Enter the 4-digit security code The facsimile will dial the re-
for the document to be re- mote facsimiles to retrieve the
trieved.
documents. When the operation
is complete, the following
screen is displayed for about 2
seconds and your documents
will be printed.
MULTI POLLING
SECURITY CODE ?
1.YES
OPERATION COMPLETED
2.NO
FILE NBR =
167
If the remote facsimile is a
TOSHIBA facsimile and a 4-digit
security code is programmed to
the document to be polled, se-
lect “1. YES” by pressing:
POLLING
SECURITY CODE =
****
When the 4-digit security code
is entered, press:
Go to Step 6.
If the remote facsimile is not a
TOSHIBA facsimile or no Secu-
rity Codes are being used, se-
lect “2. NO” by pressing:
Go to Step 7.
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Continuous Polling
Use this procedure to poll the
same remote facsimile(s) on a
regular schedule. Continuous
Polling operations can be pro-
grammed for specific time inter-
vals on the days selected. In ad-
dition, a 4-digit security code
can be used with other TOSHI-
BA facsimiles when the docu-
ment has a security code pro-
grammed.
Display the
POLLING Menu
Select PROG. CONT.
POLL.
Enter the Polling
Interval
Enter the Start and
Stop Time
1
2
3
4
Select “3.PROG. CONT. POLL”
by pressing:
Turn the Flip Panel to the “50-
73” view to select the desired
Function Key.
Enter the time interval between
polling sequences (10 to 70
minutes).
Enter the polling start and stop
time.
Press:
Only interval settings of 10-
minute increments are permis-
sible. (Example: Enter “1” for
10 minutes or “2” for 20 min-
utes, etc.)
NOTES:
•
•
•
Calls
are
performed
POLLING
1.POLLING
2.POLLING RESERVE
3.PROG. CONT. POLL.
PROG. CONT. POLL.
within the set time period
on the days selected with
the set interval between
callings.
INTERVAL=(10-70)MIN
0
When the time period is dis-
played correctly, press:
If multiple sending sta-
tions are programmed,
callings are performed to
all those stations within
the set time period.
NOTES:
If the polling operation
exceeds the set time pe-
riod, it will continue until
all the facsimiles have
been polled.
•
You may use
/
Then press:
to move the cursor left
and right.
•
If the 12-hour format is
selected, you may use
•
•
•
Redialing or calling to al-
ternate dialing numbers is
not available during this
operation.
PROG. CONT. POLL.
the
/
keys
TIME PERIOD =
08:00 -17:00
to select AM or PM.
If a power failure occurs
during this procedure, the
polling continues when
power is restored.
PROG. CONT. POLL.
[ ] FOR SETTING
↑↓
SCHEDULE =
MON-FRI
If the set time period is
shorter than the set call-
ing interval, polling will be
performed only once at
the start time.
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Continuous Polling - continued
Select the Day of the
Week
Enter the Number of
Remote Facsimile
Select the Security
Code Option
Enter the Security
Code
5
6
7
8
Select the day of the week to Enter the number of the remote
start polling. When the day-of- facsimile using any of the fol-
week range is displayed cor- lowing dialing methods.
rectly, press:
When all the remote facsimile
locations have been entered in
Step 6, press:
Enter the 4-digit security code
for the document to be re-
trieved.
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing
... See page 97
If the remote facsimile is a
TOSHIBA facsimile and a 4-
digit security code is pro-
grammed to the document to be
polled, go to Step 8.
Abbreviated Dialing
... See page 98
NOTES:
Alphabet Dialing
... See page 99
•
To designate the start or
end day, use
to move the entry point.
Keypad Dialing
... See page 100
/
If the remote facsimile is not a
TOSHIBA facsimile or no Secu-
rity Codes are in use, press:
After each entry, the selected
facsimile is displayed for 2 sec-
onds.
•
Press
/
to
POLLING
change the day.
SECURITY CODE =11111
****
No Security Code will be se-
lected and the facsimile will re-
turn to the Standby Mode.
PROG. CONT. POLL.
ENTER TEL NUMBER,
ABB. NUMBER OR
ONE TOUCH KEY
PROG. CONT. POLL.
When the 4-digit security code
is entered, press:
ONE TOUCH=
PORTLAND PLANT
24
The facsimile will automatically
start polling at the time set in
this procedure.
Repeat this procedure until all
remote facsimiles are entered.
The procedure is now complete.
The display returns to the
Standby Mode.
PROG. CONT. POLL.
The facsimile will automatically
start polling at the time set in
this procedure.
ENTER MORE OR
PRESS [START]
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turnaround Polling
Turnaround Polling allows you
to poll another facsimile after
transmitting documents to it on
the same phone call.
Display the
TURNAROUND POLL
Menu
Load the Document
Select ON
Select the Security
Code Option
1
2
3
4
Press:
Load the document face down in
the Document Tray (see page
88).
To set Turnaround Poll to ON,
press:
Select the security code option.
NOTE:
Turnaround polling may not
operate with certain non-
TOSHIBA models.
TURNAROUND POLL
SECURITY CODE ?
1.YES
Adjust the resolution and con-
trast if desired (see page 89).
+
+
2.NO
MAY-17-00 WED11:49
TURNAROUND POLL
SECURITY CODE ?
1.YES
If the remote facsimile is a
TOSHIBA facsimile and a 4-digit
security code is assigned to the
document to be polled, select
“1. YES” by pressing:
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
2.NO
TURNAROUND POLL
1.ON
2.OFF
Go to Step 5.
If the remote facsimile is not a
TOSHIBA facsimile or no secu-
rity Codes are in use, select “2.
NO” by pressing:
Go to Step 6.
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turnaround Polling - continued
Enter the Security
Code
Dial the Number of
Remote Facsimile
Complete the
Procedure
5
6
7
Enter the number of the remote
facsimile using any of the follow-
ing dialing methods.
The facsimile will dial the re-
mote facsimile to perform an or-
dinary transmission. When the
transmission is complete, poll-
ing of the document from the re-
mote facsimile will start immedi-
ately.
Enter the 4-digit security code
for the document to be re-
trieved.
• One Touch Key Dialing
... See page 97
• Abbreviated Dialing
... See page 98
When the polling operation is
complete, the Turnaround Poll-
ing setting is automatically can-
celled.
• Alphabet Dialing
... See page 99
• Keypad Dialing
... See page 100
COMM. RESERVATION
TURNAROUND POLL
RESIDUAL MEMORY 80%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
SECURITY CODE =
****
When the 4-digit security code
is entered, press:
Go to Step 6.
148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
- MAILBOX (ITU-T Compatible)
This section describes the procedures to setup a Mailbox in the
DP120F/DP125F hub unit. Using this function, all ITU-T F-code
compliant facsimiles can reserve, transmit, or retrieve documents to
and from the DP120F/DP125F. Mailboxes must be setup prior to
utilizing the DP120F/DP125F as an Mailbox Hub. For more informa-
tion, see page 137. Two Types of Mailboxes are available.
Setting Up a Mailbox
Display the MAILBOX
Select SETUP &
DELETE
Select BOX SETUP
1
2
3
Menu
Turn the Flip Panel to the “50-
73” view to select the desired
Function Key.
Select “4.BOX SETUP” by
pressing:
Select “2.BOX SETUP” by
pressing:
•
Confidential Box
Confidential Box allows a one time document retrieval from the
mailbox. Once a document is retrieved, it is cleared. A document
retrieval password for accessing the Confidential Box can be
added during setup.
Press:
It is important to note that a password is required to retrieve a
document from a Confidential Box using a remote facsimile. If
the contents of this mailbox are to be polled remotely, a pass-
word must be used. A password is not mandatory if the contents
are to be printed locally.
SETUP MAILBOX
1.COMPLETE
2.BOX SETUP
3.BOX DELETE
TYPE OF BOX
MAILBOX
1.CONFIDENTIAL TYPE
2.BULLETIN BRD TYPE
3.RELAY
1.CONFIDENTIAL
2.BULLETIN BOARD
3.RELAY
•
Bulletin Board Box
Bulletin Board box allows multiple document retrievals from the
mailbox. It is possible to add a password requirement for docu-
ment reservation so that only users with the correct password
can reserve documents. The password is not required to retrieve
documents from the Bulletin Board Box.
4.BOX SETUP
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up a Mailbox - continued
Select the Mailbox
Type
Enter the Box
Number
Select the Password
Option
Enter the Password
Complete the
Procedure
4
5
6
7
8
Select the desired type of Mail- Enter the Mailbox number (max.
Select whether or not to use the Enter the password (max. 20
password option for this mail- digits).
box.
The following screen is dis-
played for about 2 seconds to
indicate that the Mailbox is reg-
istered.
box.
20 digits).
To select the Confidential Box,
press:
To set the password option for
this mailbox, press:
Go to Step 7.
REGISTERED
To select the Bulletin Board
Box, press:
If you do not wish to set the
password option with this mail-
box, press:
Then press:
ENTER PASSWORD
PASSWORD =(MAX20)
*****
Go to Step 8.
ENTER NEW BOX NBR
PROGRAM PASSWORD?
1.YES
2.NO
NOTES:
BOX NUMBER =(MAX20)
Then press:
•
If you selected the Confi-
dential Box in Step 4, a
password must be used if
the document is to be re-
trieved remotely. The re-
mote facsimile will re-
quire its operator to enter
this password before be-
ing able to retrieve the
document.
•
If you selected the Bulle-
tin Board Box in Step 4,
assigning a password will
require a password to be
entered before any docu-
ments can be reserved
into the Bulletin Board
Box.
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting a Mailbox
This section describes the pro-
cedures to delete an existing
Mailbox in a DP120F/DP125F
hub unit.
Display the MAILBOX
Menu
Select BOX SETUP
Select BOX
DELETE
Enter the Box
Number
1
2
3
4
Turn the Flip Panel to the “50-
73” view to select the desired
Function Key.
Enter the Box number (max. 20
digits) of the Mailbox you want
to delete.
Select “4.BOX SETUP” by
pressing:
Select “3.BOX DELETE” by
pressing:
NOTE:
If a document exists in the
Mailbox you want to delete,
this operation is not allowed
until the document is re-
trieved, printed, or cancelled
from the Mailbox.
Press:
MAILBOX
SETUP MAILBOX
1.COMPLETE
2.BOX SETUP
3.BOX DELETE
ENTER DELETE BOX NBR
BOX NUMBER =(MAX20)
1.CONFIDENTIAL
2.BULLETIN BOARD
3.RELAY
Then press:
4.BOX SETUP
If the entered Box number does
not have
a
password pro-
grammed, go to Step 6.
If the entered Box number has
a password programmed, the
screen below is displayed.
Go to Step 5.
ENTER PASSWORD
PASSWORD =(MAX20)
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting a Mailbox - continued
Enter the Password
Complete the
Procedure
5
6
Enter the Password (max. 20).
The following screen is dis-
played to indicate that the can-
cellation is accepted.
CANCELLED
ENTER PASSWORD
PASSWORD =(MAX20)
******
Then press:
NOTE:
Make sure that the correct
password is entered. Other-
wise, the machine will inform
you that the password is in-
correct.
152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending a Document to a Mailbox (Remote Hub)
This section describes the pro-
Load the Document
Display the MAILBOX
Menu
Select the Mailbox
Type
Select TX TO
MAILBOX
cedures to send a document to
a remote hub unit’s Confidential
Box, or reserving a document to
a Bulletin Board Box in a remote
hub unit. The remote hub unit
must be compliant with ITU-T F-
code communications. For more
information, see page 137.
1
2
3
4
Load the document face down Turn the Flip Panel to the “50-
in the Document Tray (see 73” view to select the desired
page 88).
Select the desired type of Mail-
box.
Select “2. TX TO MAILBOX” by
pressing:
Function Key.
To send the document to a
Confidential Box, press:
Adjust the resolution and con- Press:
trast if desired (see page 89).
NOTE:
The destination mailbox
number must be setup in the
remote hub unit prior to
sending document.
TX(CONFIDENTIAL)
BOX NUMBER =(MAX20)
CONFIDENTIAL
MAILBOX
MAY-17-00 WED10:22
1.PRINT MAILBOX
2.TX TO MAILBOX
3.POLL FROM MAILBOX
1.CONFIDENTIAL
2.BULLETIN BOARD
3.RELAY
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
or
4.BOX SETUP
TX(BULLETIN BOARD)
BOX NUMBER =(MAX20)
To reserve the document to a
Bulletin Board Box in a remote
hub unit, press:
BULLETIN BOARD
1.PRINT MAILBOX
2.TX TO MAILBOX
3.POLL FROM MAILBOX
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending a Document to a Mailbox (Remote Hub) - continued
Enter the Box
Number
Enter the Password
for Reservation
Dial the Remote Hub
Unit
Complete the
Procedure
5
6
7
8
Enter the Box Number (max. 20
digits).
Enter the password to access
the Bulletin Board Box.
Enter the facsimile number of
the remote hub unit using any
of the following dialing meth-
ods.
The facsimile starts scanning
the document into memory.
The following screen is dis-
played for about 2 seconds be-
fore returning to the Standby
Mode.
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing
... See page 97
Abbreviated Dialing
... See page 98
SCANNING INTO MEMORY
FILE NBR=
231
Alphabet Dialing
... See page 99
RESIDUAL MEMORY 90%
Keypad Dialing
... See page 100
Then press:
Then press:
If you are sending to a Confi-
dential Box, go to Step 7.
If you are sending to a Bulletin
Board, go to Step 6.
TX(CONFIDENTIAL)
ENTER TEL NUMBER.
SPEED DIAL KEY OR
ONE TOUCH KEY
TX(BULLETIN BOARD)
ENTER TEL NUMBER.
SPEED DIAL KEY OR
ONE TOUCH KEY
TX(CONFIDENTIAL)
TEL NUMBER=(MAX128)
123
or
or
TX(BULLETIN BOARD)
ENTER PASSWORD
PASSWORD =(MAX20)
TEL NUMBER=(MAX128)
123
154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reserving a Document to a Mailbox (Local Hub)
This section describes the pro-
Load the Document
Display the MAILBOX
Menu
Select the Mailbox
Type
Select INPUT TO
MAILBOX
cedure to reserve a document
to the DP120F/DP125F’s Confi-
dential Box or Bulletin Board
Box.
1
2
3
4
Select the desired type of Mail-
box.
Turn the Flip Panel to the “50-
73” view to select the desired
Function Key.
Select “4.INPUT TO MAILBOX”
by pressing:
Load the document face down
in the Document Tray (see
page 88).
NOTE:
Before a document can be
reserved to a mailbox; that
mailbox must first be setup.
See page 149.
To reserve the document to a
Confidential Box, press:
Adjust the resolution and con-
trast if desired (see page 89).
Press:
NOTE:
You may use
/
MAY-17-00 WED10:22
MAILBOX
CONFIDENTIAL
1.CONFIDENTIAL
2.BULLETIN BOARD
3.RELAY
1.PRINT MAILBOX
2.TX TO MAILBOX
3.POLL FROM MAILBOX
to scroll up/down the menu
screen to select this option.
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
4.BOX SETUP
4.INPUT TO MAILBOX
5.CANCEL MAILBOX
INPUT(CONFIDENTIAL)
BOX NUMBER =(MAX20)
To reserve the document to a
Bulletin Board Box, press:
or
INPUT(BULLETIN BRD)
BOX NUMBER =(MAX20)
BULLETIN BOARD
1.PRINT MAILBOX
2.TX TO MAILBOX
3.POLL FROM MAILBOX
4.INPUT TO MAILBOX
5.CANCEL MAILBOX
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reserving a Document to a Mailbox (Local Hub) - continued
Enter the Box
Number
Enter the Password
for Reservation
Complete the
Procedure
5
6
7
Enter the Box Number (max. 20
digits).
Enter the password to access
the Bulletin Board Box.
The facsimile starts scanning
the document into memory.
The following screen is dis-
played for about 2 seconds be-
fore returning to the Standby
Mode.
SCANNING INTO MEMORY
FILE NBR=
231
RESIDUAL MEMORY 90%
Then press:
INPUT(BULLETIN BRD)
PASSWORD =(MAX20)
****
If you are reserving to a Confi-
dential Box, go to Step 7.
Then press:
If you are reserving to a Bulletin
Board Box, go to Step 6.
INPUT(BULLETIN BRD)
PASSWORD =(MAX20)
156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Retrieving (Polling) a Document from a Mailbox (Remote Hub)
This section describes the pro-
Display the
MAILBOX Menu
Select the Mailbox
Type
Select POLL FROM
MAILBOX
Enter the Box
Number
cedure to retrieve a document
from a Confidential Box or Bulle-
tin Board Box in a remote hub
unit.
1
2
3
4
Select “3.POLL FROM MAIL-
BOX” by pressing:
Select the desired type of Mail-
box.
Enter the Box Number (max. 20
digits).
Turn the Flip Panel to the “50-
73” view to select the desired
Function Key.
To poll a document in a Confi-
dential Box, press:
Press:
MAILBOX
POLL(CONFIDENTIAL)
BOX NUMBER =(MAX20)
CONFIDENTIAL
1.CONFIDENTIAL
2.BULLETIN BOARD
3.RELAY
1.PRINT MAILBOX
2.TX TO MAILBOX
3.POLL FROM MAILBOX
Then press:
4.BOX SETUP
or
To poll a document in a Bulletin
Board Box, press:
If you are retrieving from a
Confidential Box, go to Step 5.
POLL(BULLETIN BOARD)
BOX NUMBER =(MAX20)
If you are retrieving from a Bul-
letin Board Box, go to Step 6.
POLL(CONFIDENTIAL)
PASSWORD =(MAX20)
BULLETIN BOARD
1.PRINT MAILBOX
2.TX TO MAILBOX
3.POLL FROM MAILBOX
or
POLL(BULLETIN BOARD)
ENTER TEL NUMBER.
SPEED DIAL KEY OR
ONE TOUCH KEY
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Retrieving a Document from a Mailbox (Remote Hub) - continued
Enter the Password
Dial the Remote Hub
Unit
Complete the
Procedure
5
6
7
The facsimile starts dialing the
remote hub unit to retrieve the
document. The following screen
is displayed for about 2 seconds
before returning to the Standby
Mode.
Enter the password to access
the Confidential Box.
Enter the facsimile number of
the remote hub unit using any
of the following dialing meth-
ods.
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing
... See page 97
Abbreviated Dialing
... See page 98
Alphabet Dialing
... See page 99
Keypad Dialing
... See page 100
Then press:
OPERATION COMPLETED
POLL(CONFIDENTIAL)
ENTER TEL NUMBER.
SPEED DIAL KEY OR
ONE TOUCH KEY
POLL(CONFIDENTIAL)
FILE NBR =
234
TEL NUMBER=(MAX128)
123
or
POLL(BULLETIN BOARD)
TEL NUMBER=(MAX128)
123
158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing a Document from a Mailbox (Local Hub)
This section describes the pro-
Display the
MAILBOX Menu
Select the Open
Mailbox Type
Select PRINT
MAILBOX
Enter the Box
Number
cedure to retrieve a document
from a local DP120F/DP125F’s
Confidential Box or Bulletin
Board Box. For more informa-
tion, see page 149.
1
2
3
4
Select “1.PRINT MAILBOX” by
pressing:
Turn the Flip Panel to the “50- Select the desired type of Mail-
73” view to select the desired box.
Enter the Box Number (max. 20
digits).
Function Key.
To print a document from a
Press:
Confidential Box, press:
PRT(CONFIDENTIAL)
MAILBOX
CONFIDENTIAL
1.CONFIDENTIAL
2.BULLETIN BOARD
3.RELAY
1.PRINT MAILBOX
2.TX TO MAILBOX
3.POLL FROM MAILBOX
BOX NUMBER =(MAX20)
Then press:
4.BOX SETUP
or
If you are printing from a Confi-
dential Box, go to Step 5.
To print a document from a Bul-
letin Board Box, press:
PRT(BULLETIN BOARD)
BOX NUMBER =(MAX20)
If you are printing from a Bulle-
tin Board Box, go to Step 6.
BULLETIN BOARD
PRT(CONFIDENTIAL)
PASSWORD =(MAX20)
1.PRINT MAILBOX
2.TX TO MAILBOX
3.POLL FROM MAILBOX
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing a Document from a Mailbox (Local Hub) - continued
Enter the Password
Complete the
Procedure
5
6
Enter the password to access
the Confidential Box.
The facsimile starts printing the
document. The following screen
is displayed during the printing
sequence before returning to
the Standby Mode.
MAY-17-00 WED10:22
RESIDUAL MEMORY 80%
PRINTING
Then press:
160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cancelling Documents in a Mailbox (Local Hub)
This section describes the pro-
cedure to cancel the docu-
Display the
MAILBOX Menu
Select the Mailbox
Type
Select CANCEL
MAILBOX
Enter the Box
Number
1
2
3
4
ments stored in the DP120F/
DP125F. This operation will
erase all existing documents in
each Mailbox, but not erase the
Mailbox itself.
Turn the Flip Panel to the “50-
73” view to select the desired
Function Key.
Select the desired type of Mail- Select “5.CANCEL MAILBOX”
Enter the Box Number (max. 20
digits).
box.
by pressing:
To cancel documents from a
Confidential Box, press:
Press:
NOTE:
You may use
/
to scroll up/down the menu
screen to select this option.
CONFIDENTIAL
MAILBOX
1.PRINT MAILBOX
2.TX TO MAILBOX
3.POLL FROM MAILBOX
1.CONFIDENTIAL
2.BULLETIN BOARD
3.RELAY
Then press:
CANCEL(CONFIDENTIAL)
BOX NUMBER =(MAX20)
4.INPUT TO MAILBOX
5.CANCEL MAILBOX
4.BOX SETUP
If you are cancelling from a Box
with a password assigned, go
to Step 5.
or
To cancel a document from a
Bulletin Board Box, press:
CANCEL(BULLETIN BD.)
BOX NUMBER =(MAX20)
If you are cancelling from a Box
with no password assigned, go
to Step 6.
BULLETIN BOARD
1.PRINT MAILBOX
2.TX TO MAILBOX
3.POLL FROM MAILBOX
4.INPUT TO MAILBOX
5.CANCEL MAILBOX
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cancelling Documents in a Mailbox (Local Hub) - continued
Enter the Password
Complete the
Procedure
5
6
Enter the password to access
Confidential Box.
The facsimile will display the fol-
lowing screen for approximately
2 seconds before returning to the
Standby Mode.
CANCELLED
CANCEL(CONFIDENTIAL)
PASSWORD =(MAX20)
****
or
CANCEL(BULLETIN BD.)
PASSWORD =(MAX20)
****
Then press:
162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
- ADVANCED TRANSMISSION FUNCTIONS
Department Code Access
This procedure assumes that
DEPT CODE
Standby Menu
Enter the
Department Code
Complete the
Procedure
you have selected and config-
ured the Department Codes on
pages 55 and 56 of this manual.
1
2
3
The Department Code Standby
menu is shown below.
Enter the 5-digit Department
Code preset for your depart-
ment.
If the password you have en-
tered is valid, the ordinary
Standby Mode screen (as
shown below) will be displayed.
The access will be limited to
one transmission job or one Op-
eration Panel function (printing a
list, accessing a Mailbox, etc.)
Once selected, the use of the
facsimile is limited to authorized
personnel only.
MAY-17-00 WED10:22
NOTE:
RESIDUAL MEMORY 80%
ENTER DEPT CODE
The usage for each depart-
ment is recorded on the De-
partment Control List (see
page 217).
If the password does not match,
verify your password and re-en-
ter.
ENTER DEPT CODE
MAY-17-00 WED10:22
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
LOAD DOCUMENT
*****
NOTE:
Then press:
Upon entering a valid 5-digit
password,
the
standby
prompt will remain on the
LCD for one operation or
one minute whichever oc-
curs first.
NOTE:
If you do not have a valid
Department Code Password,
you cannot access this fac-
simile.
Contact the key operator or
supervisor for more informa-
tion.
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Account Code Entry
This procedure assumes that
you have enabled the Account
Code option on page 58 of this
manual.
Load the Document
Enter the Facsimile
Number
Enter an Account
Code
Complete the
Procedure
1
2
3
4
Load the document face down
in the Document Tray (see page
88).
Enter the number of the remote Enter the 4-digit Account Code.
facsimile using any of the fol-
lowing dialing methods.
The facsimile starts scanning
the document into memory.
When document scanning is
complete, the display returns to
the Standby Mode.
Once enabled, the facsimile will
prompt for an Account Code
prior to dialing the remote party.
Adjust the resolution and con-
trast if desired (see page 89).
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing
... See page 97
The entered Account Code will
be printed in the Account Code
column on the Activity Journal.
Abbreviated Dialing
... See page 98
MAY-17-00 WED10:22
SCANNING INTO MEMORY
FILE NBR =
244
Alphabet Dialing
... See page 99
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
RESIDUAL MEMORY 80%
NOTES:
• “Account Code” tracking is
only possible when using
the memory communica-
tions (Memory Transmis-
sion, Polling Receptions,
etc.).
Keypad Dialing
... See page 100
COMM. RESERVATION
COMM. RESERVATION
ACCOUNT CODE =
ENTER ACCOUNT CODE
OR PRESS [START]
• Once entered, an Account
Code is only effective for
that communication proce-
dure. It will automatically
clear upon completion of
the communication, upon
job cancellation, or upon a
communication error.
****
Then press:
NOTE:
It is possible to send a docu-
ment without entering an Ac-
count Code. Simply press
or
.
164
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cover Sheet Registration
This function enables the at-
tachment of a cover sheet to the
document being transmitted.
Display the COVER
SHEET Menu
Enable / Disable the
Cover Sheet
Include an Image on
the Cover Sheet
Load the Image
Document
1
2
3
4
Prior to selecting this function
for the first time, you may wish
to prepare a Cover Sheet image
(Logo) to be used on the cover
sheet. See Step 4 of this proce-
dure.
Load the image document to be
included on the cover sheet.
Press:
Enable or Disable the Cover To include an image (a scanned
Sheet attachment.
company logo, etc.), press:
NOTE:
+
+
+
+
In preparing a document for
your cover sheet image, only
a limited area of the sheet
will be included as shown
below. Any data out of the
specified range will be disre-
garded.
(for ON-Enable)
(for YES)
To omit an image on the cover
sheet, press:
(for OFF-Disable)
8.5 in.
(216 mm)
When “ON” is selected, the fol-
lowing screen is displayed.
(for NO)
Effective
Range
5.9 in.
(150 mm)
WITH IMAGE?
1.YES
2.NO
Feed
Direction
When the document is pulled
into the appropriate position, the
following screen is displayed.
COVER SHEET
1.ON
2.OFF
When “OFF” is selected, the
“OPERATION
COMPLETED”
message will be displayed. Con-
tinue to the final step.
COVER SHEET
Image Area
PRESS [START]
Press:
When scanning is complete, the
facsimile returns to the Standby
Mode.
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chain Dialing
This allows you to dial tele-
phone/facsimile numbers that
may require many digits with
pauses for voice prompts or
variations in number sequences
such as long distance access
codes, or specialized access
lines. You can combine sets of
numbers (Abbreviated Dialing,
Alphabet Dialing, One Touch Di-
aling, and Keypad Dialing) and
pauses in a “Chained” dial se-
quence by using the Chain Dial
Key.
Load the Document
Display the CHAIN
DIAL COMM. Menu
Enter the Dial
Number
Press the START
Key
1
2
3
4
Load the document face down Turn the Flip Panel to the “50- Start constructing your dialing When all the required entries
in the Document Tray (see page 73” view to select the desired sequence using any of the fol- are made, press:
88).
Function Key.
lowing dialing methods. You
may use them consecutively un-
til your entire dialing string has
been entered. After each entry
sequence, the LCD screen dis-
plays the screen shown is step
2.
Press:
Adjust the resolution and con-
trast if desired (see page 89).
The facsimile starts scanning
the document into memory, dis-
playing the screen shown be-
low. When document scanning
is complete, the display returns
to the Standby Mode.
MAY-17-00 WED10:22
CHAIN DIAL COMM.
ENTER TEL NUMBER.
SPEED DIAL KEY OR
ONE TOUCH KEY
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing
... See page 97
If your operation requires paus-
ing for voice prompts, you will
need to insert pause signals be-
tween dial strings.
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
Abbreviated Dialing
... See page 98
Alphabet Dialing
... See page 99
To determine the correct
amount of time for your pauses,
you should perform the opera-
SCANNING INTO MEMORY
FILE NBR =
108
Keypad Dialing
... See page 100
RESIDUAL MEMORY 97%
tion using
first. This
•
Pause Signal
way you will know how many 3-
second pauses will be required.
166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TTI (Transmit Terminal ID) Print
To properly identify the sender of your documents, the DP120F/DP125F prints a transmission header (TTI) on the recording paper of the
remote facsimile. The information included in the TTI are:
Display the TTI
Menu
1
•
Date and Start Time
The date and start time when this document is sent to the remote facsimile.
Press:
•
•
Transmitting Station ID Name (see page 42)
Transmission Serial Number
With each transmission, the DP120F/DP125F automatically assigns a unique transmission number. This number is also printed on the
Activity Journals.
+
+
•
•
Page Number/Total Number of Pages
Each page of the document is printed with a page number followed by the total number of pages in the document (e.g. 001/003 means
the first page of three total pages).
File Number
Each document sent from memory is assigned a file number. This file number is used by the DP120F/DP125F to assist you in managing
multiple document jobs.
+
+
Total Page
Number
Transmission
Serial Number
Date
Transmission
Station ID Name
Page
Number
Start Time
File Number
05-17-2000 10:00 FROM: TOSHIBA
+1-714-583-0000
T-123 P.001/003 F-030
TTI
1.INSIDE
2.OUTSIDE
3.OFF
You can select the following options for your TTI information.
•
•
•
Inside
The document is sent to the receiver with the TTI included in the document data. Accordingly, if any characters exist near the top edge
of the sending data, they may be overlapped with the TTI.
Outside
The document is sent to the receiver with the TTI to be printed outside the sending data. Accordingly, if any characters exist near the top
edge of the sending data, the TTI and the sending data will not overlap in transmission.
Off
IMPORTANT NOTE:
The U.S. Federal Communication Commission (FCC) requires that anyone sending a facsimile message must identify themselves (or
company), give their facsimile telephone number, and provide the date and time of the transmission. This information must be on the lead-
edge of, at least, the first page of the facsimile transmission.
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TTI - continued
Setting Recovery Transmission
Recovery Transmission allows
Display the
Select the TTI Print
Option
Select the Recovery
Transmit Option
Enter the STORED
TIME
2
the operator to re-transmit a
document after failing the ini-
tially specified number of redial
attempts.
1
2
3
RECOVERY
TRANSMIT Menu
Select the TTI Print option.
To select INSIDE, press:
Press:
Select the Recovery Transmit
option.
Enter the stored time length (01
to 24, in unit of hours).
If the Recovery Transmission is
set to ON, the document is
stored in memory for a specified
length of time. You may retrans-
mit the document during this
time period without re-scanning
the original document.
To turn ON Recovery Transmis-
sion, press:
+
+
To select OUTSIDE, press:
To select OFF, press:
Go to Step 3.
To turn OFF Recovery Trans-
mission, press:
+
+
Then press:
Skip the procedure in Step 3.
Your setting is now complete.
The facsimile will display the
same screen shown in Step 3.
When completed, the following
screen is displayed. Press
The display shows the screen
below to indicate that the menu
selection is accepted. To return
to the Standy Mode, press
to return to the Standby
Mode.
.
OPERATION COMPLETED
RECOVERY TRANSMIT
RECOVERY TRANSMIT
OPERATION COMPLETED
1.ON
2.OFF
STORED TIME =(01-24)
06
168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending Recovery Transmission
This operation is used to re-
Display the
Select the Desired
Job
Change the
Facsimile Number
Cancel the
Document
send a document after the docu-
ment initially failed to be sent. If
recovery transmission is set to
ON, the document is stored in
the DP120F/DP125F for resend-
ing.
1
2
3
4
RECOVERY
TRANSMIT Menu
Turn the Flip Panel to the “50-
73” view to select the desired
Function Key.
When the desired job is dis-
played, you have an option to
re-transmit the document or to
permanently delete the job from
memory.
Enter the new facsimile num-
ber.
Press:
Press:
NOTE:
When Recovery Transmis-
sion is set to OFF, an error
tone and “NOT ALLOWED
NOW” LCD prompt result
when Recovery Transmis-
sion is selected.
When Recovery Transmis-
sion is set to ON but no
documents are in the Recov-
ery Queue, a “NO ENTRY”
LCD prompt will result.
CANCEL?
FILE NBR =
1.YES
You can also change the num-
ber of the remote facsimile if di-
aled from the Dial Keypad.
To re-transmit the document or
change the facsimile number,
123
2.NO
Press the
or
is
to view the jobs stored for
resending. The information dis-
played on the LCD display.
press
.
If the correct number is entered,
press:
SINGLE TRANSMIT
1.START
2.CHANGE
1st row
Type of transmission
The transmission starts immedi-
ately if the phone line is avail-
able.
2nd row
ID name or dial number of
the destination
To start the transmission, press:
To change the number, press:
3rd row
Date and time when the
document (file) was stored
into memory
4th row
File number assigned to the
transmission job
RECOVERY TRANSMIT
[ENTER]:START
[CANCEL]:DELETE
[ ]:SEARCH
↑ ↓
TEL NUMBER=(MAX128)
12345
To cancel the document, go to
Step 4.
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending Recovery Transmission - continued
Select the Cancel
Option
5
To delete the selected docu-
ment stored for resending,
press:
To retain the selected document
stored for resending, press:
DELETED
FILE NBR =
123
170
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PIN Mask
Some telephone PBX (Private
Branch Exchange) systems can
track and monitor all outgoing
calls made by a facsimile. This
is done by entering a PIN code
after dialing the destination fac-
simile number.
Load the Document
Enter the Facsimile
Number
Press the MULTI
Key
Enter the PIN
Number
1
2
3
4
Select the Flip Panel “50-73”
view on the Operation Panel.
Enter the number of the remote
facsimile.
Enter the PIN number.
Load the document face down
in the Document Tray (see
page 88).
Press the CHARGE CODE key
to initiate the PIN number se-
quence. A “+” will be displayed
on the LCD display.
The Toshiba DP120F/DP125F
faciliates the telephone PBX
system by masking the PIN en-
tered with a “$” on both the LCD
and TX Reports/Journals.
Adjust the resolution and con-
trast if desired (see page 89).
NOTE:
This feature is limited to key-
pad dialing.
This feature is not available
with Abbreviated, Alphabet,
or One Touch Key dialing.
The PIN number entered is
masked with “$” displayed on
the LCD display.
MAY-17-00 WED20:58
COMM. RESERVATION
COMM. RESERVATION
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
TEL NUMBER=(MAX 128)
17145551212
TEL NUMBER=(MAX 128)
17145551212+
When the entry is complete,
press
.
COMM. RESERVATION
TEL NUMBER=(MAX 128)
17145551212+$$$$$
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disabling ECM Temporarily
If the ECM default setting is set
Display the SET
ECM Menu
Select the ECM
Option
to ON, it is always effective for
communications on your facsim-
ile.
1
2
Press:
Select “2.OFF” by pressing:
You can turn ECM OFF for a
single transmission using this
procedure. The facsimile will au-
tomatically return to its default
status immediately after that
transmission is complete.
+
+
The following screen is dis-
played. You may dial the remote
facsimile for your communica-
tion job. The display will return
to the Standby Mode in about
60 seconds if no keys are
pressed.
NOTE:
If ECM is set to “OFF” in the
default setting procedure,
this procedure is not appli-
cable and the facsimile will
warn you with an error mes-
sage,
NOW.”
“NOT
ALLOWED
SET ECM
1.ON
COMM. RESERVATION
2.OFF
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
172
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
- ADVANCED RECEPTION FUNCTIONS
Privileged Reception
This function prevents your fac-
Display the
Select the Privileged
Reception Option
simile from receiving docu-
ments from unknown parties.
Transmissions to the DP120F/
DP125F are only possible when
the sending facsimile’s terminal
identification or telephone num-
ber match those assigned to
the Abbreviated Dial Numbers
or One Touch Dial Keys on
your facsimile.
1
2
PRIVILEGED RX
Menu
Press:
To turn ON Privileged Recep-
tion, press:
+
+
To turn OFF Privileged Recep-
tion, press:
NOTES:
• Privileged Reception is ef-
fective only on incoming
calls received in the Auto-
matic Reception Mode.
+
+
• Privileged Reception is not
available for polling or
mailbox retrieval requests
from the remote facsimiles.
• For this feature to work,
you must pre-program the
numbers of the facsimiles
in your communication
system into your DP120F/
DP125F’s
Abbreviated
SET PRIVILEGED RX
OPERATION COMPLETED
Number or One Touch Dial
Key database. In addition,
the remote facsimile must
have the correct telephone
number programmed as its
terminal identification.
1.ON
2.OFF
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RTI (Remote Terminal ID) Print
To clearly identify the time, date, and page count of your facsimile receptions, the DP120F/DP125F is
able to print a Reception Footer (RTI) on received documents using the DP120F/DP125F’s internal
clock.
Display the RTI
Menu
Select the RTI Print
Option
1
2
Select the RTI Print option.
To print, press:
Press:
RECEIVED 05-17-2000
Date
10:00
FROM-+81425887449
TO-TOSHIBA
PAGE 001
+
+
Transmitting Station
ID Number
Footer Message
Receiving Station ID
Not to print, press:
Start Time
Page
Number
+
+
NOTES:
•
The Transmitting Station ID Number will only be provided if it is programmed in the remote
facsimile’s Terminal ID.
OPERATION COMPLETED
•
The Receiving Station ID will only be provided if it is programmed in this facsimile’s Terminal ID.
RTI
1.ON
2.OFF
174
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Reception Setting
When the printer becomes unavailable during a document recep-
tion, due to a recording paper jam, toner empty or other error condi-
tion, this facsimile backs up the received data by storing it in
memory.
Display SET
MEMORY RX Menu
Select the Memory
Reception Option
1
2
Press:
Select the Memory Reception
Option.
Once the document is stored in memory, the message “Memory
Reception” is displayed on the LCD display. In addition, the LCD
provides a message to indicate the error that caused the Memory
Reception.
To set the Memory Reception
ON, press:
+
+
MAY-17-00 WED10:22
PAPER EMPTY
RESIDUAL MEMORY 90%
MEMORY RECEPTION
To set the Memory Reception to
OFF, press:
+
+
To retrieve the data stored in memory, simply correct the error con-
dition (such as refill your paper tray with recording paper). Your
document will be printed automatically.
When the setting is complete,
the following screen is dis-
played. To return to the Standby
NOTES:
•
The default setting is ON.
•
When OFF is selected, no receptions will be possible should
the paper supply be exhausted or a paper jam occurs.
Mode, press
.
•
Note that “Memory Reception” will not occur when the re-
sidual memory is zero. When the residual memory becomes
zero during a Memory Reception, document reception will
stop and no further receptions are possible until memory be-
comes available.
SET MEMORY RX
1.ON
OPERATION COMPLETED
2.OFF
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Secure Reception Access Code Setting
There are occasions when you
may wish to secure access to
Display the SECURE
RX Menu
Select the Option
Determine New or
Existing Code
Enter the Current
Security Code
1
2
3
4
incoming documents. Secure
RX allows you to receive docu-
ments to memory until a security
code is entered. This ensures
that only users with the correct
security code may retrieve
documents. In addition, the Se-
cure RX can be setup to auto-
matically be activated during a
specified time period.
Press:
To select a security code for the If the security code already ex- Before you change the security
first time or to change an exist- ists and you wish to change the code, you must enter the exist-
ing security code, press:
current code, go to Step 4.
ing code to gain the access.
Enter the current security code.
+
When you enter a security code
for the first time, go to Step 5.
+
If a new code needs to be en-
tered:
+
To setup Secure RX, a 4-digit
security code must be pro-
grammed first. After program-
ming the security code, you can
specify the time period during
which the Secure RX will be ac-
tive. 24-hour coverage for spe-
cific days of the week is select-
able. This section describes the
procedure for programming a
security code or changing an
existing security code.
If the code already exists:
SECURITY CODE ENTRY
NEW CODE
SECURITY CODE=
+
+
Then press:
Go to Step 5.
SECURITY CODE ENTRY
CURRENT CODE
SECURITY CODE=
If the correct code is entered,
following is displayed.
SECURE RX
01.SECURITY CODE
02.ACTIVITY MODE
SECURITY CODE ENTRY
NEW CODE
SECURITY CODE=
XXXX
176
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Code - cont.
Secure RX Activation Period Setting
This section describes the pro-
Enter a New
Security Code
Display the SECURE
RX Menu
Select the Option
Enter the Security
Code
cedure to setup the DP120F/
DP125F to automatically acti-
vate Secure RX during a speci-
fied time period. Prior to setting
this option, you must have a se-
curity code set in the facsimile.
5
1
2
3
Enter your new 4-digit security
code. The screen shown below
is displayed to confirm your en-
try.
Press:
To set the activity period for Se- Enter the current security code.
cure RX, press:
+
+
+
NOTE:
If a security code is not set,
the DP120F/DP125F auto-
matically prompts the secu-
rity code setting. See the
preceding section for details
on setting the security code.
NOTE:
If a security code is not set,
the DP120F/DP125F auto-
matically prompts the secu-
rity code setting. See the
preceding section for details
+
+
on setting the security code.
Then press:
Then press:
Your security code entry is now
complete. Go to Step 7 of next
section to set your Activity Pe-
riod.
SECURE RX
01.SECURITY CODE
02.ACTIVITY MODE
SECURE RX
SECURE RX
1.ON
2.OFF
SECURITY CODE=
OPERATION COMPLETED
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Secure RX Activation Period Setting - continued
Activate the
Automatic Secure RX
Enter the Start and
End Time
Select 24-HOUR
SECURE RX Option
Set for Each Day
Complete the
Procedure
4
5
6
7
8
To activate automatic Secure
RX during a specified time pe-
riod, press:
Enter the time period (start time
and end time) subject to auto-
matic activation using the fol-
lowing keys.
You can also set Secure RX to To set Secure RX for the entire The following is displayed for 2
ON for an entire 24-hour-period 24-hour-period for the day dis- seconds.
(e.g. Saturdays & Sundays).
played, press:
To set 24-HOUR SECURE RX
for each day, press:
Press
to return to the
To move the entry
point to the left or
right.
Standby Mode.
Go to Step 5.
To not set, Press:
To de-activate automatic Secure
RX during a specified time pe-
riod, press:
OPERATION COMPLETED
To enter the
To bypass setting 24-HOUR
SECURE RX for each day,
press:
desired
nu-
meric value
for each time
digit.
Repeat this step until you select
YES or NO for each day of the
week (up to Sunday).
Then press:
Go to Step 8.
NOTE:
The day of the week is
shown in line #1 of the LCD.
Selecting YES for Monday
means Secure RX will be ac-
tive for the entire 24 hours of
Monday.
To change the time-
of-day forward or
backward when the
12-hour system is
used.
MONDAY
24HR SECURE RX?
1.YES
to return to the Standby Mode.
2.NO
When the start time and end
time or the desired period is dis-
played correctly, press:
SECURE RX
SET SECURE RX
FOR 24HR OPERATION?
1.YES
TIME PERIOD =
22:00 -09:00
2.NO
178
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Secure RX Manual Activation
This section describes the pro-
cedure to manually activate Se-
cure RX.
Select START or
STOP
Display the SECURE
RX Menu
1
2
Turn the Flip Panel to the “50- To manually activate Secure
73” view to select the desired RX, press:
Function Key.
NOTES:
In order to manually activate
Secure RX, you must first
activate Secure RX by going
through the Secure RX Ac-
cess Code setting. (See
page 176).
Press:
The following screen is dis-
played for 2 seconds to confirm
NOTE:
If Secure RX Activation is set
your selection. Then the display
returns to the Standby Mode.
to OFF in the “Secure RX
Activation Period Setting”, an
error will result upon press-
OPERATION COMPLETED
ing
in the operation
above. The message “NOT
ALLOWED NOW” will be dis-
played for 2 seconds, then
the screen returns to the
Standby Mode.
SECURE RX
1.START
2.PRINT
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Secure RX Print
This section describes the pro-
cedure to manually print out
document data received into
memory during Secure RX op-
eration.
Display the SECURE
RX Menu
Select PRINT
Enter the Security
Code
1
2
3
Turn the Flip Panel to the “50-
73” view to select the desired
Function Key.
To print any documents re- Enter the 4-digit security code.
ceived into memory during Se-
cure RX, press:
Press:
SECURE RX
NOTE:
SECURITY CODE=
If Secure RX Activation is set
to OFF in the “Secure RX
Activation Period Setting”, an
error will result upon press-
Then press:
ing
in the operation
The screen below is displayed
for 2 seconds to indicate that
Secure RX Print is selected. If
there are any received docu-
ments in memory, the DP120F/
DP125F will print the docu-
ments automatically upon se-
lecting Secure RX Print.
above. The message “NOT
ALLOWED NOW” will be dis-
played for 2 seconds, then
the screen returns to the
Standby Mode.
SECURE RX
1.START
2.PRINT
OPERATION COMPLETED
180
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
- TRANSMISSION OPTIONS
Delayed Communication (Time Designation)
This function is available to re-
serve a document for transmis-
sion at a programmed time.
Display the
DELAYED COMM.
Menu
Load the Document
Enter the Time and
Date
Enter the Facsimile
Number
1
2
3
4
This function is convenient for
Load the document face down
Enter the time and day-of-
month to start the communica-
tion.
Enter the number of the remote
facsimile using any of the fol-
lowing dialing methods.
Turn the Flip Panel to the “50-
73” view to select the desired
Function Key.
-
TRANSMISSION OPTIONS
making use of non-peak dis-
count telephone rates for do-
mestic and overseas facsimile
transmissions. Delayed commu-
nication can be applied to
Single Transmissions (to trans-
mit a single document to a
specified destination), Multi-ad-
dress (Group) Transmissions,
Mailbox Transmissions, Relay
in the Document Tray (see page
88).
Adjust the resolution and con- Press:
trast if desired (see page 89).
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing
... See page 97
Abbreviated Dialing
... See page 98
Alphabet Dialing
... See page 99
MAY-17-00 WED11:13
DELAYED COMM.
TIME =HH:MM DD
Transmissions,
Communication.
and
Polling
Keypad Dialing
... See page 100
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
You can activate this option
while programming an Abbrevi-
ated Dial Number (page 70) or
One Touch Dial key setting
(page 77) if communication with
the remote party always re-
quires this option. Otherwise,
use the following procedure.
(The cursor moves to the next
right digit as a numeric value is
entered on each digit. Use the
NOTE:
•
If the day-of-month value
entered in Step 2 does
not exist in the current
month, the communica-
tion will start on the first
day of the next month.
For example, if “30” is
entered in February, the
communication will start
on March 1st.
NOTE:
[
] key to backspace and de-
It is not necessary to input a
day-of-month, if you wish the
communication to be com-
pleted within the next 24-
hour period.
lete the values on the digits al-
ready entered.)
Press:
Simply leave the day-of-
month area blank.
COMM. RESERVATION
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communication Report Print
You can request a communica-
Load the Document
Display the TX
REPORT Menu
Select the Option
Enter the Facsimile
Number
tion report every time a docu-
ment is sent. If you desire a
communication report every
time you send a document, set
this function to ON as a default
(see page 195).
1
2
3
4
Load the document face down
in the Document Tray (see page
88).
To set the DP120F/DP125F to Enter the number of the remote
always print a communication facsimile using any of the fol-
report in any condition, press:
Press:
lowing dialing methods.
If you plan to use communica-
tion reports only occasionally,
use this procedure. The TX Re-
port key allows you to obtain a
report for one communication
only.
Adjust the resolution and con-
trast if desired (see page 89).
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing
... See page 97
Abbreviated Dialing
... See page 98
To set the DP120F/DP125F to
only print a communication re-
port when an error condition is
encountered, press:
MAY-17-00 WED11:13
TX REPORT
1.ALWAYS
2.ON ERROR
3.OFF
Alphabet Dialing
... See page 99
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
You can activate this option
while programming an Abbrevi-
ated Dial Number (see page 70)
or One Touch Dial Key setting
(see page 77) if communication
with a specific remote party al-
ways requires this option.
Keypad Dialing
... See page 100
To set the DP120F/DP125F to
never print a communication re-
port, press:
COMM. RESERVATION
RESIDUAL MEMORY 80%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
182
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Priority Transmission
Priority Transmission permits
you to execute a transmission
before any other reserved trans-
mission job.
Load the Document
Display the
PRIORITY TX Menu
Enter the Facsimile
Number
1
2
3
Load the document face down Turn the Flip Panel to the “50- Enter the number of the remote
in the Document Tray (see 73” view to select the desired facsimile using any of the fol-
NOTES:
page 88).
Function Key.
lowing dialing methods.
•
Priority reservation is
good for a Single Trans-
mission only.
Adjust the resolution and con- Press:
trast if desired (see page 89).
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing
... See page 97
•
Only one communication
can be reserved as a Pri-
ority Transmission.
Abbreviated Dialing
... See page 98
Alphabet Dialing
... See page 99
When a transmission is
already reserved as a Pri-
ority Transmission, press-
MAY-17-00 WED11:13
PRIORITY RESERVE
ENTER TEL NUMBER.
SPEED DIAL KEY OR
ONE TOUCH KEY
Keypad Dialing
... See page 100
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
ing
will result in
SCANNING INTO MEMORY
FILE NUMBER = 110
RESIDUAL MEMORY 90%
an error.
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Low Speed Transmission
If communication errors fre-
Load the Document
Display the QUALITY
TX Menu
Select a Speed
Enter the Facsimile
Number
quently occur while transmitting
documents due to bad line con-
ditions, we recommend you to
1
2
3
4
select
a
lower transmission
Load the document face down
in the Document Tray (see page 73” view to select the desired
88).
Function Key.
Turn the Flip Panel to the “50-
Select the desired speed.
To select OFF, press:
Enter the number of the remote
facsimile using any of the fol-
lowing dialing methods or you
may designate another option at
this point.
speed to enable quality trans-
missions. The transmission
speed will be restored to the de-
fault value automatically after
the low speed transmission is
completed.
Adjust the resolution and con- Press:
trast if desired (see page 89).
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing
... See page 97
To select 14400 BPS, press:
To select 9600 BPS, press:
To select 4800 BPS, press:
You can activate this option
while programming an Abbrevi-
ated Dial Number (page 70) or
One Touch Dial Key (page 77) if
communication with a certain
remote party always requires
this option.
Abbreviated Dialing
... See page 98
Alphabet Dialing
... See page 99
MAY-17-00 WED11:13
QUALITY TX
1.OFF
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
2.14400BPS
3. 9600BPS
Keypad Dialing
... See page 100
4. 4800BPS
COMM. RESERVATION
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
184
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dialing with Sub-Address
This function attaches a sub-ad-
Display the SUB
ADDRESS COMM
Menu
Load the Document
Select the Option
Enter the SUB
Address
dress to the standard destina-
tion address in the event the re-
mote party requires one.
1
2
3
4
Load the document face down Turn the Flip Panel to the “50- Select one of the following op- Enter the required SUB address
Three types of sub-addresses
can be used (SUB, SEP, and
PWD); or any combination of
two or three types can be used.
After selecting the desired
types, the transmission to follow
will be sent to the desired ad-
dress using the designated sub-
address.
in the Document Tray (see page 73” view to select the desired tions from the menu.
(max. 20 digits), then press:
88).
Function Key.
To select SUB, press:
Adjust the resolution and con- Press:
trast if desired (see page 89).
The display returns to the
screen at the bottom of Step 2.
You may continue from Step 3
and enter another sub-address
of a different type. To complete
your sub-address entry, select
option “1.COMPLETE” in Step
3.
Go to Step 4.
MAY-17-00 WED11:13
SUB ADDRESS COMM.
To select SEP, press:
You can activate this option
while programming an Abbrevi-
ated Dial Number (page 70) or
One Touch Dial Key (page 77) if
communication with a certain re-
mote party always requires this
option.
1.COMPLETE
2.SUB
3.SEP
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
4.PWD
Go to Step 5.
SUB ADDRESS COMM.
SUB =(MAX20)
To select PWD, press:
If you activate this option using
both the Abbreviated Dial Num-
ber (or One Touch Dial Key)
setting and using this procedure
for the same destination, this
operation will take precedence
over the pre-programmed set-
ting in Abbreviated Dial or One
Touch Dial.
Go to Step 6.
To complete this procedure,
press:
NOTE:
For more information on
when to use SUB/SEP/PWD,
refer to page 75. If you des-
ignate an erroneous or un-
necessary sub-address, the
communication will result in
an error.
Go to Step 7.
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dialing with Sub-Address - continued
Enter the SEP
Address
Enter the PWD
Complete the
Sub-Address Entry
Enter the Facsimile
Number
5
6
7
8
Enter the required SEP address
(max. 20 digits), then press:
When the sub-address data has
been entered, the following is
displayed.
Enter the number of the remote
facsimile using any of the fol-
lowing dialing methods or you
may designate another option at
this point.
Enter the required PWD (max.
20 digits), then press:
COMM. RESERVATION
The display returns to the
screen at the bottom of Step 2.
You may continue from Step 3
and enter another sub-address
of a different type. To complete
your sub-address entry, select
option “1.COMPLETE” in step 3.
The display returns to the
screen at the bottom of Step 2.
You may continue from Step 3
and enter another sub-address
of a different type. To complete
your sub-address entry, select
option “1.COMPLETE” in Step
3.
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing
... See page 97
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
Abbreviated Dialing
... See page 98
Alphabet Dialing
... See page 99
Keypad Dialing
... See page 100
SUB ADDRESS COMM.
SEP =(MAX20)
SUB ADDRESS COMM.
PWD =(MAX20)
186
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Attaching or Printing a Cover Sheet
This function attaches a cover
Load the Document
Display the COVER
SHEET Menu
Select the Option
Enter the Remote
Party’s Name
sheet to the document to be
transmitted or prints the cover
sheet for confirmation purposes.
1
2
3
4
Prior to using this cover sheet
feature, the Cover Sheet func-
tion must be set to ON. For
more information see
165.
To attach a cover sheet, press:
Select the direct function access
view on the Operation Panel.
Enter the name of the remote
party.
Load the document face down
in the Document Tray (see page
88).
page
Press:
See page 37 for more informa-
tion on Character Entry.
Adjust the resolution and con-
trast if desired (see page 89).
NOTES:
Then press:
• When sending multi-ad-
dress transmissions, the
cover sheet will be attached
to the document for every
address.
ENTER REMOTE NAME
MAY-17-00 WED11:13
COVER SHEET
1.SEND
2.PRINT
• TTI will not be printed on
the cover sheet.
ENTER YOUR NAME
RESIDUAL MEMORY 99%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
Go to Step 4.
• Smart Batch is not available
if this function is used.
To print a cover sheet, press:
• When re-sending a docu-
ment due to an error, the
cover sheet is again at-
tached to the retransmis-
sion.
When the printing is complete,
the display returns to the
Standby Mode.
• In Transmission Reports
and Journals, the number of
pages of each transmission
includes the cover sheet.
• When a Transmission Re-
port is issued with the docu-
ment image output, the first
page data of the facsimile
will be printed but not the
cover page data.
• The cover sheet is always
sent in Letter size.
• The resolution for the cover
sheet is fixed to FINE. How-
ever, if the receiving unit is
set to STD, the cover sheet
is sent in STD.
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Attaching or Printing a Cover Sheet - continued
Enter the Sender’s
Name
Enter the Facsimile
Number
5
6
Cover Sheet Format
Enter your name.
Enter the number of the remote
facsimile using any of the follow-
ing dialing methods.
Your Station ID (if preset; max. 40 characters)
See page 37 for more informa-
tion on Character Entry.
Remote Station ID (printed when preset to the Abbrevi-
ated Dial Number or One Touch Dial Key used for dial-
ing). Max. 20 characters
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing
... See page 97
Then press:
Abbreviated Dialing
... See page 98
FACSIMILE MESSAGE
Cover Page Title (fixed)
Alphabet Dialing
... See page 99
Date this document was re-
served
MAY-17-2000
*** RE-TRANSMISSION ***
COMM. RESERVATION
Subtitle printed for retransmis-
sion only
Keypad Dialing
... See page 100
RESIDUAL MEMORY 99%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
TO
: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST
(ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR )
Remote Name which was en-
tered using this operation
Dialed Facsimile Number (first
38 digits)
FAX NUMBER :
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Your Name which was entered
using this operation
FROM
: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
(ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR )
Your Facsimile Number (max. 20
digits).
FAX NUMBER : 12345678901234567890
Number of document pages to
be transmitted
TOTAL PAGE
00
PA
- Image Data Area -
(The image here may be your company logo, etc. It can be preset by
scanning, using the Cover Sheet Function setting operation on page 165. If
no image is scanned for this purpose, this area is left blank.)
188
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Line Selection
This option allows you to select
the phone line to be used for a
transmission if this facsimile is
equipped with the 2nd Line
Board.
Load the Document
Display the TEL
LINE SELECT Menu
Select the Desired
Option
Enter the Facsimile
Number
1
2
3
4
Load the document face down Turn the Flip Panel to the “50-
in the Document Tray (see page 73” view to select the desired
Enter the number of the remote
facsimile using any of the fol-
lowing dialing methods or you
may designate another option at
this point.
Select the desired option.
You can activate this option
when programming an Abbrevi-
ated Dial Number (see page 70)
or One Touch Dial Key (see
page 77) if the communication
with a certain remote party al-
ways requires this option.
To not select a specific line,
press:
88).
Function Key.
Adjust the resolution and con- Press:
trast if desired (see page 89).
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing
... See page 97
APR-15-00 SAT11:13
Alphabet Dialing
... See page 98
To select Line 1, press:
NOTE:
If no Line 2 Board is in-
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
NOTE:
Abbreviated Dialing
... See page 99
Line 2 is available for trans-
mission if Line 2 has been
set for Transmission/Recep-
tion (see page 69). In addi-
tion, if Line 2 is set for recep-
tion only with timer, trans-
missions are only possible
when the timer has expired.
stalled, an error prompt will
result from this application.
Keypad Dialing
... See page 100
To select Line 2, press:
TEL LINE SELECT
1.FIRST AVAILABLE
2.LINE #1
3.LINE #2
COMM. RESERVATION
RESIDUAL MEMORY 80%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enabling or Disabling Send After Scan Temporarily
With the Send After Scan Mode
Load the Document
Display the SEND
AFTER SCAN Menu
Select the Send After Scan Option
Default Setting set to “OFF”, this
feature allows you enable the
Send After Scan mode for a
single transmission. Once that
transmission is complete, the
default status is regained.
1
2
3
Load the document face down
in the Document Tray (see page
88).
Turn the Flip Panels to the “50- Select the desired Send After To enable Send After Scan,
73” view to select the desired Scan Option.
Function Key.
press:
Adjust the resolution and con-
trast if desired (see page 89).
To disable Send After Scan,
press:
With Send After Scan selected,
every page of the doument will
be scanned into memory before
dialing will begin.
Press:
WHEN MEMORY FULL
1. DELETE SCAN PAGES
2. SEND SCAN PAGES
With Send After Scan set to NO
(off), your DP120F/DP125F will
begin dialing after the first page
is scanned to memory.
The following screen is dis-
played. You may dial the remote
facsimile for your communica-
tion job. The display will return
to the Standby Mode in about
60 seconds if no keys are
pressed.
MAY-17-00 WED11:13
SEND AFTER SCAN
1.YES
2.NO
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
Go to Step 4.
OPERATION COMPLETED
After 2 seconds:
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
Go to Step 5.
190
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enabling or Disabling Send After Scan Temporarily - contined
Select the Memory
Full Option
Enter the Facsimile
Number
4
5
Select the desired Memory Full Enter the number of the remote
Option.
facsimile using any of the fol-
lowing dialing methods.
To delete the pages being
scanned, press:
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing
... See page 97
Abbreviated Dialing
... See page 98
To send the pages being
scanned, press:
Alphabet Dialing
... See page 99
Keypad Dialing
... See page 100
The following screen is dis-
played. You may now dial the
remote facsimile for your com-
munication job. The display will
return to the Standby Mode in
about 60 seconds if no keys are
pressed.
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Page Count
When this function is set to ON,
the designated number of pages
Load the Document
Display the PAGE
NUMBER Menu
Enter the Number of
Document Pages
Enter the Facsimile
Number
1
2
3
4
will be printed at the top of the
recording paper at the remote
station. This function is effective
for a Direct Document Trans-
mission only. (The total number
of pages will be printed auto-
matically as part of the TTI in
Memory Transmissions.)
Press:
Enter the number of document
pages (1 to 999).
Load the document face down
in the Document Tray (see page
88).
Enter the number of the remote
facsimile using any of the fol-
lowing dialing methods or you
may designate another option at
this point.
+
+
Adjust the resolution and con-
trast if desired (see page 89).
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing
... See page 97
This setting is very helpful for
confirming that all of the pages
loaded into the feeder have
been successfully sent.
MAY-17-00 WED11:13
Alphabet Dialing
... See page 98
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
Abbreviated Dialing
... See page 99
It will also assist the recipient to
track the number of pages as it
will add a page count to a the
TTI at the top of your transmit-
ted pages (i.e., 1/5, 2/5, 3/5,
etc.).
PAGE NUMBER
Keypad Dialing
... See page 100
The press:
PAGE NUMBER =(1-999)
The facsimile will compare the
number of pages actually sent
with the number you entered.
COMM. RESERVATION
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
192
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Line Monitor
This function is used to set the
facsimile’s speaker ON in order
to monitor the phone line for one
communication only. This func-
tion is mainly used to confirm di-
aling and phone line status.
Load the Document
Display the LINE
MONITOR Menu
Select the Option
Enter the Facsimile
Number
1
2
3
4
Press:
Load the document face down
in the Document Tray (see
page 88).
Turn ON the monitor speaker by
pressing:
Enter the number of the remote
facsimile using any of the fol-
lowing dialing methods or you
may designate another option at
this point.
You can activate this option
when programming an Abbrevi-
ated Dial Number (page 70) or
One Touch Dial Key (page 77) if
communication with a certain re-
mote party always requires this
option.
+
+
Adjust the resolution and con-
trast if desired (see page 89).
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing
... See page 97
COMM. RESERVATION
Abbreviated Dialing
... See page 98
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
Alphabet Dialing
... See page 99
LINE MONITOR
1.ON
2.OFF
MAY-17-00 WED11:13
Keypad Dialing
... See page 100
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security Transmission
This function prevents your fac-
simile from sending to an incor-
Load the Document
Display the SET
SECURITY TX Menu
Select the Option
Enter the Facsimile
Number
1
2
3
4
rectly dialed phone. With this
function set ON, the dialed num-
ber will be checked against the
remote facsimile’s programmed
Transmit Terminal ID (TTI). The
transmission will only occur if
the number dialed matches the
remote party’s number.
Press:
Load the document face down
in the Document Tray (see
page 88).
Turn ON Security Transmission
by pressing:
Enter the number of the remote
facsimile using any of the fol-
lowing dialing methods or you
may designate another option
at this point.
+
+
Adjust the resolution and con-
trast if desired (see page 89).
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing
... See page 97
NOTE:
Abbreviated Dialing
... See page 98
To change the default set-
ting of this function, refer to
page 91. The status selec-
tion in this operation will take
precedence over the default
setting.
Alphabet Dialing
... See page 99
COMM. RESERVATION
Keypad Dialing
... See page 100
MAY-17-00 WED11:13
SET SECURITY TX
1.ON
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
RESIDUAL MEMORY 100%
ENTER TEL NUMBER
2.OFF
194
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LISTS AND REPORTS - LIST AND REPORT OPTIONS SETTING
This facsimile allows the operator to set various options regarding the lists and reports listed below.
Reception Journal Settings
JOURNAL
Display the
JOURNAL Menu
Select the Desired
Option
1
2
There are two types of Journals available on the DP120F/DP125F. Both the Transmission Journal (TX
Journal) and Reception Journal (RX Journal) list the 150 most recent transactions. Journals can be
printed either Automatically or Manually. When manually printed,
must be pressed. To select the
Press:
To configure the type of Journal
to print when
press:
is used,
type of Journal to print when
section.
is pressed, complete manual Journal printing discussed in this
+
+
+
+
+
COMMUNICATION REPORT
Communication Report allows you to print a report after every transmission. Reports can be printed
automatically or manually. When printing automatically, you can designate to print a report for every
transmission or only when an error has occurred during the transmission.
In addition, you have the option of printing the first page image of the fax document on the report to
facilitate identification.
Go to Step 3.
To set automatic printing, press:
+
To setup the Communication Report, go to pages 197 to 203.
Go to Step 4.
RECEPTION LIST
The DP120F/DP125F will print a reception list under the following conditions:
•
Reservation to Local Mailbox
When reserving a document to a Mailbox within the DP120F/DP125F locally, a reception list is
printed.
If Manual is selected:
01.MANUAL
02.AUTO
MANUAL OUTPUT
1.TX & RX JOURNAL
2.TX JOURNAL
•
•
Remote Mailbox
When reserving a document to a Mailbox within the DP120F/DP125F remotely from another fac-
simile, a reception list is printed at the DP120F/DP125F.
3.RX JOURNAL
Relay Station Reception
When the DP120F/DP125F is setup as a relay hub and receives a relay transmission from an
originator, a reception list is printed.
If Automatic is selected:
AUTOMATIC JOURNAL
1.ON
2.OFF
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reception Journal Settings - continued
MANUAL OUTPUT Options
AUTOMATIC JOURNAL Options
3
4
Select the desired option.
To print both TX and RX Jour-
After completing the Reception
Journal Setting, you may con-
tinue to select other Report set-
tings referring to their associ-
ated pages for instruction, or
press
Press the following key to setup
automatic printing of the TX and
RX Journals whenever 150
transactions have taken in
place.
After completing the Reception
Journal Setting, you may con-
tinue to select other Report set-
tings referring to their associ-
ated pages for instruction, or
press
nal when
press:
is used,
To turn ON Automatic printing of
journal, press:
To print only a TX Journal
when is used, press:
to exit the Report Setting mode
and return to the Standby Mode.
to exit the Report Setting mode
and return to the Standby Mode.
To turn OFF Automatic printing
of journal, press:
To print a RX Journal when
is used, press:
The following screen is dis-
played to confirm your selection.
OPERATION COMPLETED
The following screen is dis-
played to confirm your selec-
tion.
OPERATION COMPLETED
196
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Direct Transmission Report Setting
Display the SET TX
REPORT Menu
Select the Option for
Direct Transmissions
Select the Option for A5 SIZE PRINT
1
2
3
Select the desired printing option To reduce the report size and After completing the Direct
Press:
for non-memory, direct transmis- print on A5 size paper, press:
sions.
Transmission Report Setting,
you may continue to select
other Report settings referring to
their associated pages for in-
struction, or press
+
+
+
+
+
+
To ALWAYS print a Transmis-
sion Report whenever a docu-
To print the report normally,
press:
ment is transmitted, press:
To only print a Transmission Re-
port when an error has occurred,
press:
NOTES:
to exit the Report Setting mode
and return to the Standby Mode.
•
To print the report on A5
size paper, the A5 size
paper must be loaded to
the Bypass Tray (option
for DP120F) in portrait,
and the recording paper
size must also be set to
“OTHERS.”
To turn OFF automatic printing of
Transmission Reports, press:
•
If no paper is loaded in
the Bypass Tray, the re-
port will be printed from
another tray.
The following screen is dis-
played to confirm your selection.
SET TX REPORT
1.ALWAYS
A5 SIZE PRINT
1.ON
2.ON ERROR
3.OFF
2.OFF
OPERATION COMPLETED
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Transmission Report Setting
Display the
Select the Option for
Memory TX
Set the Option for
First Page Image
Select the Option for A5 SIZE PRINT
1
2
3
4
MEMORY-TX
REPORT Menu
Press:
Select the desired printing option To print a first page image of the
for single location memory trans- facsimile document on the
After completing the Memory
To reduce the report size and
print on A5 size paper, press:
Transmission Report Setting,
you may continue to select
other Report settings referring
to their associated pages for in-
struction, or press
missions.
Transmission Report, press:
+
+
+
+
+
+
To ALWAYS print a Transmis-
sion Report whenever a docu-
ment is transmitted, press:
To print the report normally,
press:
To not print a first page image of
the facsimile document on the
Transmission Report, press:
To only print a Transmission Re-
port when an error has occurred,
press:
NOTES:
to exit the Report Setting mode
and return to the Standby
Mode.
•
To print the report on the
A5 size paper, the A5
size paper must be load-
ed to the Bypass Tray
(option for DP120F) in
portrait, and the record-
ing paper size must also
be set to “OTHERS.”
A5 SIZE PRINT
1.ON
2.OFF
To turn OFF automatic printing of
Transmission Reports, press:
•
If no paper is loaded in
the Bypass Tray, the re-
port will be printed from
another tray.
The following screen is dis-
played to confirm your selection.
SET MEMORY-TX REPORT
1.ALWAYS
PRINT 1ST PG IMAGE?
1.ON
2.ON ERROR
3.OFF
2.OFF
OPERATION COMPLETED
198
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multi-Address Transmission Report Setting
Display the
Select the Option for
Multi-Address TX
Set the Option for
First Page Image
1
2
3
MULTI-ADD
REPORT Menu
Press:
Select the desired option for To print a first page image of
Multi-address Transmission Re- the document on the transmis-
ports.
sion report, press:
+
+
+
+
+
+
To ALWAYS print a Transmis-
sion Report whenever a docu-
ment is transmitted, press:
To not print a first page image
of the document on the trans-
mission report, press:
To only print a Transmission Re-
port when an error has occurred,
press:
The following screen is dis-
played to confirm your selection.
OPERATION COMPLETED
To turn off automatic printing of
Transmission Reports, press:
After completing the Mult-Ad-
dress Transmission Report Set-
ting, you may continue to select
other Report settings referring to
their associated pages for in-
struction, or press
SET MULTI-ADD REPORT
1.ALWAYS
PRINT 1ST PG IMAGE?
1.ON
2.ON ERROR
3.OFF
2.OFF
to exit the Report Setting mode
and return to the Standby Mode.
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multi-Polling Report Setting
Display the
Multi-polling Report Options
1
2
MULTI POLL
REPORT Menu
Press:
Select the desired option for
Multi-polling Reports.
After completing the Multi-poll-
ing Report Setting, you may
continue to select other Report
settings referring to their associ-
ated pages for instruction, or
press
To ALWAYS print
a
report
+
+
+
+
+
+
whenever a document is trans-
mitted, press:
To only print a report when an
error has occurred, press:
to exit the Report Setting mode
and return to the Standby Mode.
To turn OFF automatic printing
of this report, press:
The following screen is dis-
played to confirm your selection.
SET MULTIPOLL REPORT
1.ALWAYS
OPERATION COMPLETED
2.ON ERROR
3.OFF
200
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relay Originator Report Setting
Display the RELAY
ORG. REPORT Menu
Select the Option for
Relay Originator
Set the Option for
First Page Image
1
2
3
Press:
Select the desired option to print To print a first page image of the
a report whenever a Relay trans- facsimile document on the trans-
mission is sent.
mission report, press:
+
+
+
+
+
+
NOTE:
This is only applicable if the
DP120F/DP125F is used as
an Originator for a relay trans-
mission (see page 134).
To not print a first page image of
the facsimile document on the
transmission report, press:
To ALWAYS print a report when-
ever a document is transmitted,
press:
The following screen is dis-
played to confirm your selection.
To only print a report when an er-
ror has occurred, press:
OPERATION COMPLETED
To turn OFF Automatic printing of
reports, press:
After completing the Relay
Originator Report Setting, you
may continue to select other
Report settings referring to their
associated pages for instruction,
or press
SET RELAY ORG. REPT.
1.ALWAYS
PRINT 1ST PG IMAGE?
1.ON
2.ON ERROR
3.OFF
2.OFF
to exit the Report Setting mode
and return to the Standby Mode.
201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relay Station Transmission Report Setting
Display the RELAY
STN. REPORT Menu
Set the Option for
Relay Hub Station
Set the Option for
First Page Image
1
2
3
Press:
Select the option to print a re-
To print a first page image of the
port when the DP120F/DP125F document, press:
is used as a relay hub station.
This report is printed by the hub
unit after a relay transmission to
end terminals.
+
+
+
+
+
+
To not print a first page image of
the document, press:
To ALWAYS print
press:
a
report,
To only print a report when an
error has occurred, press:
The following screen is dis-
played to confirm your selection.
OPERATION COMPLETED
To turn OFF automatic printing
of reports, press:
After completing the Relay Sta-
tion Transmission Report Set-
ting, you may continue to select
other Report settings referring to
their associated pages for in-
struction, or press
Go to Step 12.
SET RELAY STN. REPT.
1.ALWAYS
PRINT 1ST PG IMAGE?
1.ON
2.ON ERROR
3.OFF
2.OFF
to exit the Report Setting mode
and return to the Standby Mode.
202
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relay Destination Report Setting
Display the RELAY
DEST. REPORT Menu
Select the Option
for End Terminal
Set the Option for
First Page Image
1
2
3
To send a first page image of
the facsimile document, press:
Press:
Select the desired option to
send a Relay result report to the
Originator terminal when this
DP120F/DP125F is the hub unit
used in a relay transmission.
This is only applicable if the
DP120F/DP125F is used as a
Hub unit for the relay transmis-
sion.
+
+
+
+
+
+
To not send a first page image
of the facsimile document,
press:
To ALWAYS send a report to
the Originator, press:
The following screen is dis-
played to confirm your selection.
To only send a report when an
error has occurred, press:
OPERATION COMPLETED
To turn OFF Automatic sending
of report, press:
After completing the Relay Des-
tination Report Setting, you may
continue to select other Report
settings referring to their associ-
ated pages for instruction, or
press
SET RELAY END REPORT
1.ALWAYS
PRINT 1ST PG IMAGE?
1.ON
2.ON ERROR
3.OFF
2.OFF
to exit the Report Setting mode
and return to the Standby Mode.
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reception List Settings
Display the
RECEPTION LIST
Menu
Select the Job for
Reception List
LOCAL MAILBOX
LIST
REMOTE MAILBOX
LIST
RELAY RECEPTION
LIST
1
2
3
4
5
Press:
Select the desired option.
When “1.LOCAL MAILBOX” is
selected in Step 2, the following
screen displays.
When “3.RELAY” is selected in
Step 2, the following screen dis-
plays.
When “2.REMOTE MAILBOX”
is selected in Step 2, the follow-
ing screen displays.
To select the LOCAL MAIL-
BOX, press:
+
+
+
+
LOCAL MAILBOX LIST
1.ON
2.OFF
REMOTE MAILBOX LIST
1.ON
2.OFF
RELAY RECEPTION LIST
1.ON
2.OFF
+
Go to Step 3.
To turn ON, press:
To turn OFF, press:
To turn ON, press:
To turn OFF, press:
To turn ON, press:
To turn OFF, press:
To select the REMOTE MAIL-
BOX, press:
+
Go to Step 4.
To select the RELAY, press:
01.LOCAL MAILBOX
02.REMOTE MAILBOX
03.RELAY
OPERATION COMPLETED
OPERATION COMPLETED
OPERATION COMPLETED
+
Go to Step 5.
204
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
- LIST AND REPORT PRINT FORMAT AND PRINTING PROCEDURE
Transmission/Reception Journal (Communication Journal)
Transmission/Reception Journal
shows the result of each com-
munication for up to the past
150 transmissions/receptions.
Facsimile/Telephone Number
“TO” is replaced with “FROM”
of this facsimile unit, Line 1
in a RECEPTION JOURNAL
Facsimile/Telephone Number
of this facsimile unit, Line 2
Machine Counter
Information
Time of output of this
list or report
List/Report Name
Printing Procedure
TRANSMISSION JOURNAL
Auto Print (available if pro-
grammed; see page 195):
PAGE
TIME
:001
: MAY-17-00 14:25
Your Station’s
ID Name
TEL NUMBER1:12345678901234567890
TEL NUMBER2:12345678901234567890
NAME
SCAN COUNT :1234 (000004D2)
PRINT COUNT:2345 (00000929)
DRUM COUNT :3456 (00000D80)
Printing will automatically
start whenever 150 transmis-
sions (or 150 receptions) are
completed.
:ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234
NBR. FILE NBR
001 020
DATE
TIME
DURATION PGS
59/59 099
TO
+1234567890
DEPT NBR
01
ACCOUNT MODE
9999 G3 502 P
STATUS
NG 20
Manual Print (always available;
see page 196):
MAY-17 14:01
VERY IMPORTANT:
Up to date Activity Journals
must be maintained by the
user. In the event an elec-
tronic circuit board must be
replaced in this unit, informa-
tion pertaining to Scan, Print,
and Drum counters must be
entered into the replacement
electronic circuit board. This
information is listed at the
top of every journal.
Date and Time the
communication
started
Remote Station’s
Account No.
Serial No.
Error Code
Fax/Telephone Num-
ber (“ ” is alternate
number or sub-ad-
dress dial was used.)
(printed only when the
Account Number op-
tion is ON and used)
(lists the trans-
missions in the
order they took
place)
Result:
OK (successful)
NG (failure)
Length of each
transaction:
Minutes/Seconds
P
= Polling
SR, R = Relay Communication
SB = Mailbox Communication
Communication Mode
G3 = G3
EC = ECM
EX
Number of Pages
1st
2nd
3rd
(bps) (Resolution) (Mode)
Department No.
= ECM with shortened
protocol
File No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
2400
4800
7200
9600
12000 16x15.4
14400
8x3.85
8x7.7
8x15.4
-
MH
MR
MMR
JBIG
(indicates the depart-
ment responsible for
this transmission job;
printed only when the
Department Control
option is ON)
(assigned to all com-
munication jobs at the
time of scanning)
HW, HR= RDC communication
(“ ” is 2nd line communication)
V.34
300dpi
205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transmission/Reception Journal (Communication Journal) - continued
Manual Print
Display the PRINT
NUMBER Menu
Select the Option
Printing will start when
1
2
is pressed with no
document loaded in the
Document Tray.
Turn the Flip Panel to the “50-
73” view to select the desired
Function Key.
Select one of the following op-
erations from the menu.
To print the 50 communication
Journal, press:
Press:
PRINT NUMBER
1.1-50 (1 PAGE)
2.1-100 (2 PAGES)
3.1-150 (3 PAGES)
To print the 100 communication
Journal, press:
To print the 150 communication
Journal, press:
206
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transmission Report
This is the result report printed
after a Direct Transmission (a
job transmitted directly from the
document feeder instead of
from memory).
TRANSMISSION REPORT
Printing Procedure
PAGE
TIME
:001
:MAY-17-00 14:25
TEL NUMBER1:12345678901234567890
TEL NUMBER2:12345678901234567890
Auto Print (if programmed, see
page 197):
NAME
:ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234
Printing will automatically
start after a transmission is
completed.
NBR. FILE NBR DATE
TIME
DURATION PGS
TO
DEPT NBR ACOUNT
MODE
STATUS
NG 20
001 020 MAY-17 14:01
00/58
002
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST
G3 512
The print format is the same as that for the Transmission Journal on the preceding page except that the record of the
only last transmission job is issued in a Transmission Report.
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Transmission Report
This is the result report printed
after a Memory Transmission.
(A job transmitted after the
document is first scanned into
memory.)
MEMORY TRANSMISSION REPORT
PAGE
TIME
:001
:MAY-17-00 14:25
Printing Procedure
TEL NUMBER1:12345678901234567890
TEL NUMBER2:12345678901234567890
NAME
:ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234
Auto Print (if programmed, see
page 198):
FILE NUMBER
DATE
: 070
Printing will automatically
start after a transmission is
completed.
: MAY-17 14:18
: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST
: 02
TO
DOCUMENT PAGES
START TIME
END TIME
SENT PAGES
STATUS
: MAY-17 14:20
: MAY-17 14:23
: 02
: OK
File Number of the transmission job
Date and time when the job is accepted
Remote Party’s Name or Facsimile/Tele-
phone Number
Number of pages input to memory
Time when the transmission started
Time when the transmission ended (the
time when a Recovery Transmission is
designated)
Number of pages transmitted normally
Transmission result
208
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reservation List
This is a listing of the communi-
cation jobs now reserved in
memory.
RESERVATION LIST
PAGE
TIME
:001
:MAY-17-00 14:25
Printing Procedure
TEL NUMBER1:12345678901234567890
TEL NUMBER2:12345678901234567890
NAME
:ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234
Manual Print
Turn the Flip Panel to the “50-
73” view to select the desired
Function Key.
TX/RX
FILE NBR FUNCTION
PGS MAIL DATE
TIME
TO
001
MULTI TX
003
MAY-16 11:55 TEL NBR:123456789012345678901234567890
1234567890
ABB.NBR:001 002 003 004 005 006 007
GROUP :0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006
MAY-16 22:50 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST
OT NBR :01
Press:
005
009
010
POLLING RX
RELAY STATION
MULTIPOLLING
001
MAY-16 22:25 GROUP :1001 1002 1999
POLLING/FAX MAILBOX FILE NBR FUNCTION
961 POLLING
PGS MAIL DATE
TIME
TO
TO
099 MAY-13 17:30
RECOVERY TX
PC JOB
FILE NBR FUNCTION
PGS MAIL DATE
TIME
970
SINGLE TX MAY-15
14:20 123-4567
FILE NBR FUNCTION
PGS MAIL DATE
TIME
TO
Box Number
(in case of Mailbox
communication)
Destination
(Name or Dial Number of the
Remote Party)
Type of
communication
File Number of the
communication
Designated Time, or
Time of Reception
Number of Pages
209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multi-Address Transmission Report
This is the result report printed
after a Multi-address Transmis-
sion.
MULTI TRANSMISSION REPORT
PAGE
TIME
:001
:MAY-17-00 14:25
Printing Procedure
TEL NUMBER1:
TEL NUMBER2:
12345678901234567890
12345678901234567890
NAME
:
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234
Auto Print (if programmed; see
FILE NUMBER
DATE
: 005
page 199):
: MAY-17 14:18
: 15
Printing will automatically
start after all transmissions
in the operation have been
completed successfully or
unsuccessfully.
DOCUMENT PAGES
START TIME
END TIME
: MAY-17 10:56
: MAY-17 14:18(RECOVERY TIME:MAY-17 14:18)
SUCCESSFUL
GROUP NUMBER
0001
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST
ABB. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008
009 010
OT
02
05
ONE TOUCH NUMBER
01
TSRQRPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA
12345678901234567890
TEL NUMBER
UNSUCCESSFUL
SENT PAGES
GROUP NUMBER
0002
AABBCCDDEEFFGGHHIIJJ
0T
33
AAABBBCCCDDDEEEFFFGG
01
Receiver where an error occurred
SENT PAGES ... Number of pages sent normally
Receiver where the transmission was completed normally
210
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multi-Polling Report
This is the result report printed
after a Multi-polling Reception.
MULTI POLLING REPORT
PAGE
TIME
TEL NUMBER1:
TEL NUMBER2:
:001
:MAY-17-00 14:25
Printing Procedure
12345678901234567890
12345678901234567890
NAME
:
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234
Auto Print (if programmed, see
FILE NUMBER
DATE
:
:
:
:
:
005
page 200):
MAY-17 14:18
15
Printing will automatically
start after all polling opera-
tions have been completed
successfully or unsuccess-
fully.
DOCUMENT PAGES
START TIME
END TIME
MAY-17 10:56
MAY-17 14:18
(RECOVERY TIME:MAY-17 14:18)
SUCCESSFUL
GROUP NUMBER
0001
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST
ABB. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008
009 010
OT
02 05
ABB. NUMBER
014
HONG KONG OFFICE
TEL NUMBER
1234567890123456789
UNSUCCESSFUL
PAGES
SENT
GROUP NUMBER
0002
AABBCCDDEEFFGGHHIIJJ
0T
33 AAABBBCCCDDDEEEFFFGG
01
Receiver where an error occurred
SENT PAGES ... Number of pages sent normally
Receiver where the transmission was completed normally
211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relay Transmission Originator Report
This is the result report the
Originating Terminal prints after
a Relay Transmission.
RELAY TX ORIGINATOR TERMINAL REPORT
PAGE
TIME
:001
:MAY-17-00 14:25
Printing Procedure
TEL NUMBER1:12345678901234567890
TEL NUMBER2:12345678901234567890
NAME
:ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234
Auto Print (if programmed, see
page 201):
FILE NUMBER
DATE
:
:
:
:
:
009
MAY-17 10:55
15
Printing will automatically
start after the originating sta-
tion transmits to all of the
assigned relay stations, suc-
cessfully or unsuccessfully.
DOCUMENT PAGES
START TIME
END TIME
MAY-17 10:56
MAY-17 14:18
(RECOVERY TIME:MAY-17 14:10)
SUCCESSFUL
GROUP NUMBER
0012
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST
OT
01 02
ABB. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008
009 010
UNSUCCESSFUL
GROUP NUMBER
0014
SENT PAGES
01
AABBCCDDEEFFGGHHIIJJ
0T
03 AAABBBCCCDDDEEEFFFGG
ABB. 011 123-45678901234567890123456789
012 SEATTLE PLANT
14
09
Each Relay Group to which the Relay Transmission was not completed
SENT PAGES ... Number of pages sent normally
Each Relay Group to which the Relay Transmission was performed successfully
Group Number, Relay Station Name or Number, End Terminal One Touch or Abbreviated Dial Numbers
NOTE:
The format sample above is obtained when a Relay Transmission was performed with Group designations.
When a Relay Transmission is performed with individual designations, the Group Number print is skipped.
212
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relay Transmission Relay Station Report
This is the Relay Station result
report, output by the Relay Sta-
tion and printed after a Relay
Transmission
RELAY TX RELAY STATION REPORT
PAGE
TIME
:001
:MAY-17-00 14:25
TEL NUMBER1:12345678901234567890
TEL NUMBER2:12345678901234567890
Printing Procedure
NAME
:ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234
FILE NUMBER
DATE
:
:
:
:
:
011
Auto Print (if programmed, see
page 202):
MAY-17 10:55
15
DOCUMENT PAGES
START TIME
END TIME
Printing will automatically
start after the relay station in
a relay operation completes
all of the transmissions as-
signed to it, successfully or
unsuccessfully.
MAY-17 10:56
MAY-17 14:18 (RECOVERY TIME:MAY-17 15:18)
SUCCESSFUL
GROUP NUMBER
0012
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST
OT
02 03
ABB. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008
009 010
UNSUCCESSFUL
ONE TOUCH NUMBER
01
PAGES SENT
000
AABBCCDDEEFFGGHHIIJJ
Each Relay Group to which the Relay Transmission was not completed
SENT PAGES ... Number of pages sent normally
Each Relay Group to which the Relay Transmission was performed successfully
Group Number, Relay Station Name or Number, End Terminal One Touch or Abbreviated Dial Numbers
NOTE:
The format sample above is obtained when a Relay Transmission was performed with Group designations.
When a Relay Transmission is performed with individual designations, the Group Number print is skipped.
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relay Transmission End Terminal Report
This is the End Terminal result
report sent from the Relay Sta-
tion to the Originating Terminal
and printed by the Originating
Terminal.
RELAY TX END TERMINAL REPORT
PAGE
TIME
:001
:MAY-17-00 14:25
TEL NUMBER1:12345678901234567890
TEL NUMBER2:12345678901234567890
Printing Procedure
NAME
:ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234
FILE NUMBER
DATE
:
:
:
:
:
013
Auto Print (if programmed, see
page 203):
MAY-17 10:55
15
DOCUMENT PAGES
START TIME
END TIME
Printing will automatically
start after the relay station’s
report on the success or fail-
ure of the individual commu-
nications in the relay opera-
tion.
MAY-17 10:56
MAY-17 14:18
(RECOVERY TIME:MAY-17 14:10)
SUCCESSFUL
GROUP NUMBER
0012
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST
OT
01 02
ABB. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008
009 010
UNSUCCESSFUL
PAGES
SENT
GROUP NUMBER
0014
AABBCCDDEEFFGGHHIIJJ
0T
03 AAABBBCCCDDDEEEFFFGG
01
14
09
ABB. 011 123-45678901234567890123456789
012 SEATTLE PLANT
Each Relay Group to which the Relay Transmission was not completed
SENT PAGES ... Number of pages sent normally
Each Relay Group to which the Relay Transmission was performed successfully
Group Number, Relay Station Name or Number, End Terminal One Touch or Abbreviated Dial Numbers
NOTE:
The format sample above is obtained when a Relay Transmission was performed with Group designations.
When a Relay Transmission is performed with individual designations, the Group Number print is skipped.
214
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relay Reception List
The list is output on the Relay
Station upon receiving a relay
request.
Printing Procedure
RELAY RECEPTION LIST
PAGE
TIME
:001
: MAY-17-00 14:25
Auto Print (if programmed, see
page 204):
TEL NUMBER1:12345678901234567890
TEL NUMBER2:12345678901234567890
NAME
:ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234
Printing will automatically
start upon receiving a re-
quest to perform a relay op-
eration.
FILE NUMBER
DATE
: 045
: MAY-17 20:31
: 00001 0002 0003 0004
: 12
GROUP NUMBER
DOCUMENT PAGES
FROM
: +1234567890123456789
File Number assigned by the Relay Station when the
Relay request is received by the Relay Station
Time and Date the Relay request is received
Relay Group Numbers
Number of documents received to memory by the Re-
lay station
Originator Terminal Name or Dial Number
215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mailbox/Relay Box (ITU-T Compatible F-code Communication) List
Issues a list of the documents
reserved through the local (i.e.,
your own) station and remote
stations, using the Open Mail-
box System (ITU-T Compatible
F-code Communication).
MAILBOX/RELAY BOX REPORT
PAGE
TIME
:001
:MAY-17-00 14:25
TEL NUMBER1 :12345678901234567890
TEL NUMBER2 :12345678901234567890
Printing Procedure
NAME
:ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234
MAILBOX
BOX NBR
To display the main menu,
press:
TYPE
CONFIDENTIAL BOX
PGS FILE NBR DATE
TIME
FROM
12345678901234567890
*123##456*
025
001
012
099
033
001
099
111
198
173
MAY-15 22:30 12345678901234567890
MAY-16 08:17 REMOTE
MAY-16 11:50 +811234567
MAY-16 19:37 LOCAL
CONFIDENTIAL BOX
###999***
BULLETIN BOARD
MAY-17 07:43 LOCAL
1.COMM. OPTIONS
2.LISTS
3.INITIAL SETUP
4.DEFAULT SETTING
Box No.
Mailbox Type
File No.
↓
Document Originator ID
LOCAL .................. Your Own Station
Other indication ....Remote station’s ID
Name or Dial Number
Number of Document
pages entered
Date and Time the
Document was entered
To select “2.LISTS,” press:
1.FUNCTION
2.DEPARTMENT
3.ITU MAILBOX
RELAY
RELAY BOX
END STATION
REPLY TO NUMBER
3333
ABB.
OT
001
01
OT
01
GROUP
0001
Then, to select “3.ITU MAIL-
BOX,” press:
End station
Number to send Relay
Transmission Report
Box No.
216
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Department Control List
Available only when the Department Control Mode option is selected.
Issues a list of Department
Codes and data processed for
the Department Control Mode.
Printing Procedure
DEPARTMENT CODE LIST
PAGE
TIME
:001
:MAY-17-00 14:25
To display the main menu,
press:
TEL NUMBER1 :12345678901234567890
TEL NUMBER2 :12345678901234567890
NAME
:ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234
DEPT NBR
NAME
DEPT CODE
TX PGS
RX PGS
COPY PGS
EMAILS SENT
1.COMM. OPTIONS
2.LISTS
3.INITIAL SETUP
4.DEFAULT SETTINGS ↓
01
02
14
15
20
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST
OPERATION CENTER
SYSTEM DESIGN
XYZ
12345
82615
12131
33151
99990
123456
296541
88888
6543
1
123456
12104
88887
12109
4
123456
99999
988886
450
123456
2345
4321
1324
6
7
To select “2.LISTS,” press:
Department
Name
Department Code
for operating the
department
Department
No.
Sent
Received
Copied
E-Mali send
Accumulated number of pages operated by
the department
1.FUNCTION
2.DEPARTMENT
3.ITU MAILBOX
NOTE:
The list shown is produced when the Master code (01) is used to initiate the print list operation. If a
user code (02-99) is used, only the data relating to that department will be printed.
Then, to select “2.DEPART-
MENT,” press:
217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preset Dialing Number Lists
These are listings of the preset
Abbreviated Dial Numbers, One
Touch Keys, Multi-address
All of Lists
The following will be printed. For the print format and description of printed items, see the page listed
below:
Issues all four lists, one after
another, in one operation se-
quence.
Groups, and Alphabetical sort.
You can request all of these
lists (except Alphabetical Sort
List) as part of one operation se-
quence or individually one by
one.
• Abbreviated Dial Number List
• Group Number List
(page 220)
(page 221)
(page 222)
• One Touch Number List
Printing Procedure
Turn the Flip Panel to the “50-
73” view to select the desired
Function Key.
Press:
To select “5.ALL REPORT,”
press:
218
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preset Dialing Number Lists - continued
Alphabetical Sort List
Issues a listing of names pro-
grammed to Abbreviated Dial
Numbers, One Touch Keys, and
Group Numbers.
PHONEBOOK IN ALPHABETICAL ORDER
PAGE
TIME
:001
:MAY-17-00 14:25
TEL NUMBER1 :12345678901234567890
TEL NUMBER2 :12345678901234567890
Printing Procedure
NAME
:ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234
Turn the Flip Panel to the “50-
73” view to select the desired
Function Key.
NAME
LOCATION
OT 01
FAX NUMBER/E-MAIL ADDRESS
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
0987654321
SUB:09876543210987654321
SEP:998877665544
Press:
PWD:********************
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
1234567
BCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST
ABB. 001
Chicago Group
GREENVILLE OFFICE
NEW YORK OFFICE
GROUP 0001
ABB. 109
ABB. 900
999999999
333-912345678
TELEPHONE NBRS LIST
1.BY NAME
2.ABB. NUMBERS
3.GROUP NUMBERS
Names of Abbreviated
Dial Number, One
Touch Key or Group
Number
Station Dial Number/E-Mail Address
....... Alternate Dial Number
4.ONE TOUCH NBRS
5.ALL REPORT
SUB, SEP, or PWD
.......... Type of Sub-address
To select “1.BY NAME,” press:
OT ............ One Touch Key Numbers
ABB. ......... Abbreviated Dial Numbers
Group ....... Group Number
219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preset Dialing Number Lists - continued
Abbreviated Dial Number List
Issues a list of remote station
dialing numbers assigned as
Abbreviated Dial Numbers.
ABBREVIATED TEL NUMBER LIST
Printing Procedure
PAGE
TIME
:001
:MAY-17-00 14:25
TEL NUMBER1:12345678901234567890
TEL NUMBER2:12345678901234567890
Turn the Flip Panel to the “50-
73” view to select the desired
Function Key.
NAME
:ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234
ABB.NBRNAME
TEL NUMBER/E-MAIL ADDRESS
TIME MONI BPS REPORT LINE MAILMODE
Press:
001
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
23:45 ON
144
ON
1
1234567
0987654321
SUB:12345678901234567890
SEP:112233445566
PWD:********************
TELEPHONE NBRS LIST
1.BY NAME
2.ABB. NUMBERS
3.GROUP NUMBERS
109
900
GREENVILLE OFFICE
999999999
333-912345678
09:30 OFF
96
OFF
Station
Name
4.ONE TOUCH NBRS
5.ALL REPORT
Station Dial Number:
... Alternate Dial Number
Abbreviated
Dial Number
SUB, SEP, or PWD
To select “2.ABB. NUMBERS,”
press:
... Type of Sub-address
Designated Time
Line Monitoring
Communication Speed
Limit (x 100)
TX Report Issue/Non-issue
Status
Attached Fax Option Status (if any)
220
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preset Dialing Number Lists - continued
Group Number List
Issues a list of One Touch Key
or Abbreviated Dial Numbers
registered
in
Multi-address
Groups or Multi-polling Groups.
GROUP NUMBER INFORMATION
PAGE
TIME
:001
:MAY-17-00 14:25
TEL NUMBER1:12345678901234567890
TEL NUMBER2:12345678901234567890
Printing Procedure
NAME
:ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234
Turn the Flip Panel to the “50-
73” view to select the desired
Function Key.
GROUP NUMBER NAME
OT/ABB. NUMBER
0001
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST
OT
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
16 17 18 19 20
001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015
Press:
ABB.
016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030
031 032 033 034 999
100 200 300 400 500
31 32 33
1111
1999
ABBCCCDDDDEEEEE
ZZZZZ
ABB.
OT
ABB.
995 996 997 998 999
TELEPHONE NBRS LIST
1.BY NAME
2.ABB. NUMBERS
3.GROUP NUMBERS
Group Number
One Touch Key Numbers and Abbreviated Dial
Numbers belonging to the Group:
4.ONE TOUCH NBRS
5.ALL REPORT
OT .... One Touch Key Numbers
ABB. .... Abbreviated Dial Numbers
Group Name
To select “3.GROUP NUM-
BERS,” press:
221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preset Dialing Number Lists - continued
One Touch Number List
Issues a list of dial numbers of
the remote stations assigned to
One Touch Dial Keys.
ONE TOUCH NUMBER INFORMATION
Printing Procedure
PAGE
TIME
:001
:MAY-17-00 14:25
TEL NUMBER1:12345678901234567890
TEL NUMBER2:12345678901234567890
Turn the Flip Panel to the “50-
73” view to select the desired
Function Key.
NAME
:ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234
TIME MONI BPS REPORT LINE MAILMODE
23:45 ON 144 ON
OT NBR NAME/FUNCTION
ABB. FAX NUMBER & E-MAIL
01
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
2
Press:
1234567
0987654321
SUB:12345678901234567890
SEP:112233445566
PWD:********************
09
22
35
ABB.NBR
GROUP NBR
REDFIELD HS
170
0123
9-1-605-1234567
23:40
TELEPHONE NBRS LIST
1.BY NAME
2.ABB. NUMBERS
3.GROUP NUMBERS
One Touch
Key Number
4.ONE TOUCH NBRS
5.ALL REPORT
Station Name, or
use of the key
Designated Time
Line Monitoring
To select “4.ONE TOUCH
NBRS,” press:
Communication Speed
Limit (x 100)
Abbreviated Dial Number,
Group Number, or actual
Dial Number
TX Report Issue/Non-issue
Status
... Alternate Dial Number
SUB, SEP, or PWD
Attached Facsimile Option Status (if any)
... Type of Sub-address
222
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function List
Issues a list to confirm the func-
tions currently set in this fac-
simile unit.
FUNCTION LIST
PAGE
TIME
:001
:MAY-17-00 14:25
TEL NUMBER1:12345678901234567890
TEL NUMBER2:12345678901234567890
Printing Procedure
NAME
:ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234
RX SETTINGS
SECURE RX
MEMORY RX
DIAL TYPE(LINE1)
DIAL TYPE(LINE2)
CALL NUMBER
KEYBOARD TYPE
MEMORY SIZE
:MF
:MF
:
:QWERTY
: 8MB
:OFF
:ON
:ON
To display the main menu,
press:
RX REDUCTION
DISCARD
:ON
REV.ORDER PRINT
PRIVILEGED RX
RTI
:OFF
:OFF
:OFF
: 1
MACHINE SETTING
RINGER VOLUME
ALARM VOLUME
:4
:3
RX MULTI COPY
KEY TOUCH VOLUME
MONITOR VOLUME
SUPER POWER SAVER
PRINTER POWER SAVER
START TIME
:4
:4
:MANUAL
:ON
:00:00
:00:00
:OFF
:OFF
:OFF
:AUTO
:OFF
: 0
1.COMM. OPTIONS
2.LISTS
3.INITIAL SETUP
4.DEFAULT SETTINGS ↓
REPORT & LIST
JOURNAL
MANUAL
:TX & RX
:ON
AUTO
FAX/POLL/RELAY REPORTS
END TIME
COMMUNICATION REPORT:ON ERROR
FAX SEPARATOR PAGE
COPY SEPARATOR PAGE
PC SEPARATOR PAGE
SEPARATOR PAGE TRAY
ACCOUNT CODE
PRINT DENSITY
DOCUMENT LENGTH
LINE MONITOR
RECEIVE INTERVAL
ECM
DOCUMENT MODE
CONTRAST
COLLATED COPY
LETTER HEAD PAPER
REDIAL MODE INTERVAL
REDIAL MODE COUNTER
AUTO RECEIVE MODE
RING DELAY
A5 SIZE PRINT
MEMORY TX
A5 SIZE PRINT
MULTI TX
:OFF
:ON ERROR(IMAGE)
:OFF
:ON ERROR(IMAGE)
:ON ERROR
:ON ERROR(IMAGE)
:ON ERROR(IMAGE)
:ON ERROR(IMAGE)
To select “2.LISTS,” press:
MULTI POLL
RELAY ORIGINATOR
RELAY STATION
RELAY DESTINATION
:1m
:OFF
: 3MIN
:ON
:STD
:NORMAL
:OFF
:OFF
: 1MIN
: 5
1.FUNCTION
2.DEPARTMENT
3.ITU MAILBOX
RECEPTION LIST
LOCAL MAILBOX
REMOTE MAILBOX
RELAY STATION
:OFF
:OFF
:ON
REMOTE SERVICE
Then, to select “1.FUNCTION,”
press:
REMOTE ACCESS
DOWNLOAD
RDC PASSWORD
:OFF
:NO JOB
:
:AUTO
: 1
AUTO RECEIVE MODE(LINE2):TX/RX
TOTAL PAGE
SCAN
PRINT
:237
:231
TX SETTINGS
MEMORY TX
:ON
SECURITY TX
COVER SHEET
RECOVERY TX
TTI
:OFF
:OFF
:OFF
:INSIDE
:OFF
SEND AFTER SCAN
223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu List
Issues a list of menu items
through which functions or op-
tions can be set.
MENU LIST
PAGE
TIME
:001
:MAY-17-00 14:25
This list can be a useful guide
during machine programming.
TEL NUMBER1:12345678901234567890
TEL NUMBER2:12345678901234567890
NAME
:ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234
Printing Procedure
1.COMM. OPTIONS
1.PAGE NUMBER
2.LINE MONITOR
3.TURNAROUND POLL
4.ECM
3.RX SETTINGS
01.SECURE RX
02.MEMORY RX
03.RX REDUCTION
04.DISCARD
05.REV.ORDER PRINT
06.PRIVILEGED RX
07.RTI
To display the main menu,
press:
5.SECURITY TX
2.LISTS
1.FUNCTION
2.DEPARTMENT
3.ITU MAILBOX
3.INITIAL SETUP
1.LANGUAGE
08.RX MULTI COPY
4.REPORTS & LIST
01.JOURNAL
02.COMM. REPORT
01.TX REPORT
2.DATE & TIME
3.TERMINAL ID
4.DIAL TYPE
1.COMM. OPTIONS
2.LISTS
3.INITIAL SETUP
4.DEFAULT SETTINGS ↓
02.MEMORY-TX REPORT
03.MULTI-ADD REPORT
04.MULTIPOLL REPORT
05.RELAY ORG.REP
06.RELAY STN.REP
07.SET RELAY END REP
03.RECEPTION LIST
01.LOCAL MAILBOX
02.REMOTE MAILBOX
03.RELAY
4.DEFAULT SETTING
1.MACHINE SETTINGS
01.SPEAKER VOLUME
01.RINGER VOLUME
02.ALARM VOLUME
03.KEY TOUCH VOLUME
04.MONITOR VOLUME
02.POWER SAVER
5.MENU LIST
9.TEST MODE
03.SEPARATOR PAGE
04.DEPARTMENT CODE
05.ACCOUNT CODE
06.PRINTER DENSITY
07.DOCUMENT LENGTH
08.LINE MONITOR
09.RECEIVE INTERVAL
10.ECM
5.REMOTE SERVICE
To select “5.MENU LIST,”
press:
01.REMOTE ACCESS
02.DOWNLOAD
03.RDC PASSWORD
04.SUPPLY ORDER
5.MENU LIST
9.TEST MODE
1.AUTO TEST
11.DOCUMENT MODE
12.COLLATE COPY
13.LETTER HEAD PAPER
14.REDIAL MODE
2.INDIVIDUAL TEST
01.ADF TEST
02.KEY TEST
03.LED TEST
01.INTERVAL
04.LCD TEST
02.COUNTER
05.SPEAKER TEST
15.AUTO RECEIVE MODE
16.LINE-2 MODE
06.SWITCH TEST
07.TEST PRINT
2.TX SETTINGS
3.TEST RESULT LIST
01.MEMORY TX
02.SECURITY TX
224
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Failure List
This facsimile has a battery to
back up the document memory
contents. However, when the
power is turned off for a lengthy
period (due to a power failure,
etc.), the communication data
stored in memory will be
cleared. A list of the File Num-
bers of those cleared communi-
cations will be printed.
POWER FAILURE LIST
PAGE
TIME
TEL NUMBER1:
TEL NUMBER2:
:001
:MAY-17-00 14:25
12345678901234567890
12345678901234567890
NAME
:
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234
TX/RX
FILE NBR
FUNCTION
001
005
006
010
MULTI TX
POLLING RX
PRG. CONT POLL
MULTI POLLING
Printing Procedure
POLLING/FAX M-BOX/MAIL BOX FILE NBR
FUNCTION
MAIL
FROM
DATE
MAY-16
MAY-17
MAY-17
TIME
11:23
07:55
07:55
This list is automatically printed
after recovery from a power fail-
ure event.
101
106
107
POLLING
CONFIDENTIAL BOX
BULLETIN BOARD
LOCAL
*1234567890#12345678 9999999999999
###***#123#999*
LOCAL
MEMORY RECEPTION
RECOVERY TX
FILE NBR
222
FUNCTION
MAIL
FROM/TO
DATE
TIME
*1234567890123456789MAY-16
21:37
FILE NBR
333
FUNCTION
SINGLE TX
Type of
communication
Station where the
communication or the
Mailbox is input
Time of Input
Box Number
File Number of the
communication
(in case of Mailbox
communication)
225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error Messages
If an abnormal condition arises
Error Message
Cause / Solution
Error Message
Cause / Solution
in the facsimile or an incorrect
operation is performed, an
alarm buzzer is generated for
about 4 seconds and a mes-
sage to indicate the nature of
the error appears in the LCD
window. In that case, take cor-
rective action according to the
following table.
Autodialer numbers and initial
setting have been lost (due to a
long period of power failure,
etc.).
The maximum number of manu-
ally input phone numbers (100)
has been reached.
BROKEN
REGISTRATION
JOB MEMORY FULL
Split your transmission into two
or more jobs.
There is not enough memory to
perform the requested operation.
MEMORY OVERFLOW
Press
to restore the idle
state. If this Error Message is
repeatedly displayed, machine
programming has become cor-
rupted. The machine must be re-
initialized by a trained techni-
cian. Call for service.
Press
to cancel the mes-
sage. Do the operation over
again with the Direct Document
Transmission, or do the opera-
tion again when enough residual
memory is regained. If the prob-
lem occurs frequently, you re-
quire additional memory.
A power failure occurred during a
communication, etc. The con-
tents of memory were cleared
due to a long power-off condi-
tion.
POWER FAILURE
DOCUMENT JAM
PAPER JAM XX
A document jam has occurred.
A Power Failure List is printed.
Confirm the list contents (see
page 225).
Remove the jammed document
(see page 232).
A recording paper jam has oc-
curred (see page 228).
SCANNER COVER OPEN
TOP COVER OPEN
The scanner cover is open.
Firmly close the scanner cover.
The top cover is open.
Remove the jammed paper (see
page 233).
Firmly close the top cover.
No paper exists in the upper pa-
per tray.
UPPER PAPER EMPTY
MIDDLE PAPER EMPTY
The memory set aside for speed
dial numbers (i.e. One Touch
Keys and Abbreviated Dial Num-
bers) has been exhausted.
ENTRY MEMORY FULL
Supply recording paper to the
upper paper tray.
No paper exists in the middle re-
cording paper tray.
This error occurs only with two
optional paper tray installed.
Delete unneed numbers, alter-
nate numbers, and unnecessary
pauses. Use shorter names for
the dialing addresses.
Supply recording paper to the
middle recording paper tray.
226
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Messages - continued
Cause / Solution
Error Message
Cause / Solution
Error Message
No paper exists in the lower paper tray. This
error occurs with an optional paper tray in-
stalled.
Line-2 is not connected to the telephone line.
LOWER PAPER EMPTY
CHECK LINE-2 (Display only
when Line-2 is installed)
Correctly connect a modular phone cord be-
tween the telephone line jack and the LINE2
connector on the right side of the machine
(see page 18).
Supply recording paper to the lower paper tray.
No recording paper exists in any paper tray.
Supply recording paper to the paper tray(s).
The toner is nearly exhausted (warning).
Replace the toner.
PAPER EMPTY
TONER LOW
NETWORK ERROR
With the Optional NIC board installed, a net-
work connection is not detected.
Insure you have a proper network connection.
If the same error message is displayed again,
call your service representative.
NETWORK DISABLED
Optional NIC board is out of order. Network
related features do not work.
The toner is exhausted.
TONER EMPTY
DRUM UNIT WARNING
Replace the toner (see page 28).
Power your machine off, then back on. If the
error condition is cleared, confirm normal op-
eration. If the error condition returns, call your
service representative.
The drum unit is approaching the end of its life
(warning).
PCL DISABLED
Optional PCL board is out of order. PCL print-
ing do not work.
Replace the drum unit (see page 31).
The drum unit has reached the end of its life.
Replace the drum unit (see page 31).
No developer assembly exists.
REPLACE DRUM UNIT
CONFIRM DEV. UNIT
CHECK LINE-1
Power your machine off, then back on. If the
error condition is cleared, confirm normal op-
eration. If the error condition returns, call your
service representative.
The machine system is out of order.
DEVICE ERROR XX
Install a developer assembly.
Power your machine off, then back on. If the
error condition is cleared, confirm normal oper-
ation. If the error condition returns, call your
service representative.
Line-1 is not connected to the telephone line.
Correctly connect a modular phone cord be-
tween the telephone line jack and the LINE1
connector on the right side of the machine
(see page 18).
227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Paper Jam Error Codes
Paper jam error codes indicate where (within the machine) a recording paper jam
has occurred using a 2-digit number.
Error
Code
Cause
How to Correct
10
A paper jam has occurred within Open the right-side access door
the paper feed section of the Re- and clear any paper. Then, draw out
cording Paper Tray (when an Op- the Recording Paper Tray (upper)
tional Recording Paper Tray is in- and remove any jammed recording
stalled: upper-tray).
paper.
20
30
A paper jam has occurred within Open the right-side access door
the paper feed section of the mid- and clear any paper. Then, draw out
dle recording paper tray.
the Recording Paper Tray (middle)
and remove any jammed recording
paper.
A paper jam has occurred within Open the right-side access door
the paper feed section of the lower and clear any paper. Then, draw out
recording paper tray.
the Recording Paper Tray (lower)
and remove any jammed recording
paper.
50
80
90
A paper jam has occurred within Open the Top Cover, remove the
the paper feed section of the By- Developer Assembly, and remove
pass Tray.
the jammed recording paper.
A paper jam has occurred within Open the Top Cover, remove the
the Drum/Developer section of the Developer Assembly, and remove
paper transport path.
the jammed recording paper.
A paper jam has occurred within Open the Top Cover, remove the
the paper exit section of the paper Developer Assembly, and remove
transport path.
the jammed recording paper.
228
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Codes Printed on Reports
When an Error Code is printed as a status indication on Transmission Reports, etc., refer to the following description for the applicable Error Code to determine the cause.
Error
Code
Error
Code
Cause
How to Correct
Cause
Memory Overflow
How to Correct
10
11
Paper Empty
Load recording paper and set the
tray.
42
Wait until the memory is recov-
ered by completing some of the
reserved jobs or remove other
causes if any, then retry the com-
munication. If problem is continu-
al, acquire additional memory.
Recording Paper Jam
Document Paper Jam
Open the top cover and clear the
recording paper jam.
12
13
Remove the jammed document.
50
53
Line Busy
Send the document again.
Operation Panel or Top Cover
Open
Close the cover or the panel, then
retry.
Security Mismatch in Relay or Confirm the remote party’s securi-
Mailbox transmission
ty code, system password, and
your setup.
20
Power Failure
Retry the transmission or ask the
remote party to transmit the docu-
ment again.
B0-B5 Signal Error or Line Condition Error Retry the communication. Fre-
C0-C4
D0-D2
F0, F1
quent failure may indicate a phone
line problem. If possible, move the
unit to another line and try your
communications again.
E0
E6
Error relating to the printer or mem- Remove the cause of the error on
ory.
the printer, if any. Then ask the re-
mote party to retry the transmis-
sion. If not corrected, call your ser-
vice representative.
87
No residual memory was remain- Retry the transmission.
ing on the remote party’s machine
for Relay or Mailbox transmission.
22
30
File Error due to a Directory Error
was pressed during the com-
Power the unit ON/OFF, then retry.
Retry the transmission or ask the
remote party to transmit the docu-
ment again.
munication.
32
33
Page # Mismatch
Check the actual document count.
Polling Error
Check polling options setup (securi-
ty code, etc.), and check if the poll-
ing document exists.
229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transmission Problems
When transmissions are not performed normally, check the points in the table
below. If the facsimile will not operate correctly after confirming these points or
anything not listed here occurs, call your service representative.
Problem
Cause
Solution
When document pag-
es are fed into the
unit, two pages are
drawn into the slot.
Too many document pag- Set a maximum of 50 pages
es are set.
(Letter size) for one transmis-
sion sequence.
Problem
Cause
Solution
When you place a doc- You have a machine er- Clear the error.
ument in the document ror. Check the display for
tray, nothing happens. an error message (see
pages 226 and 227).
The Scanner Cover is not Close the Scanner Cover until
closed fully.
it clicks at the two latching po-
sitions.
The document extension Extend it fully to support the
Tray is not fully extended. document sufficiently.
There is no power to the Make sure the power plug is
facsimile.
plugged into the AC outlet and
the power switch is ON.
Something is wrong with Check the document to see if
the document paper itself. it satisfies machine require-
ments (see page 87).
When you press
in Direct
You returned the handset Send the document again be-
before you pressed
The ADF pad is dirty.
Clean the ADF pad.
ing sure to press
(when using
before returning the handset.
the optional handset).
The sending proce-
dure was completed,
but nothing was re-
corded on the record-
ing paper of the re-
ceiving party or the
image was elongated.
The document was loaded Load the document face down.
with a wrong side down.
Document Transmis-
sion Mode, the mes-
sage “DIALING” or
“COMMUNICATING”
The Scanner Cover is not Close the Scanner Cover until
closed fully.
The modular cord (the Check the modular cord con-
it clicks at the two latching po-
sitions.
does not appear on the telephone line cable) is nection between the wall
LCD display. not correctly connected. socket and the facsimile.
The Dial Type setting of Set the correct Dial Type in
The sending proce-
dure was completed
correctly, but nothing
happened.
The remote party’s unit is Verify the remote party’s unit.
not compatible with yours. This facsimile can communi-
cate with G3 machines but not
the facsimile is wrong.
accordance with the line used
for the facsimile (see page
44).
G4 machines.
There is no dial tone or Try a voice call through the
something else is wrong handset or the remote tele-
Documents cannot be
sent overseas.
Poor telephone line condi- Retry sending the document
tions.
using to the “Quality Transmis-
sion” procedure (see page
184).
with the phone line.
phone set.
The document is not set Align the document guides
Documents are fed ob- correctly in the Document properly (but not too tightly).
liquely (i.e. skewed).
Tray.
The Scanner Cover is not Close the Scanner Cover until
closed fully.
it clicks at the two latching po-
sitions.
230
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reception Problems
When receptions are not performed normally, check the points in the table below.
If the facsimile will not operate correctly after confirming these points or anything
not listed here occurs, call your service representatives.
Problem
Cause
Solution
After the recording pa- The recording paper is not Check the paper installation,
installed correctly.
and make sure it is correct.
per has been re-
placed, a PAPER
EMPTY error mes-
sage remains on the
LCD display.
Problem
Cause
Solution
The paper tray is not posi- Slide the paper tray into the
tioned properly. slot firmly.
When you are to re- A document is still in your
ceive a document and facsimile.
you press
Press
to remove the
The original document on Ask the sending party if the
the sending side is of poor document contents are clear
The received docu-
ment is difficult to
read.
Unnecessary lines are
printed.
document.
quality.
enough.
Firmly connect the modular
cord at both ends.
The modular cord (tele-
phone line cable) is dis-
nothing
The sending unit requires Ask the sending party to take
connected.
happens.
adjustment.
a copy of the same document
using their facsimile. If the
quality is poor, the problem is
in the sending party’s unit.
Check that the power plug is
plugged into the AC outlet and
the power switch is ON.
There is no power to the
unit.
The recording unit re- If a copy is made on your fac-
Load recording paper in the re-
cording paper tray.
There is no recording pa-
per.
quires cleaning.
simile and the quality is poor,
clean the recording unit.
Press down the top cover until
it clicks at the two latching po-
sitions.
The top cover is not
closed fully.
The remote party loaded Request the remote party to
You receive a docu-
ment that is complete-
ly blank, even though
you and the remote
party followed the cor-
rect procedures.
the document face up.
make sure that document is
loaded correctly.
(If the handset is installed
and after talking with the
remote party through the
handset) the handset is
returned before pressing
Press
first, then
return the handset.
The recording paper tray Check the tray.
is not firmly closed.
Recording paper jam
occurs frequently.
.
Something is wrong with Use the recording paper of de-
the recording paper itself. sired specifications.
Ask the sending party to re-
transmit the document.
Something is wrong with
the sending machine.
The right side cover is not Check the right side cover.
firmly closed.
Press down the top cover until
it clicks at the two latching po-
sitions.
The recording paper The top cover is not
does not come out.
closed fully.
231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing a Document Jam
If a document jam occurs dur-
Open the Scanner
Cover
Close the Scanner
Cover
Remove Other
Documents
Remove the
Jammed Document
ing a transmission, the mes-
sage “DOCUMENT JAM” is
displayed in the LCD window.
Follow this procedure to clear a
document jam.
2
4
1
3
Scanner Cover
Release Button
Document
079
076
077
078
Leave the power of the fac- Press the Scanner Cover Re- Remove the jammed docu-
Firmly close the Scanner
Cover.
simile ON. Remove other docu- lease Button to open the cover.
ments from the Document Tray,
if any (except the jammed por-
tion).
ment. Check for pieces of pa-
per, clips, or staples which
may have caused the failure.
Confirm that the LCD display
indicates that the facsimile is
in the Standby Mode.
NOTE:
As for a document that has
jammed in the facsimile,
make a duplicate using a
copier and do the transmis-
sion over again with the new
duplicate used as the send-
ing document.
232
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing a Recording Paper Jam
If a recording paper jam occurs
Remove the
Remove the
Documents
Open the Right Side
Cover
Open the Top Cover
during a reception or a copying
operation, the message “PA-
PER JAM XX” is displayed in
the LCD window. Follow this
procedure to clear the jam.
1
2
3
4
Developer Assembly
(with Drum Unit)
Top Cover
Release Lever
Developer
Assembly
Document
Right Side
Cover
037
051
076
081
Leave the power of the fac- Open the Right Side Cover,
simile ON. and remove the jammed re-
Grasp the Top Cover Release
Lever to open the Top Cover.
Remove the Developer Assem-
bly with the Drum Unit.
If a document is in the Docu- cording paper if any.
ment Tray or Document Exit
Upon completion, ensure both
IMPORTANT:
Tray, remove the document.
sides of the cover are com-
pletely closed.
•
Never touch the photo-
conductive drum (the
green surface) of the
Drum Unit. If the surface
is scarred or scratched, it
will cause print quality
problems.
•
While
removing
any
jammed paper, do not ex-
pose the photoconduc-
tive drum of the Drum
Unit to light for more than
3 minutes. If the Drum
Unit is to be left any-
where outside the fac-
simile, be certain to cover
it with cloth, paper, etc.
233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing a Recording Paper Jam - continued
If there is any received
document stored in
memory ...
Pull Up on the
Green Paper Feed
Release Lever
Return the Developer
Assembly (with Drum Unit)
and Close the Cover
Remove the Jammed
Recording Paper
5
6
7
If a recording paper jam oc-
curs during a reception, the
received documents are au-
tomatically stored in memo-
ry. In that case, the facsimi-
le will automatically print out
the received contents stored
in memory after clearing the
paper jam.
Paper Feed
Release Lever
094
099
098
Pull up on the green paper feed If a recording paper is jammed
release lever. If there is any at the Fuser Section, remove
jammed paper, remove it in the the jammed paper.
direction of the arrow, being
Install the Developer Assembly
(with the Drum Unit) and close
the Right Side Cover. Then
close the Top Cover firmly.
careful not to tear the recording
paper.
CAUTIONS:
•
As the Fuser Section is
heated, pay special at-
tention when handling it.
If hot, allow the fuser to
cool prior to touching.
IMPORTANT:
•
When closing the Right
Side Cover, close it firmly
until a “click” sound is
heard on both sides.
•
Do not pull the recording
paper out to the exit side.
•
When the Top Cover is
closed, the unit automati-
cally returns to the
Standby Mode.
234
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the Recorded Image is not Clear...
If the Document Scanner Unit
is dirty, your documents may
not be transmitted clearly. If
the Recording Unit is dirty, the
document you receive may not
be clear. In that case, clean the
Document Scanner Cleaning Procedure
Wipe the Glass
Open the Scanner
Wipe the ADF Pad
and Rollers
1
3
2
Surface and White
Plate
Cover
Stained
Document Scanner Unit or Re-
If the problem occurs during
Scanner Cover
Release Button
White Plate
cording Unit using the following
both a transmission and in copy
ADF Pad
procedures. You can check
mode, check the Document
Glass
these problems by making a
Scanner Unit.
copy.
If the problem occurs during
both receptions and copy mode,
Examples of print problem:
check the Recording Unit.
077
096
097-1
Press the Scanner Cover Re- Wipe the Glass surface and Wipe the ADF Pad and Rollers
lease Button to open the Scan- the White Plate with a soft dry with a dry cloth.
Vertical black line(s)
ner Cover.
cloth.
•
If it is very dirty, wipe it with
a cloth soaked in water and
wrung out, then wipe it with a
dry cloth.
•
If it is very dirty, wipe it with
a cloth soaked in water and
wrung out, then wipe it with a
dry cloth.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to injure your
Vertical white line(s)
finger(s) on the ADF spring
when you wipe the ADF pad.
Horizontal black line(s)
Horizontal white line(s)
Faint or blurred print
235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the Recorded Image is not Clear... - continued
Document Scanner Cleaning Procedure - continued
Close the Scanner
4
Cover
079
Close the Scanner Cover.
•
Make sure that the hooks
on both sides are firmly
latched.
236
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the Recorded Image is not Clear... - continued
Recording Unit Cleaning Procedure
Remove the
Clean the Transfer
Wire and Discharge
Wire
Wipe the Glass
Open the Top Cover
Clean the Paper
Guide
3
4
1
2
5
Developer Assembly
(with Drum Unit)
Surface of Laser Unit
Top Cover
Release Lever
Developer
Assembly
Glass
037
105
103-1
051
104
Wipe the glass surface of the
laser unit with a soft dry cloth
(lens cleaner cloth).
Grasp the Top Cover Release
Lever to open the Top Cover.
Wipe the Paper Guide with a
dry cloth.
Clean the Transfer Wire and
Discharge Wire with a cotton
swab.
Remove the Developer Assem-
bly (with the Drum Unit at-
tached).
NOTE:
CAUTION:
If a problem with the Record-
ing Unit remains after this
action, you may require a
new developer assembly or
drum unit.
Check for dirt or paper un-
der the developer assembly
(with drum unit) first. Call
your service representative
for assistance.
Do not touch the Transfer
Wire and Discharge Wire
with your hands. The oils
from your hands could con-
taminate the wire resulting
in lower print quality.
IMPORTANT:
•
Never touch the photo-
conductive drum (the
green surface) of the
Drum Unit. If the surface
is scarred or scratched,
it will cause print quality
problems.
•
Do not expose the pho-
toconductive drum of
the Drum Unit to light for
more than 3 minutes. If
the Drum Unit is to be
left anywhere outside
the facsimile, be certain
to cover it with cloth, pa-
per, etc.
237
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the Recorded Image is not Clear... - continued
Recording Unit Cleaning Procedure - continued
Clean the Front
Contacts
Clean the Right
Contacts
Clean the Rear
Contacts
Separate the Drum
Unit
Clean the Charger
10
Wire
6
7
8
9
Drum Unit
Charger Cleaner
Developer
Assmbly
Drum Unit
Clean the Charger Wire in the
087
052
086
089
085
Using a cotton swab, clean the
silver contacts found in the rear
of the developer chassis.
Separate the Drum Unit from
the Developer Assembly.
Clean the silver contacts found
along the front of the developer
chassis, using a cotton swab.
Using a cotton swab, clean the
silver contacts found along the
right side of the developer chas-
sis.
Drum Unit with
Cleaner.
a
Charger
Insert the Charger Cleaner per-
pendicularly until it contacts
the case. Then, move the
Charger Cleaner in one direc-
tion horizontally slowly.
WARNING:
Moving the Charger Cleaner
quickly or at an incorrect
angle may damage or break
the Charger Wire.
238
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the Recorded Image is not Clear... - continued
Recording Unit Cleaning Procedure - continued
Return the Charger
Cleaner and Mylar
Scraper
Attach the Drum
Unit to the
Developer Assembly
Return the Developer
Assembly (with Drum Unit)
and Close the Top Cover
Clean the Metering
Blade
Clean the Mylar
Sheet
11
12
13
14
15
Charger Cleaner
Metering
Blade
Drum Unit
Mylar
Scraper
Cotton
Swab
Mylar
Scraper
Developer
Assembly
Mylar Sheet
Toner Roller
028
090
092
042
045
Attach the Drum Unit to the
Developer Assembly.
Position the Drum Unit with the
green drum surface facing the
black toner roller on the Devel-
oper Assembly.
Clean the mylar sheet of the
Developer Assembly with a cot-
ton swab.
When a white line occurs on Return the Charger Cleaner and
the black toner roller of Devel- Mylar Scraper to the storage lo-
oper Assembly, scrape off the cation provided inside the fac-
dust or toner between the me- simile.
tering blade and black toner
roller with a Mylar Scraper.
Install the Developer Assem-
bly (with the Drum Unit at-
tached) and close the Top
Cover.
•
When the Top Cover is
closed, the unit automati-
cally returns to the Standby
Mode.
239
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USER TEST MODE - AUTOMATIC TEST MODE
AUTO TEST
AUTO TEST mode, permits you to automatically perform a series
of machine tests in one operation.
Display the TEST
MODE Menu
Select the AUTO
TEST Menu
Completed the
AUTO TEST
1
2
3
The test items performed by the AUTO TEST are:
Press:
Press:
When all the tests end, the
word “OPERATION COM-
PLETED” is displayed on the
screen and the display returns
to showing the standby mode
screen.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
FLASH ROM TEST
Checks the program data, function data, and language data.
+
SRAM TEST
Checks the SRAM Memory.
The auto test starts, appears
on the screen indicating that
the test is under way.
DRAM TEST
Checks the DRAM Memory.
The results of the auto test can
be confirmed with the self test
report. To print the self test re-
MODEM TEST (Line 1, Line 2: Only when installed)
Checks the modem and detects a line current.
AUTO TEST
1.AUTO TEST
2.INDIVIDUALTEST
3.TEST RESULT LIST
port, refer to “PRINTING
TEST RESULT” on page 252.
A
SCANNER TEST
Checks the image scanner.
--------------------
If the result of the auto test is
judged to be NG, call your ser-
vice representative.
CODEC TEST
Checks the CODEC IC.
PRINTER TEST
AUTO TEST
Checks the printer components for proper operation and prints
one test page.
---------------
•
PHONE BOOK DATA TEST
Checks the phone book data.
To suspend the auto test,
NOTE:
AUTO TEST cannot be performed if the data, such as re-
ceived data, delayed transmission, or polling data, is stored in
the memory.
press
.
240
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
- INDIVIDUAL TEST MODE
INDIVIDUAL TEST Summary
In INDIVIDUAL TEST mode,
you can perform specific tests
on this facsimile.
Select the Desired
INDIVIDUAL TEST
(01-07)
Enter the INDIVIDUAL
TEST Menu
1
2
Press:
Press
or
until
the desired INDIVIDUAL TEST
is displayed or enter the de-
sired INDIVIDUAL TEST (01
through 07) using the dial key-
pad.
+
+
01.ADF TEST
02.KEY TEST
03.LED TEST
04.LCD TEST
↓
05.SPEAKERTEST
06.SWITCH TEST
07.TEST PRINT
NOTE:
Only 4 selections can be
displayed at one time.
241
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADF TEST
The ADF test checks the op-
eration of the ADF by trans-
porting and unloading docu-
ments. You can check that the
ADF is normal if the number of
documents loaded is consis-
tent with the number of docu-
ments transported and un-
loaded.
Select the ADF TEST
Menu
To Continue or Exit
the Test
Load the Document
1
3
2
Press:
If a document jam occurs dur-
ing transport, the screen below
is displayed.
To continue the ADF test,
press:
Load the documents in the
document tray and press:
+
+
+
+
ADF TEST
DOCUMENT JAM
PAGES XXX
Load the documents again,
then press:
The documents will be trans-
ported one by one and the
number of documents unloaded Remove the jammed docu-
will be displayed at the lower ment. You can resume the test
right on the screen.
by pressing
.
ADF TEST
To end the test, press:
PAGES 001
After transporting
all the documents
ADF TEST
LOAD DOCUMENT
ADF TEST
ADF TEST
START TO RESTART OR
STOP TO COMPLETED
PAGES XXX
PAGE NUMBER CORRECT?
1.YES
2.NO
You can change the transport
speed by pressing
.
STD: Fast
FINE (Same when HALF
TONE is set): Medium
U-FINE (Same when HALF
TONE is set): Slow
242
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADF TEST - continued
Select the ADF Test
Result
Completed the
ADF TEST
4
5
The word “OPERATION COM-
PLETED” is displayed on the
screen and the unit returns to
the individual test selection
screen.
If the number of documents
loaded is consistent with the
number of documents unload,
press:
The result of the ADF test can
be confirmed with the self test
report. To print the self test re-
If a document is not fed prop-
erly (even once), press:
port, refer to “PRINTING
TEST RESULT” on page 252.
A
If the result of the ADF test is
judged to be NG, call your ser-
vice representative.
243
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
KEY TEST
The key test checks key
switch operation on the Opera-
tion Panel.
Select the Key Test
Menu
Check the Keys
Completed the
4
KEY TEST
Exit the Key Test
Mode
1
2
3
Press:
Press all the key switches ex- Press:
The result of the key test can
be confirmed with the self test
report. To print the self test re-
port, refer to “PRINTING
TEST RESULT” on page 252.
A
cept
.
+
+
+
+
If the result of the key test is
judged to be NG, call your ser-
vice representative.
The result of the key test (“OK”
or “NG”) is displayed on the
screen, and the unit returns to
the test item select screen of
the individual test.
If all the keys except
have been detected, the screen
below is displayed.
KEY TEST
OK
KEY TEST
PRESS STOP KEY
NOTE:
Unless
is pressed
KEY TEST
PRESS ALL KEYS
EXCEPT STOP KEY
If you fail to press all of the
keys on the operation panel
within 10 seconds after the
screen in Step 2 is displayed,
the test result is judged to be
NG.
including
before press-
ing
, the result will be
NOTE:
NG.
If you press
before
you press every other key,
the machine will reset to the
Individual Test menu screen
and no test result will be is-
sued.
244
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LED TEST
The LED test checks LED op-
eration by lighting all the
LEDs on the Operation Panel.
Select the LED TEST
Menu
Check the LCDs
Select the Test Result
Option
Completed the
4
LED TEST
1
2
3
Press:
Visually check that all the If all the LEDs are turn on, The word “OPERATION COM-
LEDs are on. After checking, press:
PLETED” is displayed on the
screen and the unit returns to
the individual test selection
screen.
+
+
+
+
press
.
If even one LED is not lit,
press:
The result of the LED test can
be confirmed with the self test
report. To print the self test re-
LED TEST
ENTER TEST RESULT
1.OK
2.NG
port, refer to “PRINTING
TEST RESULT” on page 252.
A
If the result of the LED test is
judged to be NG, call your ser-
vice representative.
LED TEST
CHECK IF ALL LEDS
ARE TURNED ON
STOP TO COMPLETE
245
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LCD TEST
The LCD test checks LCD op-
eration by turning on and off
all the elements of the LCD on
the Operation Panel.
Completed the
LCD TEST
Select the LCD TEST
Menu
Start the LCD Test
Select the Test Result
3
Option
4
1
2
Press:
If all elements of the LCD turn
on and off normally, press:
Press:
The word “OPERATION COM-
PLETED” is displayed on the
screen and the unit returns to
the individual test selection
screen.
+
+
+
+
The result of the LCD test can
be confirmed with the self test
report. To print the self test re-
If even one elements fails to
turn on and off, press:
All of the elements of the LCD
should turn on (as is the ex-
ample below).
port, refer to “PRINTING
TEST RESULT” on page 252.
A
Five seconds later, all the ele-
ments should turn off. Visually
check that all the elements
have turned on and off nor-
mally. The test result input
screen is displayed five sec-
onds after the elements turn
off.
If the result of the LCD test is
judged to be NG, call your ser-
vice representative.
LCD TEST
LCD WILL TURN BLACK
AND THEN CLEAR
PRESS START KEY
LCD TEST
ENTER TEST RESULT
1.OK
2.NG
246
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPEAKER TEST
The speaker test checks
speaker operation by changing
the volume output from the
speaker.
Completed the
SPEAKER TEST
Select the SPEAKER
TEST Menu
Select the SPEAKER
TEST Option
Select the Test Result
3
Option
4
1
2
Press:
If all volumes are output nor-
mally, press:
The word “OPERATION COM-
PLETED” is displayed on the
screen and the unit returns to
the individual test selection
screen.
Select a speaker volume level
by using or
.
+
+
+
+
Level 0 produces no sound, and
Level 7 the maximum volume.
Speaker sound is output at the
volume level selected. Check
that all the volumes are output
normally. After checking, press:
The result of the speaker test
can be confirmed with the self
test report. To print the self
test report, refer to “PRINTING
A TEST RESULT” on page
252.
If even one of them is not out-
put normally, press:
If the result of the speaker test
is judged to be NG, call your
service representative.
SPEAKER TEST
ENTER TEST RESULT
1.OK
2.NG
SPEAKER TEST
STOP TO COMPLETED
VOLUME= (0-7)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
247
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SWITCH TEST
The switch test checks if the detection switches operate nor-
mally.
Select the SWITCH
TEST Menu
Check the Scanner
Cover
Check the Top Cover
1
2
3
The test items in SWITCH TEST mode are as follows:
Press:
Open the Scanner Cover. Open the Top Cover. When its
When its open state is de- open state is detected, the
tected, the screen below ap- screen below appears. After
pears. After checking that the checking that the screen is dis-
screen is displayed, close the played, close the Top Cover.
Scanner Cover.
•
•
•
Detection of Scanner Cover open/closed status
Detection of Top Cover open/closed status
+
+
+
+
Detection of Process Unit (Drum Unit with Developer Assem-
bly) presence/absence status
•
Detection of Recording Paper and Recording Paper Tray pres-
ence/absence status
Detects the open state
of the Scanner Cover.
Detects the open state
of the Top Cover.
•
•
Detection of Bypass Tray presence/absence status
Detection of Flip Panels on the Operation Panel
SWITCH TEST
SWITCH TEST
CLOSE SCANNER COVER
CLOSE THE TOP COVER
NOTE:
If no operation is performed within 10 seconds after an opera-
Close the cover
Close the cover
tional instruction is displayed on the screen during the switch
test, the test result will be judged to be NG.
SWITCH TEST
OPEN THE TOP COVER
SWITCH TEST
PULL OUT THE UPPER
TRAY
SWITCH TEST
OPEN SCANNER COVER
248
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SWITCH TEST - continued
Check the Upper Tray
Check the Process Unit
(Drum Unit with Developer Assembly)
Check the Bypass
6
Tray (If Installed)
4
5
Remove the Process Unit.
When the absence of a Pro-
cess Unit is detected, the
screen below appears. After
checking that the screen is dis-
played, install the Process
Unit.
Pull out the Upper Recording
Paper Tray. When the absence
of a Recording Paper Tray is
detected, the screen below ap-
pears. After checking that the
screen is displayed, install the
Recording Paper Tray.
If no Bypass Tray is installed Remove the recording paper
or no recording paper is placed from the Bypass Tray. When
in the Bypass Tray, the screen the absence of recording paper
If no recording paper is placed
in the Recording Paper Tray,
the screen below is displayed.
You can resume the test by
loading the paper.
below is displayed.
is detected, the screen below
appears. After checking that
the screen is displayed, load
the paper.
DOES THIS MACHINE
HAVE A BYPASS TRAY?
1.YES
SWITCH TEST
LOAD PAPER IN THE
UPPER TRAY
Detects the absence of
an Upper Recording Pa-
per Tray.
Detects the absence of
recording paper in the
Bypass Tray.
2.NO
Detects the absence of
a Process Unit.
If Bypass Tray is installed or
no paper is placed in the By-
pass Tray, press:
SWITCH TEST
PUT IN THE PROCESS
UNIT
SWITCH TEST
INSERT THE UPPER
TRAY
SWITCH TEST
LOAD PAPER IN THE
BYPASS TRAY
If an Optional Recording Paper
Tray is installed, follow the
same test procedure as above
for the Middle and Lower Re-
cording Paper Trays.
Install the Process
Unit
Install the Recording
Paper Tray
Load the paper
Go to Step 6.
If no Bypass Tray is installed,
press:
SWITCH TEST
UNLOAD PAPER IN THE
BYPASS TRAY
SWITCH TEST
PULL OUT THE PROCESS
UNIT
SWITCH TEST
FLIP BOOK PANEL ON
THE LEFT-HAND SIDE
Go to Step 7.
If both Flip Panels are set on
the left-hand side of the Opera-
tion Panel, the screen below is
displayed. In this case, reverse
the left and right for the opera-
tion in Step 7.
SWITCH TEST
FLIP BOOK PANEL ON
THE RIGHT-HAND SIDE
249
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SWITCH TEST - continued
Check the Flip Panels
Completed the
SWITCH TEST
7
8
Set both Flip Panels on the The result of the switch test
left-hand side.
can be confirmed with the self
test report. To print the self
test report, refer to “PRINTING
A TEST RESULT” on page
252.
The result of the switch test
(“OK” or “NG”) is displayed on
the screen, and the unit returns
to the individual test selection
screen.
If the result of the switch test
is judged to be NG, call your
service representative.
SWITCH TEST
OK
If one Flip Panel is set on ei-
ther side, move the Flip Panel
on the right-hand side to the
left-hand side and then move
them to the right-hand side.
250
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TEST PRINT
The test print checks the print
function by printing a test pat-
tern.
Select the TEST
PRINT Menu
1
Press:
Print Sample
+
+
+
+
MAY-17-00WED11:13
RESULT MEMORY 100%
PRINTING LIST
The test pattern is printed and
the unit returns to the standby
mode screen.
251
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
- TEST RESULT
PRINTING a TEST RESULT
This test result list prints out
the results of the individual
tests as a self test report.
Select the TEST
1
RESULT Menu
Press:
Print Sample
+
+
After completion of the list out-
put, the display returns to the
standby mode screen.
252
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REMOTE SERVICE - RDC (Remote Diagnosis Configuration) Service
This machine has a function to receive the following services remotely. (Consult your authorized TOSHIBA dealer for assistance in using this function.)
RDC (Remote Diagnosis Configuration)
This service enables the machine to be dialed from a service center to retrieve information and reports, set various machine settings, program data, and upgrading the
firmware in the machine.
A separate contract with the service center will be required to receive this RDC service.
NOTES:
•
This capability is currently under development and is not yet available. This RDC Service will be restricted to TOSHIBA trained technicians working for TOSHIBA
authorized dealers and will not be available in all areas.
•
This function is not available in the United States.
253
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
- AUTOMATIC SUPPLIES ORDER
Automatic Supplies Order Setting
This machine can automatically send an order sheet to a designated fax machine informing your supplier that a replacement Drum Kit or Toner Kit is required.
Contact your local authorized dealer for information on this setting.
NOTE:
This function is not available in the United States.
254
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIFICATIONS
Document Size:
Power Required:
120 VAC, 60 Hz
Width ..... 216 mm (8.5 inches) max.
148 mm (5.8 inches) min.
Power Consumed:
Max. 550 W (operating), 2 W or less (standby
in Super Power Saver mode)
Length ... 1000 mm (39.4 inches) max.
100 mm (3.9 inches) min.
Unit Dimensions:
Weight:
Width ..... 590 mm (23.2 inches)
Depth..... 596 mm (23.5 inches)
Height .... 338 mm (13.3 inches)
(All dimensions excluding protrusions)
Recording Paper Size:
Width ..... 216 mm (8.5 inches)
Length ... 280 or 356 mm (11.0 or 14.0 inches)
Recording Paper Tray Capacity: Up to 550 sheets per tray (with the recom-
mended paper)
About 24.5 kg (54.0 lbs.)
Effective Scanning Width:
Effective Printing Width:
216 mm (8.5 inches)
207 mm (8.1 inches)
Outer appearance, specifications, etc. may be changed without prior notice.
Compatibility Communication Modes:
ECM, G3, Exclusive Modes: (EX)
If any trouble is encountered, contact your authorized TOSHIBA facsimile
dealer.
Scanning Density:
Horizontal ..... 8 dots/mm (203 dpi),
16 dots/mm (406 dpi)
Vertical ......... 3.85 lines/mm (97.8 lines/inch)
7.7 lines/mm (196 lines/inch)
The clock function and programming data of this device are preserved with a
built-in battery. If the power supply is cut off over a long time, the battery may
become discharged, causing the recorded data to be lost.
Document image data received by this device is preserved with a built-in battery
(for about 10 hours). If the power supply is cut off for a long time, the received
data may be lost.
15.4 lines/mm (391 lines/inch)
Transmission Rate:
Encoding Systems:
V.17: 14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps
V.34: 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/
19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/7200/
4800/2400 bps
JBIG/MMR/MR/MH
Recording and Printing Method: Electrophotography and Laser Printing
Laser:
GaAIAs Laser Diode
Max. 5 mW, wavelength 780 nm
Memory Capacity:
Standard..... 3MB for DP120F
7MB for DP125F
Optional Memory Card
4 MB Board (DP120F only)
Machine Type:
Desktop type with both transmission and re-
ception functions
Applicable Networks:
PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network)
255
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SUPPLIES
HARDWARE OPTIONS
Letter-size Recording Paper:
Legal-size Recording Paper:
Drum Kit:
2nd NCU Board with V.34 Modem:
(DP120F only)
GD-1030-US
GC-1030
Memory Board (4MB):
(DP120F only)
DK-15
TK-15
DU-15
Toner Kit:
Recording Paper Tray:
Bypass Tray (DP120F only):
Handset:
FU-15L
BC-15
Developer Unit:
HD-15
PCL Print Kit:
GA-1020
GF-1010
GD-1040
NIC Kit:
Internet FAX Kit:
256
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TOSHIBA Viewer
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
257
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LICENSE AGREEMENT
Wordcraft International Limited
Unimessage Pro Software Licence Agreement
CONDITIONS OF PURCHASE
Software is licensed subject to the limitations on permitted use. No refund will be given after the purchaser has installed the software. This Licence shall continue for as long as the Product is in use. Failure to comply with the
terms and conditions detailed below will result in termination of the licence. All copies of the software must be destroyed on termination of the licence.
PERMITTED USES
The original purchaser may use the software on a computer system owned or used by the original purchaser for the purpose of any business or profession. The original purchaser may store the software on a hard disk system for use
only by the permitted number of users and connected only to the permitted number of communication devices as specified in the system configuration file contained within the software product at the time of purchase, plus the
number of users and devices added by obtaining a valid licensed upgrade from Wordcraft International Limited or an authorised agent of Wordcraft International Limited.
USES NOT PERMITTED
a.
Downloading of the software from a computer service or bulletin board or use in a multi-site arrangement except in respect of users licensed by Wordcraft International Limited to do so.
b. Use of the software in a computer service business, network, time-sharing, interactive cable television or multiple CPU arrangement except in respect of users licensed by Wordcraft International Limited to do so.
c.
The use of a single user version on a second or subsequent computer or network workstation. Details of multi-user packs are available from authorised dealers or authorised distributors of Wordcraft International Limited or
direct from Wordcraft International Limited.
d. The use of a network version on a second or subsequent network.
e.
f.
The making of alterations and modifications to the software, merging all or any part of the software with another program, reverse engineering, decompiling, or disassembling of the software.
The right to rent, assign, lease, transfer or grant sub-licences or other rights to others.
g. The making of copies of any documentation belonging to Wordcraft International Limited.
h. The selling or transferring of software marked ‘Not for Resale’ or ‘Evaluation’ or ‘Demonstration’ or ‘Training’.
i.
Any other uses not included in “Permitted Uses” above, which would require a licence to use the copyright in the software.
The license contained in this agreement will terminate automatically and without notice from Wordcraft International Limited if any provision in this agreement is not complied with.
GOVERNING LAW
This agreement shall be governed by the laws of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland.
LIMITED WARRANTY
Wordcraft International Limited make no representations or warranties, express or implied, of any kind with respect to the contents of this package and specifically disclaim any express or implied warranty of merchantability or
fitness for any particular purpose. Wordcraft International Limited’s liability shall be limited to replacing any faulty product with alternative product or a cash refund up to but not exceeding the value of the monies paid for the
product when originally purchased. In no event shall Wordcraft International Limited or their suppliers be liable for any special, incidental, indirect or consequential damages whatsoever (including, without limitation, damages
for loss of revenue or profits, business interruption, lost or damaged data, or any other loss arising out of the installation of, use of or inability to use this software product). Wordcraft International Limited shall not be responsible
for any claims arising from the use of software marked ‘Not for Resale’ or ‘Evaluation’ or ‘Demonstration’ or ‘Training’.
Wordcraft International Limited shall not be responsible for any claims arising from the use of software other than the use for which it was specifically sold.
Wordcraft International Limited shall not be responsible for any claims by a third party.
No oral or written information or advice given to Wordcraft International Limited, or given by Wordcraft International Limited , or an authorised representative shall create a warranty or in any way increase the scope of this
warranty.
COPYRIGHT
Software and documentation produced by Wordcraft International Limited is protected by International Copyright Conventions.
TRADEMARKS
Wordcraft is a trademark of Wordcraft International Limited.
All other trademarks are acknowledged.
Following installation the package will be automatically registered.
This is a legally binding agreement with Wordcraft International Limited.
If you feel you cannot accept the conditions defined above please return the complete software package unopened to your supplier.
1999 Wordcraft International Limited
258
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTENTS
LICENSE AGREEMENT ............................................................258
CONTENTS ................................................................................259
INTRODUCTION ........................................................................260
INSTALLATION AND DEVICE CONFIGURATION ................... 261
Computer Requirements................................................................. 261
Configuration of the CD-ROM ........................................................ 261
Installing the TOSHIBA Viewer .......................................................262
Installation .........................................................................................262
Device Setup .....................................................................................264
Uninstalling the TOSHIBA Viewer ................................................... 268
DESCRIPTION OF THE FUNCTIONS........................................269
Description of the Main Welcome Menu ......................................... 269
Browse Folders .............................................................................. 270
Changing the Device Configuration ....................................................270
Saving the Device Configuration ........................................................273
Add/Edit Phonebook contacts on the DP120F/DP125F......................275
Saving the Phonebook .......................................................................277
Creating a Routing Rules ...................................................................279
Finding items stored in TOSHIBA Viewer folders ................................280
Creating Folder ..................................................................................281
File Scan......................................................................................... 282
Scanning with your DP120F/DP125F or otherTWAIN
compatible scanner............................................................................282
TOSHIBA Viewer GDI Printer.........................................................284
Printing fromTOSHIBAViewer UniPad ...............................................284
Printing from Other Application ..........................................................285
259
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTRODUCTION
“TOSHIBA Viewer” has been specially designed for use with DP120F/DP125F’s [Multi-Function Peripherals] and TWAIN compatible scanning devices.
Subject to the device with which you are using TOSHIBA Viewer and the configuration of your specific copy of TOSHIBA Viewer, available features of TOSHIBA Viewer
include:
• Scanning hard copy documents using your TWAIN scanner.
• Using your DP120F/DP125F as a printer.
• Using your DP120F/DP125F as a scanner.
• Configuring your DP120F/DP125F from the PC.
• Create or edit the Phone/Fax numbers stored in your DP120F/DP125F from the PC.
• Creating contacts in your TOSHIBA Viewer Phonebooks for frequently used fax numbers and e-mail addresses.
• Creating graphics files in the Unimessage Pro Viewer.
• Storing properties of files in the Unimessage Pro folders to be used with TOSHIBA Viewer’s sophisticated search engine.
• Routing of scanned images using TOSHIBA Viewer’s simple wizard style Routing Rules.
This manual gives instructions on how to install TOSHIBA Viewer and basic information about some of the other functions listed above.
Upgrading Unimessage Pro for TOSHIBA Viewer
Unimessage Pro for TOSHIBA Viewer can be upgraded to:
• Add features, for example e-mail functions are not included in all Unimessage Pro configurations.
• Support multiple users on a LAN.
• Support several devices at the same time.
To update/upgrade your copy of Unimessage Pro for TOSHIBA Viewer, contact your TOSHIBA authorized dealer.
260
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION AND DEVICE CONFIGURATION
NOTE:
Computer Requirements
The Requirements indicated
here are minimums. As with
most Windows applications,
TOSHIBA Viewer will run
faster when used on a PC
with a faster processor or
with more RAM. If you are
using other applications on
your PC at the same time
as TOSHIBA Viewer, a fast-
er processor and additional
RAM are highly recommend-
ed.
The TOSHIBA Viewer system is compatible with Microsoft Windows 95/98, Microsoft Windows NT4.0 or later.
Make sure that your computer meets the following criteria.
For installation under Microsoft Windows 95/98 or Microsoft Windows NT 4.0
PC:
IBM PC or 100% compatible; Pentium 120 MHz or higher
Microsoft Windows 95/98, Windows NT 4.0
Operating system:
PC memory:
32M Bytes minimum (64M Bytes recommended) for Windows 95/98 First Edition (Microsoft Windows 95
OSR1 Service Pack 1 is recommended.)
32M Bytes minimum (64M Bytes recommended) for Windows 98 Second Edition and Windows NT 4.0
(When using Windows NT4.0, please ensure that Microsoft NT4.0 Service Pack 4 or later is installed.)
Display:
A 24-bit color video card and driver is recommended
Configuration of the CD-ROM
The configuration of the CD-ROM and the purposes for each folder are as described below.
•
•
•
•
\Toshiba Viewer
Includes the Setup.exe to install the TOSHIBA Viewer, printer driver and TWAIN driver.
\Drivers9x\Network Printer
Includes the printer driver for the client computers of Windows 95/98.
\Drivers9x\PnP Printer & TWAIN
Includes the printer driver and TWAIN driver for Plug-and-Play installation.
\DriversNT4\Local Printer & TWAIN
Includes the printer driver and TWAIN driver for installing by Add Printer function in Windows NT4.0 that DP120F/DP125F is
connected in local.
•
\DriversNT4\Network Printer
Includes the printer driver for Windows NT4.0 that is used as a client computer.
261
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the TOSHIBA Viewer
Before
installing
Installation
TOSHIBA Viewer, your
TOSHIBA
DP120F/
Prompts may vary de-
pending on your PC con-
figuration.
DP125F must be con-
nected to your PC via a
parallel cable suitable for
bi-directional communica-
tions.
Insert the CD-ROM
Select Language
1
3
The screens show exam-
ples of Windows 95.
NOTE:
NOTE:
Please make sure
that following terms
are satisfied.
You can install the
drivers by Plug-and-
Play function or Add
Printers function. You
have to choose differ-
ent sources in the CD-
ROM when you install
by those functions.
Please see on page
261 for the configura-
tion of the CD-ROM
and the descriptions
for the sources in
each folder.
•
When using Windows
NT 4.0, make sure
you have Administra-
tor access rights.
Click Start and select Run.
Click OK.
•
Close all applications
that are running to
avoid any conflicts
during installation.
•
The
TOSHIBA
Type “D:\Toshiba Viewer\Setup.exe”
Start the Installation
DP120F/DP125F con-
nected to your PC is
powered on.
2
4
Type “D:\Toshiba Viewer\Setup.exe” where D is your
Click Next.
CD-ROM drive.
Click OK.
262
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the TOSHIBA Viewer - continued
Installation - continued
Read the Software License Agreement
Select the Program Folder
Exit the Installation Window
5
7
9
If you agree the License Agreement, click Yes.
Click Next.
Select Yes, I want to restart my computer now., and
click Finish.
If you click No, exit the Installation. The Installation is
not completed.
NOTE:
You have to restart the computer before using the
TOSHIBA Viewer.
After restarting the computer, the Unimessage Pro de-
vice wizard automatically runs.
Choose the Destination Location
Start the Copy
6
8
Click Next.
Wait until file copying files is completed.
The Setup Complete screen automatically appears.
263
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the TOSHIBA Viewer - continued
After restarting the computer,
DeviceSetup
the Unimessage Pro device
wizard automatically appears.
Unimessage Pro device wizard appears
Select the device driver installation type
1
2
NOTE:
This device setup wizard
can be operated by running
the Unimessage Pro
Startup Wizard in Program
Folder as well. When plural
TOSHIBA Faxes are con-
nected to your PC, you can
operate the device setups
for each device.
Every time you operate the
device
setup,
a
new
TOSHIBA Viewer utility is
created.
Enter the details for each entry field.
Select Yes, select a device connected to this computer from a
list of supported devices, and click Next.
NOTE:
At least Name, Organization, Address, Country, Telephone
number, and Fax number must be entered.
The Address entry must be more than 20 letters.
After all required entries are completed, click Next.
264
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the TOSHIBA Viewer - continued
Device Setup - continued
Select the manufacturer of your fax and
the device model
Enter System Device Name and
Descriptive Device Name
Select Custom for the type of Setup
3
4
5
Select Toshiba in the Manufacturers field and the
model that is connected to your PC in the Models
field.
Default System Device Name and Descriptive Device Click Next.
Name are already entered. Rename them if required.
Click Next.
265
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the TOSHIBA Viewer - continued
Device Setup - continued
Select the Port that your DP120F/
DP125F is connected to
Select Yes, install TWAIN components
Select Yes, create a printer
6
7
8
Click Next.
If there is a TOSHIBA Viewer TWAIN resource avail- If the DP120F/DP125F prints using
a
TOSHIBA
able for the DP120F/DP125F you are using, TOSHIBA Viewer driver, TOSHIBA Viewer will ask if a printer
Viewer will ask if the TWAIN resource should be in- driver for the DP120F/DP125F should be created or
stalled as you configure the device.
not. If you choose to create this printer, it will be
named after the DP120F/DP125F but you can edit this
name if you prefer.
Click Next.
Click Next.
NOTE:
If you choose not to create the “print” printer driver
during the definition of the device or it is deleted, you
can create the “print” printer driver for the DP120F/
DP125F later. To do this, open the Devices folder,
right click on the appropriate device and select Cre-
ate printer. For further details, see the Help for
Create printer.
266
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the TOSHIBA Viewer - continued
Device Setup - continued
Select whether to creat a shortcut and
the location
Complete the device setup
TOSHIBA Viewer starts
9
10
11
Click Next.
Click Finish.
NOTE:
If you want to install several TOSHIBA Viewers, it is
required to change the name of the shortcut to avoid
the name being overlapped.
267
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Uninstalling the TOSHIBA Viewer
Select Start, Settings, Control Panel
Confirm File Deletion dialog appears
Uninstallation starts
1
3
5
Double click Add/Remove Programs.
Click Yes.
After removing files is completed, click OK.
NOTE:
During the uninstallation, the confirmation dialogs
for removing the shared files appear. Click OK to
delete all shared files in the TOSHIBA Viewer pro-
gram folder.
Select Unimessage Pro
TOSHIBA Viewer alert dialog appears
2
4
Click Add/Remove....
Exit all applications running on your machine, and Restart your computer to complete the uninstallation.
click OK.
Some files are deleted after restarting the computer.
268
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DESCRIPTION OF THE FUNCTIONS
Descriptions and instruc-
Description of the Main Welcome Menu
tions for general func-
tions are described in this
section. For details and
instructions other than
those described in this
manual, please refer to
the TOSHIBA Viewer
on-line Help.
From this menu you can access the main TOSHIBA Viewer system. You can examine the lists of scanned and filed images by clicking the
TOSHIBA Viewer logo.
The round buttons provide quick access to some of the TOSHIBA Viewer functions and can include a combination of the following:
Browse Folders: This takes you to the list of folders within TOSHIBA Viewer so that you can check on the progress of messages, examine
the lists of received, transmitted, filed messages and print these lists or individual messages.
Copy:
This combines the functions of TWAIN scanning and printing and allows you to make multiple hardcopies of a document
in the automatic document feeder of the TWAIN scanner.
File Scan:
This takes you to the TWAIN scanner driver or, for DP120F/DP125F, the TOSHIBA Viewer Scan setup dialog so that you
can scan documents or images into your PC.
Email Scan:
Setup:
This scans a document or image using any TWAIN scanner then automatically attach it to an email message.
This takes you to a dialog where settings on your DP120F/DP125F can be configured from the PC; it may also allow you
to exchange Phonebook contacts with your DP120F/DP125F’s One Touch or Speed Dial functions.
Help:
Exit:
To access TOSHIBA Viewer on-line Help.
To close TOSHIBA Viewer.
269
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Browse Folders
When you click Browse
Folders button or the
TOSHIBA Viewer logo on
the Welcome menu, the
TOSHIBA Viewer main
display will appear.
ChangingtheDeviceConfiguration
During the Unimessage
Device Wizard that con-
Open the Device folder
1
cluded the installation
process, you will have
configured
TOSHIBA
Viewer for use with your
DP120F/DP125F. Should
you want to, you can
reconfigure how TOSHIBA
Viewer works with your
DP120F/DP125F via the
Device folder.
NOTE:
•
When you close the
main TOSHIBA View-
er display, the Wel-
come menu will reap-
pear. If you prefer to
Also you can remotely
skip
menu,
the
select
Welcome
Pro-
configure
the
device
At the top of the Main TOSHIBA Viewer Display is the
menu list - File, Edit, View, Message, Setup, Window,
and Help. Below the menu list is the main toolbar -
Open, Print, Acquire and Find. For further descrip-
tions of the each menu item, select Contents and
Index in Help menu to view the Help.
configuration using this
program.
gram from the Setup
menu, click on the Ap-
plication tab and un-
check the Show “wel-
come” screen option
then click OK. The
Welcome menu will
not to be displayed be-
ginning with the next
Double click the appropriate entry in the list of devices
that appears in the right hand pane.
Device settings appears.
The remainder of the screen is divided into two parts:
•
On the left is the list of available folders.
time
you
start
To open a folder in the right pane, click its name in
the folder tree. If a folder contains any unread items
TOSHIBA Viewer will display the number of unread
items within each folder after each folder’s name in
this section of the screen.
TOSHIBA Viewer.
•
•
You can switch be-
tween open folders in
the main TOSHIBA
Viewer display using
Ctrl+TAB or Ctrl+F6.
•
On the right is a display area for individual or multiple
folder.
You can select folders to be displayed by clicking
on them in the folder list.
You can close the cur-
rent folder in the main
TOSHIBA Viewer dis-
play using Ctrl+F4.
270
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Browse Folders - continued
ChangingtheDeviceConfiguration-continued
Change the TOSHIBA Viewer settings
2
2a
Change the device settings
2b
Change the port
Click on Device tab.
Click on Port tab.
Check on Print and/or Scan if you want the DP120F/DP125F to
be worked as a printer and/or scanner using the TOSHIBA Viewer.
Select the port that your computer connects to your DP120F/
DP125F.
When you want to change the port, go to Step 2b.
Click on OK to save changes.
When you want to configure the device settings, click on Setup...
and go to Step 3.
When you want to save changes, click on OK.
271
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Browse Folders - continued
ChangingtheDeviceConfiguration-continued
Change the Device settings
3
You can remotely configure the
device settings using the
TOSHIBA Viewer.
3a
Edit the device configuration
3b
Load a set file on your hard disk
After clicking Setup... on the
Device
TOSHIBA Viewer retrieves the
device settings from the
DP120F/DP125F.
Tab
screen,
the
When you want to change the
device settings file directly, go
to Step 3a.
When you want to change the
device settings file by copying
the settings from a set file lo-
cated on your hard disk, go to
Step 3b.
Select or enter the value for items that you want to change the
configurations.
Double-click on Add settings file.
A “New settings” file is created.
Click the ü button to download the new settings to your DP120F/
DP125F. Back to Step 2a.
When you want to change the
device settings file by copying
the settings from a user set-
NOTE:
Click the ✘ button to cancel adding/editing the device configu-
ration. Back to Step 2a.
tings
file
stored
within
TOSHIBA Viewer, go to Step
3c.
Right-click on the new settings file and select Load....
For additional information on a
specific item, refer to Help and
the appropriate section of the
NOTE:
In order to create a user settings file to be saved on your hard
disk, refer to the section “Saving the Device Configuration”.
DP120F/DP125F
Manual.
Operator's
The Load settings screen appears. Designate the hard disk
location of the desired set file, select the file, then click on Open.
The set file is loaded.
Continue to Step 3c.
272
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Browse Folders - continued
ChangingtheDeviceConfiguration-continued
SavingtheDeviceConfiguration
The device setting file opened
Open the Device folder
1
by TOSHIBA Viewer (default
name TOSHIBA) is
Change the Device settings - continued
3
a
temporary “working” file. Every
time TOSHIBA Viewer is
opened, the program accesses
the attached facsimile and
reads the current settings.
You can store the settings
within TOSHIBA Viewer or
save them as a file on your
hard disk.
3c
Copy the device configuration
This is useful when performing
a
full memory clear or
upgrading the machine’s
Double click the appropriate entry in the list of devices
that appears in the right hand pane.
firmware because you can
easily re-configure the device
by downloading the stored
settings.
Left-click and hold on the user settings file, then drag it to the
device settings file, and release the left mouse button.
Device settings appears.
Click on Setup...
2
NOTE:
Initially, your mouse pointer will become a “circle with diagonal
line”. Upon reaching the desired settings file, the pointer will
take the form of an “address label”. Upon releasing the left
mouse button, the contents of the user settings file are copied
to the device settings file.
Click the ü button to download the new settings to your DP120F/
DP125F. Back to Step 2a.
NOTE:
Click the ✘ button to cancel adding/editing the device configu-
ration. Back to Step 2a.
Toshiba Setup appears.
273
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Browse Folders - continued
Saving the Device Configuration - continued
Save new settings
Create the new settings file
3
4
4a
Save within TOSHIBA Viewer
4b
Save as a file on your hard disk
Double-click on Add settings file.
A “New settings” file is created. Enter an appropriate
name for the new settings file.
To copy the device configuration to the new settings
file, left-click and hold on the device settings file (e.g.
“TOSHIBA”) then drag it to the new settings file (e.g.
“DP125F LA Office”) and release the left mouse
button.
Right-click on the new settings file and select Save.
Right-click on the new settings file and select Save
as....
NOTE:
When you click the ü button or ✘ button to close The Save settings screen appears. Designate the
the screen, TOSHIBA Viewer will prompt you to location on your hard disk and enter an appropriate file
NOTE:
save the file.
name, then click on OK.
Initially, your mouse pointer will become a “circle
with diagonal line”. Upon reaching the desired set-
tings file, the pointer will take the form of an “ad-
dress label”. Upon releasing the left mouse button,
the contents of the device settings file are copied
to the new settings file.
NOTE:
The settings file is saved as a set file on your hard
disk. The file extension is “set”. This file can be
retrieved by TOSHIBA Viewer.
To save the new settings within the TOSHIBA Viewer,
go to Step 4a.
To save the new settings as a file on your local hard
disk, go to Step 4b.
274
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Browse Folders - continued
Add/EditPhonebookcontactsontheDP120F/DP125F
TOSHIBA Viewer permits
you to remotely add/edit
Open the Devices folder
Change the settings
1
2
One
Abbreviated
contacts
Touch
and/or
Number
your
When
you
want
to
on
Setup device
phonebook
change the current de-
vice phonebook, go to
Step 2a.
2a
Edit the phonebook
DP120F/DP125F.
When
you
want
to
change the phonebook by
copying the settings from
a set file located on your
hard disk, go to Step 2b.
Select the device and click Setup device phonebook
button.
When
you
want
to
“Reading data from device” appears as Viewer
interrogates the attached facsimile.
change the phonebook by
copying the settings from
a user settings file stored
within TOSHIBA Viewer,
go to Step 2c.
To add new phonebook contacts, click on Abb.
Numbers, Group Numbers, or One Touch Keys in the
left pane. Then double click on Add... (e.g. “Add Abb.
Number”) in the right pane. Tel List Entry appears at
the end of the existing list. Double click on the
desired items and enter the appropriate values.
For further details on
phonebook setup, refer to
Help.
Toshiba Phonebook Setup appears.
To edit phonebook contacts, double click on the item
you want to edit then enter the new data.
Click the ü button to download the new settings to
your DP120F/DP125F.
Click the ✘ button to cancel adding/editing the
phonebook contacts.
275
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Browse Folders - continued
Add/Edit Phonebook contacts on the DP120F/DP125F - continued
Change the settings - continued
2
2b
Load a set file from your hard disk
2c
Copy the phonebook settings
Double-click on Add settings file.
A “New settings” file is created.
Left-click and hold on the user phonebook file, then drag it to the
device phonebook file, and release the left mouse button.
NOTE:
Initially, your mouse pointer will become a “circle with diagonal
line”. Upon reaching the desired phonebook file, the pointer will
take the form of an “address label”. Upon releasing the left
mouse button, the contents of the user phonebook file are
copied to the device phonebook file.
Click the ü button to download the new settings to your DP120F/
DP125F.
Right-click on the new settings file and select Load....
NOTE:
NOTE:
In order to create a user phonebook file to be saved on your
hard disk, refer to the section “Saving the Phonebook”.
Click the ✘ button to cancel adding/editing the phonebook con-
tacts.
The Load settings screen appears. Designate the hard disk
location of the desired set file, select the file, then click on Open.
The set file is loaded.
Continue to Step 2c.
276
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Browse Folders - continued
Saving the Phonebook
The device phonebook opened
by TOSHIBA Viewer (default
Open the Device folder
Create the new phonebook file
1
2
name
TOSHIBA)
is
a
temporary “working” file. Every
time TOSHIBA Viewer is
opened, the program accesses
the attached facsimile and
reads the current phonebook
settings.
Setup device
phonebook
You can store the phonebook
settings
within
TOSHIBA
Viewer or save as a set file on
your hard disk.
Select the device and click the Setup device phonebook button.
This is useful when performing
“Reading data from device” appears as Viewer interrogates the
attached facsimile.
a
full memory clear or
upgrading the machine
firmware because you can
Double-click on Add settings file.
A “New settings” file is created. Enter an appropriate name for the
new settings file.
easily
machine’s
downloading
re-program
phonebook
the
the
by
stored
To copy the current device phonebook settings to the new
settings file, left-click and hold on the device phonebook file (e.g.
“TOSHIBA”) then drag it to the new settings file (e.g. “LA Office
Phonebook) and release the left mouse button.
phonebook file.
Toshiba Phonebook Setup appears.
NOTE:
Initially, your mouse pointer will become a “circle with diagonal
line”. Upon reaching the desired phonebook file, the pointer will
take the form of an “address label”. Upon releasing the left
mouse button, the contents of the device phonebook file are
copied to the new phonebook file.
To save the new settings within TOSHIBA Viewer, go to Step 3a.
To save the new phonebook as a file on your local hard disk. go to
Step 3b.
277
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Browse Folders - continued
Saving the Phonebook - continued
Save new phonebook
3
3a
Save within TOSHIBA Viewer
3b
Save as a file on your hard disk
Right-click on the new phonebook file and select Save.
Right-click on the new phonebook file and select Save as....
NOTE:
The Save settings screen appears. Designate the location on
When you click the ü button or ✘ button to close the screen, your hard disk and enter an appropriate file name, then click on
TOSHIBA Viewer will prompt you to save the file.
OK.
NOTE:
The phonebook file is saved as a set file on your hard disk.
The file extension is “set”. This file can be retrieved by
TOSHIBA Viewer.
278
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Browse Folders - continued
Creating a Routing Rules
When an image is scanned, it
is normally stored in the
Scanned images folder.
You can change the action by
defining one or more Routing
rules.
Select Setup, Routing Rules... from the menu
Enter the name of the rule
1
3
User Routing Rules are:
•
Created and maintained by
any TOSHIBA Viewer user.
•
•
Specific to the user.
Processed by the TOSHIBA
Viewer user in the order
they are shown, from top to
bottom.
Click New... to create a new rule.
Click Finish.
Routing Rules Wizard appears.
Some sample rules are sup-
plied with TOSHIBA Viewer.
To activate them, go to the
Routing Rules dialog, select a
suitable sample to base your
own rule on, click Copy, click
Modify, enter the incomplete
information and click Finish to
store the completed rule.
Check on the terms for a rule
Click Move up to change the apply
order
2
4
For further details of Routing
Rules, click Help on the
Routing Rules dialog to view
related help topic.
Click Next. Follow the prompts to create a rule.
Click OK.
For further details of creating and modifying the Routing Rules,
refer to Help.
279
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Browse Folders - continued
Finding items stored in TOSHIBA Viewer folders
Once files are stored in
Define a new search
Click Find icon
2
1
TOSHIBA Viewer folders, you
can ask TOSHIBA Viewer to
find items for you based on
their properties.
NOTE:
•
You can also search folders
by selecting the Search
history.
Find icon
•
In order to search in the
specific folder, right click on
the specific folder and
select Find.
Check on Include subfolders when you want to search folders in
subfolders as well.
Click OK.
Searching starts.
For further details of searching, click Help on the Search dialog to
view a related help topic.
280
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Browse Folders - continued
CreatingFolder
TOSHIBA Viewer uses folders
to store messages that you
NOTE:
Select a folder where you want to create a
folder in
1
•
When you drag from a Windows Explorer to a TOSHIBA
Viewer folder, TOSHIBA Viewer only stores a reference to the
file and document properties for the file.
have scanned, and details
about files you have on your
computer. You can then search
all or some of these folders to
find messages or files at a later
date.
i.e.The file itself is not copied into the TOSHIBA Viewer folder
and will be opened from its original location when you open
the reference to it within TOSHIBA Viewer.
•
If you drag from a TOSHIBA Viewer folder to another TOSHIBA
Viewer folder, TOSHIBA Viewer will normally copy the file to the
target TOSHIBA Viewer folder. However if the source references
a file outside of the TOSHIBA Viewer folder structure (i.e. was
dragged in from a Windows Explorer folder) only the reference to
the external file is moved or copied.
You can create your own fold-
ers, and each folder can
contain sub-folders.
•
•
If you open an image file (.bmp, .jpg, .tif, .pcx, .fax or .fcs) in the
TOSHIBA Viewer and then select Save in Unimessage Pro
folder fro the File menu, the image file will always be stored in
the TOSHIBA Viewer folder.
Select File - New - Folder.
With TOSHIBA DP120F/DP125F it is possible to download to
and upload from mailboxes within a DP120F/DP125F using
drag and drop of items. If your TOSHIBA DP120F/DP125F
supports these functions you will see folders within the
Devices folder on the left side of the main TOSHIBA Viewer
display. Open these folders to review the contents of the
DP120F/DP125F’s mailboxes and drop items into these folders
to download items to the mailboxes.
Type a name for the new folder
2
Click OK.
Type a brief comment describing, for example, the folder’s
intended use, if required.
281
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
File Scan
You
can
use
your
Scanning with your DP120F/DP125F or other TWAIN compatible scanner
DP120F/DP125F to scan
hard copy documents into
any TWAIN compatible
application you are run-
ning (e.g. PaintShop Pro,
Corel Photo Paint, etc.).
Set the hard copies to be
scanned in the document
tray before scanning.
Click File Scan on Main Welcome Menu
Click Scan
1
3
NOTE:
•
Before scanning, you
can preview the scan-
ning document by
clicking Preview.
File Scan also provides a
function that allows you to
build a multi-page docu-
ment from several sepa-
rate TWAIN scans. This
is useful if you want to When you use the other
scan different pages with TWAIN compatible appli-
different settings, or if you cations to scan, the
want scan both sides of a scanner settings dialog
document.
appears.
Click Select source....
Select Source dialog appears.
The scanner setting dialog appears.
NOTE:
You can also operate
the scan from the Main
TOSHIBA Viewer Dis-
play. However, it is
not allowed you to re-
Select the TWAIN Scanner
Set the scanner settings
2
4
build
a
multi-page
document.
Click Select.
For further details of scanner settings, click Help to
Back to Scan multiple pages dialog.
view a related help topic.
Click Scan.
Back to Scan multiple pages dialog.
282
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
File Scan - continued
Scanning with your DP120F/DP125F or other TWAIN compatible scanner - continued
Select the Scanned pages
Select what you do with the
scanned images
5
6
Click Add.
Click OK.
Repeat all scanned pages are added into a document.
For further details of the New message received dialog,
click Help to view a related help topic.
If you want to continue scanning, repeat from step 3 to
4.
NOTE:
You can add the scanned pages in desired order to
create a multi-page document.
For further details of the Scan multiple pages dialog,
click Help to view a related help topic.
Click OK.
283
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TOSHIBA Viewer GDI Printer
You can print a document
using TOSHIBA Viewer
GDI Printer, if you have
Printing from TOSHIBA Viewer UniPad
The TOSHIBA Viewer
UniPad is the viewer in-
corporated into TOSHIBA
Viewer. The UniPad can
view the scanned image.
UniPad is opened.
Double click a scanned image
Select the DP120F/DP125F Printer for
Name
selected to create
printer during the installa-
tion. You can print
a
1
2
a
document from TOSHIBA
Viewer UniPad and other
applications.
NOTE:
TOSHIBA Viewer GDI
Printer is created as
same as the Windows
printer
drivers
in
Printers folder. If you
have not created, you
can also create
a
TOSHIBA Viewer GDI
Printer from the Main
TOSHIBA Viewer Dis-
play. To create a GDI
Select Print from File menu.
Continue general operation for printer properties and The print job is sent to DP120F/DP125F.
print settings.
Click OK.
The scanned image is printed.
Printer,
refer
to
Changing the Device
Configuration
on
page 270.
284
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TOSHIBA Viewer GDI Printer - continued
Printing from Other Application
You can also print a document
Select Page Setup... in File menu
Select DP120F/DP125F Printer for Name
1
3
from other applications using
the TOSHIBA Viewer GDI
Printer.
The procedure is the example
with Windows NotePad. The
procedure may vary depending
on the application.
Page Setup dialog appears.
Ckick Properties for general operation for printer properties.
Printer properties dialog appears.
Click Printer...
2
Page Setup for Printer dialog appears.
Click OK.
Click OK on Page Setup for Printer dialog.
Back to Page Setup dialog.
285
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TOSHIBA Viewer GDI Printer - continued
Printing from Other Application - continued
Set print settings
Select Print in File menu
4
5
Click OK.
Page Setup dialog is closed.
The print job is sent to DP120F/DP125F.
The document is printed.
286
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
CharacterEntry ...........................................................................................36
Delete ...............................................................................................37
Insertion............................................................................................37
Replacing ..........................................................................................37
Cleaning
DocumentScannerCleaning .............................................................235
RecordingUnitCleaning ....................................................................237
CommunicationJournal...............................................................................205
Settings ............................................................................................195
CommunicationStatus
Display and Print Transmission Report .............................................120
Displaying Current Job Status...........................................................120
ConfidentialBox..........................................................................................149
ConfigurationSummary...............................................................................45
ContinuousPolling ......................................................................................145
ContrastSetting ..........................................................................................90
CopyReduction ..........................................................................................95
Copying.......................................................................................................94
PageCollatingFunction ....................................................................94
Page Collating Function Default Setting ............................................65
Paper Size For Copying ....................................................................94
Reduction .........................................................................................96
Tray Selection...................................................................................96
CoverSheet
A
AbbreviatedNumber
Abbreviated Dial Number List ............................................................220
Cancel ..............................................................................................71
CommunicationsOptions ..................................................................73
Dialing...............................................................................................98
Modify...............................................................................................71
Registration.......................................................................................70
Access Codes, see also Passwords, and Security Codes
DepartmentCodeSetting ..................................................................55
Account Codes
Account Code Entry..........................................................................164
Setup ................................................................................................58
AlphabetDialing ..........................................................................................99
Alphabetical Sort List ..................................................................................219
Auto Receive Mode.....................................................................................68
Autodialer
AbbreviatedDialerDialing .................................................................98
AbbreviatedDialerRegistration .........................................................70
AlphabetDialing ................................................................................99
GroupNumberRegistration ...............................................................83
OneTouchDialerRegistration ..........................................................77
One Touch Key Dialing .....................................................................97
Quick Start .......................................................................................34
Automatic Supplies Order ...........................................................................254
Attaching a Cover Sheet ...................................................................187
Printing a Cover Sheet ......................................................................187
Registration.......................................................................................165
B
Bulletin Board Box ......................................................................................149
Bypass Tray
D
Date and Time ............................................................................................40
Default Setting ............................................................................................64
DocumentMode................................................................................64
ContrastLevel ........................................................................64
Installation ........................................................................................23
C
Resolution...............................................................................64
Canceling
MemoryTransmission ......................................................................91
Security Transmission ......................................................................93
DelayedCommunications ...........................................................................181
UsewithAbbreviatedNumberregistration .........................................73
Use with One Touch key registration ................................................80
DelayedPollingReception ..........................................................................181
DirectTransmission ..........................................................................121
MemoryJobReservation ..................................................................121
Open Mailbox Documents (Local Hub) ..............................................161
Reception .........................................................................................122
ChainDial ...................................................................................................166
287
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DepartmentCode
Access .............................................................................................163
Function Keys.............................................................................................15
Discard, see Reception Settings
Control List .......................................................................................217
Initialization.......................................................................................55
Maintenance .....................................................................................57
DepartmentControlList ..............................................................................217
Developer Assembly and Drum Unit Installation ..........................................25
Dial Type ....................................................................................................44
DialingMethods ..........................................................................................97
AbbreviatedDialing ...........................................................................98
AlphabetDialing ................................................................................99
KeypadDialing..................................................................................100
On-hookDialing ................................................................................117
One Touch Key Dialing .....................................................................97
DirectDocumentTransmission ...................................................................103
Default Setting ..................................................................................103
External Off-hook Transmission ........................................................109
Of-hookTransmission(OptionalHandsetDialing) .............................107
On-hookTransmission(MonitorSpeakerDialing) ..............................106
Redialing ...........................................................................................110
ReportSetting ...................................................................................197
TemporaryDirectDocumentTransmission .......................................105
Documents
Function List ...............................................................................................223
FuserCleaner
Installation ........................................................................................27
Replacement.....................................................................................30
G
Group
GroupBroadcastTransmission .........................................................123
GroupNumberList ............................................................................221
GroupNumberRegistration ...............................................................83
Multi-Key Quick Broadcast Transmission .........................................124
RelayTransmission ..........................................................................126
H
HardwareOptions........................................................................................254
Hub Station, see Relay Transmission or Mailbox
I
Initial Setting
Date and Time ..................................................................................40
Dial Type ..........................................................................................44
Language ..........................................................................................39
TerminalID .......................................................................................42
ITU-TCompatible ........................................................................................149
Acceptable Document Sizes .............................................................87
Document Exit Tray ..........................................................................19
DocumentLengthSetting..................................................................60
Loading .............................................................................................88
DrumUnitReplacement ..............................................................................31
J
E
Job Status ..................................................................................................119
Journals, seeCommunicationJournals
ECM(ErrorCorrectionMode)
Default ECM Setting .........................................................................63
DisablingECMTemporarily ...............................................................172
ErrorCodesPrintedonReport.....................................................................229
ErrorMessages ..........................................................................................226
K
KeypadDialing ............................................................................................100
F
L
File Number and Residual Memory..............................................................101
FrontView...................................................................................................10
LanguageSelection.....................................................................................39
Letter Head Paper Setting ...........................................................................66
288
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LineMonitor
Always ..............................................................................................61
Cancelling a Document in a Mailbox (Local Hub)...............................161
Deleting a Mailbox ............................................................................151
DeletingDocuments..........................................................................161
Mailbox List ......................................................................................216
Overview...........................................................................................136
Printing a Document from a Mailbox (Local Hub)...............................159
Reserving a Document to a Mailbox (Local Hub) ...............................155
Retrieving (Polling) a Document from a Mailbox (Remote Hub) .........157
Sending a Document to a Mailbox (Remote Hub) ..............................153
Setting Up a Mailbox.........................................................................149
MemoryReceptionSetting ..........................................................................175
MemoryTransmission.................................................................................101
MemoryTransmissionReport .....................................................................208
Memory Transmission Report Setting .........................................................198
Menu List ....................................................................................................224
MenuOperation ..........................................................................................35
Multi-AddressPolling ..................................................................................143
Multi-AddressTransmission(Broadcasting) ................................................123
GroupBroadcastTransmission .........................................................123
Multi-Key Quick Broadcast Transmission .........................................124
Report ...............................................................................................210
ReportSetting ...................................................................................199
Multi-Copy, Reception Settings ...................................................................116
Multi-Key ....................................................................................................124
Multi-PollingReport .....................................................................................211
Multi-PollingReportSetting .........................................................................200
TransmissionOptions .......................................................................193
UsewithAbbreviatedNumberregistration .........................................73
Use with One Touch key registration ................................................79
LineSelection .............................................................................................189
Line-2Operation ..........................................................................................69
Lists, see List and Reports
List And Reports, Print Format And Printing Procedure ...............................195
DepartmentControlList ....................................................................217
Function List .....................................................................................223
MemoryTransmissionReport ...........................................................208
Menu List ..........................................................................................224
Multi-AddressTransmissionReport ..................................................210
Multi-PollingReport ...........................................................................211
OpenMailbox(ITU-TF-CodeCommunication)List ...........................216
Power Failure List .............................................................................225
Preset Dial Number List ....................................................................218
Abbreviated Dial Number List..................................................220
All of Lists ..............................................................................218
GroupNumberList ..................................................................221
One Touch Number List ..........................................................222
Relay Box List ..................................................................................216
Relay Reception List .........................................................................215
Relay Transmission End Terminal Report .........................................214
RelayTransmissionOriginatorReport ...............................................212
Relay Transmission Relay Station Report .........................................213
ReservationList ................................................................................209
TransmissionReport .........................................................................207
Transmission/ReceptionJournal(CommunicationJournal)................205
Lists and Reports, Settings .........................................................................195
CommunicationJournalSettings.......................................................195
CommunicationReportSettings ........................................................195
MailboxCommunications
N
Notice to Users ...........................................................................................1
O
One Touch Key
Cancel ..............................................................................................78
CommunicationOptions ....................................................................79
Dialing...............................................................................................97
Modify...............................................................................................78
One Touch Number List ....................................................................222
Registration.......................................................................................77
OperationPanel ..........................................................................................13
Function Keys...................................................................................15
OpenMailbox....................................................................................137
Overview...........................................................................................136
Reception List Settings .....................................................................205
M
Mailbox(ITU-TCompatible).........................................................................149
289
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OzoneFilter
Replacement.....................................................................................32
R
RearView ...................................................................................................11
Receiving ....................................................................................................112
Automatic Receiving Mode ...............................................................112
ManualReceivingMode ....................................................................112
Selecting Quick Start ........................................................................34
TheReceivingMode .........................................................................112
Receiving Interval Setting ...........................................................................62
ReceptionJournal .......................................................................................205
Automatic Output..............................................................................196
ManualOutput ..................................................................................196
Settings ............................................................................................195
Reception List Settings, see Lists And Reports, Settings
P
PageCount .................................................................................................192
Paper Jam Codes .......................................................................................228
Passwords, see also Access Code, and Security Code
ITUSub-address ...............................................................................185
System Password.............................................................................186
PIN Mask....................................................................................................171
Polling
Overview...........................................................................................136
PollingReception ..............................................................................136
ContinuousPollingReception .................................................145
DelayedPollingReception ......................................................181
Multi-AddressPollingReception .............................................143
SecurePollingReception ........................................................141
Simple Polling Reception ........................................................141
TurnaroundPollingReception .................................................147
PollingReservation ...........................................................................136
Public Polling Reservation ......................................................140
Security Polling Reservation ...................................................138
SimplePollingReservation .....................................................138
Power Failure List .......................................................................................225
PowerSaverOperation
ReceptionSettings
Discard .............................................................................................114
Multi-CopySetting ............................................................................116
Reduction .........................................................................................113
ReverseOrderPrintingSetting..........................................................115
RecordingPaper
Installation ........................................................................................20
Paper Size Adjustment .....................................................................22
Paper Size, Recording Area ..............................................................113
Trays(Option) ...................................................................................12
RecoveryTransmission
Setting ..............................................................................................168
Transmitting(Sending) ......................................................................169
Redialing .....................................................................................................110
AutomaticRedialing ..........................................................................110
ManualRedialingDirectTransmissions ............................................110
Manual Redialing Jobs in Memory.....................................................111
Redial(IntervalandCounter)Setting .................................................67
TelephoneHandsetOperation(Optional) ...........................................117
Reduction, see Reception Settings
PrinterPowerSaver ..........................................................................51
SuperPowerSaver ...........................................................................51
Preset Dial Number Lists, see Lists & Reports
Print
Print Density Setting .........................................................................59
PrintingSuppliesReplacement .........................................................28
ReverseOrderPrintingSetting..........................................................115
PrivilegedReception ...................................................................................173
Public Mailbox Reservation .........................................................................140
RelayTransmission
Deleting a Relay Box ........................................................................132
Overview...........................................................................................126
Relay Box List ..................................................................................216
Relay Destination Report Setting ......................................................203
Relay Reception List .........................................................................215
Relay Reception List Setting .............................................................204
Relay Station Transmission Report Setting .......................................202
Q
Quality TX...................................................................................................73, 79
Quick Start .................................................................................................34
290
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relay Transmission End Terminal Report .........................................214
RelayTransmissionOriginatorReport ...............................................212
RelayTransmissionOriginatorReportSetting ...................................201
Relay Transmission Relay Station Report .........................................213
Relay Transmission to a Remote Hub ...............................................134
Setting Up a Relay Box.....................................................................127
RemoteService ..........................................................................................253
Remote Terminal ID (RTI) Print ...................................................................174
Replacement
DrumUnit .........................................................................................31
FuserCleaner ...................................................................................30
OzoneFilter ......................................................................................32
PrintingSupplies ...............................................................................20
TonerCartridge .................................................................................28
Reports, see Lists And Reports
FacsimileSeparatorPage .................................................................53
PC Print Separator Page...................................................................53
Setup
Document Exit Tray ..........................................................................19
Facsimile Machine Installation ..........................................................18
Printing Supplies Installation .............................................................20
Quick Start .......................................................................................34
Receiving ..........................................................................................34
Unpacking .........................................................................................16
UserInterfaceOperation ...................................................................35
Simple Polling .............................................................................................141
SimplePollingReservation .........................................................................138
SpecialCharacterTable ..............................................................................36
Specifications .............................................................................................253
SpeedDial, seeAbbreviatedNumber
ReservationList ..........................................................................................209
Residual Memory & File Number.......................................................101
Resolution, Scan Setting Adjustment ..........................................................89
ReverseOrderPrintingSetting ....................................................................115
Ring Volume Adjustment.............................................................................47
RTI (Remote Terminal ID) Print ...................................................................174
Sub-AddressCommunication
DialingwithSub-addresses ...............................................................185
UsingwithAbbreviatedNumberRegistration.....................................73
Using with One Touch Key Registration ............................................79
Supplies
Automatic Supplies Order .................................................................254
Installation ........................................................................................25
Replacement.....................................................................................28
S
ScanResolution..........................................................................................89
SecurePolling.............................................................................................138
SecureReception........................................................................................176
Access Code Setting ........................................................................176
Activation Period ..............................................................................177
Manual Activation .............................................................................179
Manual RX Print................................................................................180
Security Code, see also Passwords, and Access Codes
Polling Security Code........................................................................139
SecureReception .............................................................................176
Security Polling Reservation .......................................................................138
Security Transmission ................................................................................194
Send After Scan
T
TelephoneHandsetOperation(Optional) .....................................................117
On-HookDialing ................................................................................117
Redialing ...........................................................................................118
ToneOutput ......................................................................................118
TerminalID .................................................................................................34
Terminal ID Setting ...........................................................................42
Terminal ID, Quick Start ...................................................................34
Test Mode...................................................................................................240
Time and Date ............................................................................................40
TonerCartridgeReplacement ......................................................................28
TOSHIBAViewer
Default Setting ..................................................................................92
Temporarily .......................................................................................190
SeparatorPageSetting
BrowseFolders
Add/Edit Phoonebook contacts on the DP120F/DP125F.........275
ChangingtheDeviceConfiguration .........................................270
CreatingaRoutingRules ........................................................279
CopySeparatorPage ........................................................................53
291
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CreatingFolder .......................................................................281
Finding items stored in TOSHIBA Viewer folders ....................280
Saving the Device Configuration .............................................273
SavingthePhonebook ............................................................277
ComputerRequirements....................................................................261
ConfigurationOftheCD-ROM ...........................................................261
Description of the Main Welcome Menu ............................................269
DeviceConfiguration .........................................................................261
File Scan ..........................................................................................282
Installation ........................................................................................262
Installing the TOSHIBA Viewer
Device Setup ..........................................................................264
Installation ..............................................................................262
Introduction .......................................................................................260
LicenseAgreement ...........................................................................258
TOSHIBA Viewer GDI Printer
When the recorded image is not clear ...............................................235
TTI (Transmit Terminal ID) Print..................................................................167
TurnaroundPollingReception......................................................................147
TXReport ...................................................................................................74, 80
U
UserInterfaceOperation .............................................................................35
User Test Mode
Automatic Test .................................................................................240
Individual Test ..................................................................................241
ADF Test ................................................................................242
Key Test.................................................................................244
LCD Test ................................................................................246
LED Test ................................................................................245
Speaker Test ..........................................................................247
Switch Test ............................................................................248
Test Print................................................................................251
Printing a Test Result .......................................................................252
Printing from TOSHIBA Viewer UniPad...................................284
PrintingOtherApplication .......................................................285
Uninstalling the TOSHIBA Viewer .....................................................268
TransmissionJournal ..................................................................................205
Setting ..............................................................................................195
TransmissionOptions .................................................................................181
Attaching a Cover Sheet ...................................................................187
CommunicationReportPrint .............................................................182
DelayedCommunication(TimeDesignation) .....................................181
DialingwithSub-Address ..................................................................185
LineMonitor ......................................................................................193
LineSelection ...................................................................................189
LowSpeedTransmission ..................................................................184
Priority Transmission ........................................................................183
Security Transmission ......................................................................194
Send After Scan Temporarily ............................................................190
Setting the Page Count .....................................................................192
TransmissionReport ...................................................................................207
Troubleshooting ..........................................................................................226
Clearing a Document Jam .................................................................232
ClearingaRecordingPaperJam .......................................................233
Error Codes Printed on Reports.........................................................229
ErrorMessages ................................................................................226
ReceptionProblems..........................................................................231
TransmissionProblems ....................................................................230
V
VolumeAdjustment
AlarmTone .......................................................................................48
BellRinger ........................................................................................47
Key Touch Tone ...............................................................................49
Monitor .............................................................................................50
292
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
© Copyright TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION 2000
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
DP120F/DP125F
Printed in Japan
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|